/f>> /£. 
 
 
 
 DUKE 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
 Treasure T(oom 
 
tt£fi£RIA?M 
 
/ 
 
THE 
 
 ARTE OF 
 
 LOGICKE- 
 
 Plainly taught in the Englifh Tongue, 
 according to thebeft approoued 
 
 . A.VTHOVRS. 
 
 Very necefTary for all Stvdents in any 
 
 Proftfiion , how to defend any Argument again ft all 
 
 ' fubtill Sophi{ter$,andcaueliingSchifmatikcs,and 
 
 how to confute their fd ft Sytkgifmes^&nd 
 
 apiitus Arguments. 
 
 By M. Blyndevhe.' 
 
 L O N D O 
 
 N. 
 
 Printed by William $tanshy> and are to be 
 
 fold by Matthew Lownes. 
 
 1 6 1 p. 
 

 -*"*. 
 
 y$.y 
 

 To the Reader. 
 
 M* <^g biding here to treat e of the Art of 
 \f 1% Logicke in our "vulgar tongue , for 
 *J) the profit of thofe my (jountrey- 
 |5 men , that are not learned in for- 
 raine tongues: I thinke it nofhame 
 nor robberie to borrow termes of 
 the f aid Art from the La tines , afi- 
 ^ell as they did from the Greekes : and Jpeci 'ally finch 
 termes as cannot bee aptly expreffed in our natnit-* 
 Jpeech : and yet therewith I doe not forget plainly to 
 Jhew the fi unification of euery fiucb terme, fo as euery 
 man may eajily lender fiand Ktbat each terme figni- 
 fieth : thinking it much better fib to doe, then to faints 
 new Coords Improper for thepurpofie, asfiome of latt^ 
 haue done. j4ndas my minde is hereby to pleafie tbc^, 
 Unlearned, that are defircus of learning, bauin? both 
 good 'frits, andalfo-ood difpofhionwith aptneffeto 
 learne. So my hope is not to cjfend the learned , ^vho, 
 lam Jure doe well allow of Ariftotle, in faying, that 
 euery good thing, the more common it be, the better h 
 is : ney ther are they ig n or an t , that in old time pa ft, 
 tfiwell the Greekes as the Lames , of -frbat Jrte fioe- 
 
 5 2 H er 
 
To the Reader. 
 
 tier they wrote, each one "Wrote the fame, for the moth 
 part , in his owns Vulgar fpeech. Euery man is not 
 able in thefe cojily dayes , to find either himjelfeor 
 hisChildeattbe Vniuerfnie 9 whom if God notwith- 
 fianding hath indued with a liuely wit, and made-* 
 him f) apt to learning, as hauing Jome belpe at home, 
 he may by bis owne indujlry , attaine ynto right good 
 knowledge, nnd be made thereby the more able to glo- 
 rifie God , and to profit bis Countrey. Truly, I fee n* 
 eaufe why the learned fbould difdatne , or beemifcon- 
 tem that fuch Manor Child fbould bee freely taught 
 this or any other good Arte , without any cofi or 
 charge. Wherefore arming my felfe with ajfured 
 hope, that with this my labour , I Jh all greatly profit 
 and pleafure the Unlearned , and not hinder or dif- 
 f lea fe the learned, I will boldly follow mine enter- 
 prise , and here briefly /hew the order of my J aid 
 V/orke , which is diuidedinto fixe Parts or Bookes : 
 for fith Logicke is. chiefly occupy ed in dijcufing of 
 Qjteftions-y and that fuch Queflions, both fimple and 
 compound doe fpting of words , the firji Part of my 
 *Booke fhall treate of 'Words , Jbewing which bez~> 
 Simple, which bee Compound , and alfo which com- 
 prebend more, and which comprehend leffe : and "Which 
 be of affinitie, and which bee not : leaning out no ne* 
 cefjary ([{iiles belonging thereunto , that are taught 
 mher by Ariftotle, or by any other Moderne Writer, 
 
 Se° 
 
To the Reader. 
 
 Secondly, becaufe all Jimp le Questions conji fling of 
 Jingle words 9 are to bee difcufjed by Definition and 
 (Diuifion : the Jecond Tart treatetb of them both, 
 and therewith fieweth alfo frith lohat metbode and 
 order fucb jimple Quejtions are to be bandied. Third- 
 ly, becaufe all compound Qjieflions are to bee dijeufjed 
 byreafoning or argumentation , and that e^ry kind 
 of argument doth confifi of Propofitions : the third 
 Tart treateth of a Tropofition , and of all things be- 
 longing thereunto, fourthly , becaufe no found argu- 
 ment cm be made to prone or difprooue anything that 
 is in quefiion, Imleffe the Dijputer know from whence 
 to fetch his proofes : the fourth Tart of my Jjookt-* 
 treateth of all the places from whence any argument is 
 to be fetched. And the fifth Tart treateth of Argu- 
 mentation , and of all the kinds thereof, teaching 
 how euery kind is to be performed. The fixt 
 and laft Tart treateth of Confutati- 
 on, /hewing how aUSophtfti- 
 call arguments are to 
 be confuted, . 
 
 * 3 4 
 
 "3 
 
^uncll 
 
 A <Po8fcript. 
 
 T Hough I wrote this Bookc many yecrcs paft , whileftl 
 fojourned with my moft deare Brother in Law, Mafter 
 William jjtrnel, a man of moft lingular humanitie, and of great 
 hofpitalitie , athishoufein Winkborne in Nottinghamshire, 
 not farre from Southwell: yet notwithstanding vpon diuers ne- 
 ceffary considerations (as I thought) fince that time moouing 
 me thereunto, I fiill flayed it from the PreiTe, rntill now of late 
 that I was fully perfwaded by diuers of my learned friends , to 
 put it in print, who hauing diligently perufed the fame, and li- 
 king my plaine order of teaching vfed therein,thoughtit a moft 
 neccflary Booke for fuch Ministers as had not beenebrought 
 vp in any Vniuerfitie : to many of which Ministers though God 
 had giucn the gift of vtterance, and great good zealetofet 
 forth in good fpeech the true Christian doctrine : yet, if they 
 fhould haue to deale with fubtil SophiSters and cauelling Schif- 
 matikes (whereof in thefedayes, the more is the pittie, there 
 are too many)they were not able without the helpe of Logicke, 
 to defend the Truth of Gods Word,and orderly to confute fuch 
 falfe Conclufions asperuerfe Schifmatikes and Heretikes are 
 wont to gather out of the very words of holy Scripture .• 
 wherefore, through my faid friends perfwaSions, I haue now 
 at length committed my faid Booke to the Pre(Te,praying 
 all thofe that fhall vouchfafe torcade it, as 
 thankfully to accept the fame, as 
 of my part it is friend- 
 ly offered : 
 
 The 
 

 The Contents of the Chapters con- 
 tayned in thefe fixe Bookes of 
 
 Looicke-*. 
 
 The First Booke. 
 
 Treating of a Queftion, and of Words^ both Sin- 
 gular and Vniucrfall. 
 
 W* Hathogiche is, of what parts it confifteth , and whereto 
 fuch parti doe [erne, Which bee the two chief "e offices of 
 L ogicke, and wherein L ogiche is chiefly occupy ed , thzt 
 is, indifcuffing of JQueftions, which is done by Definition % 
 ^Diuifion, and Argumentation, C h a p . i . 
 
 What a queflton is , and that euery queftion is ejther fimple or 
 compound, alfo of what parts a compound quefttonconfifleth (that is 
 to fay ) of two parts, called the Subiefl and the Predicate, and what 
 thefe termes doefignifie. Becaufe all queflions doe confift of words ei- 
 ther fimple or compound, m this Chapter are fet downe three princi- 
 f all diutfions of words. First >which be fimple, and which be compound. 
 Secondly, which be ofthefirfi intention, and which bee of the fecond 
 intention : and thirdly, which be fingular , called in L.ttine Indiui- 
 du a, and which be vniuerfall. Ch ap .2 . 
 
 TTWlndiuiduumfef, and all the fourehinds thereof (that u) 
 Indiuiduumdeterminatum, Indiuiduum demonftratiuum , In- 
 diuiduumvagum,**^ Indiuiduumexhypothefi (that is to fay) 
 hy fuppofition. Chap. 3. 
 
 Of vniuerfall words, whereof fome are called Ptedicab Its , e.nd- 
 fome Predicaments, and fir ft, of the fiue Predicabhs (that is) Ge- 
 nus, Species, Differentia , Proprium , and Accidens , and how 
 tuery one is diuided, and to what vfes theyferue, butfirfl cf 'Species, 
 4nd then of the reft. Ch3p.4. 
 
 Of 
 
The Contents. 
 
 Of ' Predication and of the diner shims thereof. . Chap.5« 
 • Of the ten Predicaments in gencrall, which be thefe, Subflantia, 
 Quantitas, Qualitas,Relacio,A&io,Paffio,Vbi,Quando, Situm 
 ell, and Habere. Chap. 6, 
 
 Of the foure predicaments , and (hewing which they bee, and to 
 what end they feme . Chap.7. 
 
 Of the ten Predicaments in fpeciall , farting what [ul fiance ts y 
 and hiw many kinds there be, and what properties it hath, whereto is 
 added the Table of Sub fiance. Chap. 8. 
 
 Of ^uar.titie, both whole and broken , called in Latine, Quanti- 
 tas continiia, & difcreta, and of the diners kinds of both quanti- 
 ties , and what properties quantity hath , whereto is added aT able of 
 quant it ie. Chap.p. 
 
 Of Quality , and of the four e kinds thereof \ and in this Chapter 
 are defined t be fiueintellettuall habits, that is. Intelligence ^Science t 
 Prudence, Art, and Sapience :it (hewethalforvhat properties qttalim 
 tie hath, and to euery of the four e kinds of quality is added his proper 
 Table. Chap. 10. 
 
 Of Relation , and of the kinds thereof, together with aTable 
 fhewwg euery kind , and finally what properties Relation hath. 
 
 Chap a i. 
 
 What Aftion is, an dhow it is diutded, and wha t properties doe be- 
 long thereunto. Chap. 1 2« 
 What Paffion is, and what properties doe belong thereunto. 
 
 Chap. 1 3« 
 
 What the Predicament Vbi is t and how it is diuided , and what 
 
 properties doe belong to that Predicament, Chap. 14. 
 
 What the Predicament Quando // , how it is diuided, and what 
 
 properties belong thereunto. Chap. 1 J. 
 
 What the Predicament Situm efle is, what itcomprehendeth, al- 
 
 fo what Defcnptions are to bee fetched from this Predicament , and 
 
 what things are faid to alter their fituation, and finally what pro- 
 
 . pert ie it hath, to which Predicament is added abrtefeTable. 
 
 Chap. 1 6. 
 
 The diners figntfications of the Predicament Habere , alfo what 
 
 words tt comprehendeth, with a Table [hewing the fame , and finally 
 
 what properties it hath. Chap. 1 7» 
 
 The 
 
The Contents. 
 
 The manifold vfes of the aforefaid ten predicaments. Ch ap. 1 8 . 
 
 OftheV > o^pved\c2imcms } whichareiKnumber/ine } thatts,0^' 
 poficio, ante and poft yfm-uxl, motus t and habere ^*nd ftrft of Op- 
 pofition, and hew many things are f Aid to agree together, to be diners , 
 or to be contrary one to another. Chap. T£. 
 
 Hove many wayes things are /aid to be one before or after another ; 
 and to what end that P oft predicament firtseth. Chap. 20. 
 
 Of the 'Toft predicament Simul ,' fbetvinghcwnlany wayes things 
 are fatdto be together. Chapel. 
 
 Of the Toft predicament MotUsJ, (hewing how many kinds of mo- 
 
 nings there be. . Chap.22. 
 
 How many way es the word Habere is to be wider ftood. Chap. 2 3. 
 
 The Second Bookh, 
 
 Treating of Definition, and of Diuifion, and of 
 Methode. 
 
 OT ^Definitions and /hewing how many kinds of Definitions there 
 bee. Chap. 1 . 
 
 How many Precepts Are to bet obferued to make a true definU 
 tioh; Chap. 2. 
 
 Of Diftifion, and of thediuers kinds thereof. Chap. 3. 
 
 How many -Preeejfcs art te—bee obferued to make, at me Dwi- 
 fion. Chap.4, 
 
 Of^lethod\andof the three kinds thereof that hs,(fompofitiue % 
 Refolutiue^ and T)iHifiue i and Methode U to be obferued m handling 
 either ofaftmple, or of a compound queftion. Chap. j. 
 
 The Third Booke. 
 Treating of a Propofition. 
 
 OF a Propofition, /hewing of what parts it conftfttth ', and how 
 many wayes tt is dmided , and what queftions are to bee askjd 
 
 A - 4- 
 
The Contents. 
 
 of A C ategorieaU or fimple pr op ofition, being diuided according tofub- 
 fiance, ejualitie, and auantitie. Chap, i , 
 
 Of the three properties belonging to a ftmple Propojitton, that if, 
 Oppofttion, Equiualency, and Conner fon, Chap.2. 
 
 Of the Lawos and conditions belonging to the four e Oppofites, and 
 aljo of the threefoldmatter of a Proportion, that it , NAturall, Cafu- 
 aS t and Remote, and then of O pfo fit ton , /herring how many wayes 
 fimple proportion t are j Aid to be oppofite one to another. Chap. 3. 
 
 Of the Equiualency of fimple proportions. Chap.4. 
 
 Of the Conner fion of fimple proportions , /hewing how manifold it 
 is. Chap. j. 
 
 Of a modal! Propofition, and of the two kinds thereof \that is to fay, 
 Coniunil andDtfwnU. Chap.6. 
 
 Of the Oppofnion , Equiualency , and Conner fion , belonging to 
 Moduli prcpofmons. Chap.7. 
 
 OfOppofition belonging to Modallpropofitions. Chap.8 . 
 
 Of Equiualency andConnerfion of Modallpropc fit ions. Chap.9. 
 
 Of an Hypothetic aII or compound Propofit ion '/hewing how it is di- 
 uided, that is, into a Conditionally Copula t me, And Difinntline, And of 
 yth At parts it confifieth, andalfo what things are to be confidered in a 
 compound Proportion. Chap. 10. 
 
 Of the truth and falfhood of all the three kinds of compound Pro- 
 pofitions, firfl , of the Conditionall ; fecondly , of Copulatme ; and 
 thirdly, of the DifiunEliue, Chap. 1 1 . 
 
 The Fovrth Booke. 
 Treating of Logicall places. 
 
 WTJAt a place is, And thAt it is twofold, thAt is, eyther of Per- 
 (ons or of things. <*s4 gaine, "the places of things bee either 
 artificial! or inartificxall, and the artificial! places of things are either 
 i*vrar d, out?? zrd, or meane ; and the martificiaQ places of things are 
 fixetnnur,:bcr i cvn preher.de dvnder the pLcc of AUthoritie, as the 
 T *kle cf rl*C's (tt downe in the beginning of this Chapter doth 
 plains ly ficw. A'Jo tt is Chapter fitwah to what end Juch manifold 
 
 dmi- 
 
The Contents. 
 
 diuifions of the places ferueth , and howplaces art dtuided accor- 
 ding to the Schvolemen , that is , into Maximes , and difference of 
 Maximes, Chap.i. 
 
 Examples of all the places belonging toperfons. Chap.i. 
 
 Of the pl.ices of things, and firjt of artificial! places , whereof 
 feme be inward, fome onward, andftme meane : and fir fi of inward 
 places, whereof fome belong to the Jul fiance of things , and fome doe 
 accompany the fub fiance , gimng examples of euery f/ace, together 
 •with their proper Maximes or generall Rules, belonging to the fame, 
 and how Arguments are to be fetched from euery finch place, either af- 
 firmatiuely or negatiuely, or both wayes. Chap.q. 
 
 Of outward places, Jhewing how Arguments are to be fetcht from 
 euery fitch place , together with the generall Rules or Maximes be- 
 longing to the fame, Chap.^. 
 
 Of meane places , giuing examples, and jhewing how Arguments 
 art to be fetcht from fuch places, together with the Rules belonging 
 thereunto. Chap. 5. 
 
 Of the fixe inartificial! places comprehended vnder the place of 
 Authoritie, whereunto is added *T able of authentic, iA*dinthis 
 (fhapter is not only declared to what end the knowledge of all the fore- 
 said plates dot ferue , but alfo it fheweth by one example how to vfie 
 them when need is, either to prcoue or to dilate any Thcame, which 
 example is taken out of Hunneus.7~6* Theame whereof is tbtuMzn 
 ought to embrace Vertue. Chap.<5. 
 
 The Fift Bo oke. 
 
 Treating of Argumentation ; and of 
 Demonstration. 
 
 OF Argumentation, and of 'the feure kinds thereof in generall, 
 and alfo of the fir fi principles of a Syllogtfme,afwellmateriallat 
 regular, 
 
 What a Syllogifme is, how it is diuided, and of what parts it confi- 
 Jitth , that is, of matter and forme. 
 
 What that matter and fiormt is 9 and that the matter confifietb of 
 
 A a thret 
 
.The Concerns. 
 
 threittrmes and three proportions, and the Fahut to cwfift *f Fi- 
 gure and Mood. lAlfo by what meanes the meane terme or proofe is 
 to be found out. *Aud final!}, it defimth the three Propo/it ions, where- 
 ofa fimple Syllogifme confjleth, /hewing how they are named,and how 
 to frame the fame to make a true Sy llogifme. Ghap. 5 . 
 
 What Figure or Mood is , whereof the forme of a Syllogifme con- 
 fifieth, and how many fitch Figures there be , and when a SjHogifme is 
 /aid to conclude directly cr indirectly : itfheweth alfo how many 
 Unicodes doe belong to eUcry Figure, and how they are named. And 
 finally, what the foure Vowels K s e , i , o , doe fig»ifie in any fitch 
 Mood or Vocable of Art. Chap,^. 
 
 Certaine rules afwell generall as fpeciall belonging to the three 
 Figures. Chap, 5. 
 
 Examples of the foure perfect (JHoodes, belonging to thefirfl Ft* 
 gure. Chap, 6. 
 
 Examples of the fine vnperfelt Moodes, belonging tothtfirft Fi- 
 gure. Chap. 7. 
 Examples of foure Lflfeodes , belonging to the fecond Figure. 
 
 Chap.S. 
 Examples of the fxe Moodes , belonging to the third Figure, 
 
 Chaprp. 
 
 Of a SyRogifme expo fitory ^(hewing why it is fo called. Chap. 1 o. 
 
 An [were to an obieltion concerning the three Figures and Moods t 
 
 belonging to the fame . Ch a p . 1 1 . 
 
 Of Reduction, and of the kinds thereof, andalftfof the fignifica- 
 
 ti$n of certaine Confonants in the words of Art, f truing to Reduction. 
 
 Chap. 12. 
 
 Of Reduction by impojftbility , ftiewing vnto which of the perfect 
 
 Moodes, eucryvnperfebl Moode is to bee reduced by impoffibilitie. 
 
 Chap.l^. 
 
 Of a Syllogifme made in oblique cafes, and of the fix abilities, and 
 
 three defects of a Syllogifme. Chap.'i 4* 
 
 Of a compound Syllogifme , fhtwing that it is threefold^ that is, 
 
 Condition all, Copulatiue , andDifimcliue , and that the truth of a 
 
 compound Syllogifme is to bee found out by reducing the fame into a 
 
 fimple Syllogifme . Chap. 1 j. 
 
 Of a Confequent , fhewmg what it island of how many part sit 
 
 con- 
 
The Contents. 
 
 eonfifieth, andhowitu diuided, alfo by whatmeanct , and by what 
 Rules thsgoedneffe of a Confetjttcnt is to be knowne. Chap, 1 6, 
 
 Of (±Syfo%ifme demonfiratiue , fhewing what it is, and of what 
 manner of Propofitiovs it confifieth , which Propositions 'are here 
 defined, it fheweth alfo the three properties belonging to the Tredi- 
 cate and Subietl of a demonfiratiue Propofition , and alfo fheweth 
 what definitions Ariftotle maketh of denanfiration , and it defiutth 
 what Science is, and thereby giueth example of a Syllogifme demon- 
 fir at'me. Chap. 1 7. 
 
 Of 'the three things , whereon deptndeth the certayntie of '{JWans 
 knowledere , that is , vnsuerfall experience , principles, and mans na- 
 turall knowledge miudging of Conferments , (hewing hew principles 
 are defined by Ariftotle , and how thty are diuided by the Schoole- 
 men. Chap, 18. 
 
 That the Schoole-men doe dittide Demonfiration into two kinds i 
 that is , either per fed or vnperfe l~l , wherein is declared what is to be 
 obferued in either kind of demonfiration. Chap. I 9, 
 
 Of Science, Opinion, Ignorance, Wit, and the four efcientiall que- 
 fiiovs. Chap. 20, 
 
 Of a Syllogifme Dialeclicall, focwing what it is, and of what kinds 
 of Propofitions tt is made , and what things are faid to be probable : 
 Againettf fheweth how the Schoole-men doe make the matter, wheri- 
 of a Syllogifme coytfifieth to betwofold, that is, Materia remoti,and 
 Materia propinqua, and what each matter contaynetb. And finally t 
 it fheweth the difference betwixt a T^ialeUicaU Propofition , a Pro- 
 bleme, and a1 y option. Chap.21. 
 
 Of a fophifiicall Syllogifme , /hewing what it is , and that it may 
 be falf&thrce manner cfwayes. *AljO in this Chapter is declared 
 another hfnde of falfe Syllogifme, called Syllogifmus falfigra- 
 phus. Chap, 22. 
 
 Of lnduUton , (hewing what it is,andwhat is to be obferued t here- 
 in, and that itistwofold, that is , perfect andvnpcrfecl, Chap,2?. 
 
 O; an Enthimeme , jhewing what it is , of what parts it co^fifieth^ 
 and from whence that kindof Argument is to be fetched. Chap. 24. 
 
 Of an example, fhewing what it is , and wLerein if differ etb fronts 
 all the other formes of Arguments , and to what end it feruet.h , And 
 
 A 1 what 
 
The Contents. 
 
 what is to be obj "true A in reafoning tbtreby. i/ind finally , from what 
 places fuch Argument is to be fetched. Cha p . 2 5 . 
 
 Of an Argument called Sorites , (hewing how it proceeded, and 
 wherein it differ eth from the Argument of the Rhetoricians called 
 Gradatio. Chap.26. 
 
 Of diners other kinds of captions Arguments , and firfl of Di- 
 lemma } /hewing of what parts it confifleth , and how many kinds of 
 captions Arguments it cemprehendeth , which are thefe foure , that 
 is, Ceratins or horned Arguments, Crocodelites, Afsiftatons, and 
 P feudomenons, euery one of which is here defined, and example gi- 
 ven thereof. Chap.27. 
 
 Of an argument called Enumcratio , /hewing what it is, and how 
 it is to be confuted. Chap. 28. 
 
 Of an Argument called Simplex condufio, /hewing what it 
 is. Chap. 29. 
 
 Of an Argument called Subie&'io, frewing what it is, and that it 
 differethnot much from Enumcratio before defcribed. Chap. 30. 
 
 Of an Argument called OppoCiiio, made of parts repugnant. 
 
 Chap.31, 
 
 Of an Argument called Violatio, which is more meete to confute 
 then t§ prone. Ch ap . 3 2 . 
 
 The Sixth Booke. 
 
 Treating of Confutation. 
 
 COnfntation is twofold, whereof 'the one belongeth to the Per/on, 
 the other to the Matter : and that of Matter is diuided into two 
 kinds, that is, Generall and Speciall , and the genera 11 confutation is 
 done three manner of wayes,that is, either by denying the Confequent, 
 by malting diflinttion , or elfe by inflame , any of which three wayes, 
 when it is to bevfed,is here fetdowne. Chap. I, 
 
 Of fpeciall confutation , /hewing how it is done, and what order 
 Ariftoile obferueth in treating of ffisciall confntation,whofe order is 
 briefly herefet downe, and firfl of an Elench. Chap. 2. 
 
 Of 
 
The Contents. 
 
 Of Deputation, andjheweth how mantfold it is. Chap. 3 . 
 
 Fine market of Sophtftrie , that it , Reprehenfio , Abfur- 
 dum, Paradoxis, Solccifmus, and Nugatio, with their ex- 
 amples* Chap,4. 
 
 There be thirteen e Fallaxes 3 whereoffixe doe confift in Words > and 
 feuen in Things, andfirft it treateth of the fixe Fall axes confifting in 
 Words , andfheweth how to confute the fame. Chap. j. 
 
 Of the feuen Fallaxes confifting in Things , and Jheweth by ex- 
 amples how to confute the fame. Chap. 6. 
 
 THE 
 
THE ARTE OF 
 
 LOGICKE. 
 
 Tbefirji 'Booke. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Of the Arte of Logicke ,andef the parts dfta of 
 
 fices thereof. 
 
 Hat it LogicJ^ ? 
 
 L^gitkeis an Art, which traeheth ys 
 to dispute probably on both fides ota- 
 ry matierthat is propounded. 
 
 Of what and how many p«rtj doth it 
 confift ? 
 
 Ot t wor.hac is,Inuention and Iudge- 
 ment. 
 
 Whereto fertte thefepa*1& 
 Inui'.nrjon findeth out meetc matter to proouc the thing that 
 yecint?nd : and Iudgement examineth the matter , whether it 
 be good, or not*, and then frameth, difpofeth, andreduceththe 
 fame into due forme of argument. 
 
 What is the chief e end or office of Logicke ? 
 Th<" chiefe end or office of Logicke is twofold : Tr e one to 
 difciilfc truth fromfalfhood in any manner of fpeech; the o\htr 
 is to teach -compendious way to auaine to any.Art 01 Scif nee. 
 
 B M 
 
7be^rJi < Boo{e 
 
 And therefore it is defined of fome , to be the Art of Arts, and 
 Science of Sciences; not for that ittcache;h the principles ofe- 
 ucry Art or Science (for thofe are to be learned of the ProfefT rs 
 of fuch Arts or Sciences) but becaufe it fheweth the method 
 that is to fay, the true order and right way that is to bee obfer- 
 ued in feekingtocomctothe perfect, knowledge of any Art or 
 Scicnce.OPwhichmethodicall part, mine olde friend M. Income 
 A^on'.to Tridentino hath written in the Latine Tongue a very 
 proper and profitable Treatife. And therefore I minde here to 
 dcale onely with the fitft office, which is to difcuife and to dif- 
 cerne truth from falfhood in. any fpcech or quellion that is pro- 
 pounded. 
 
 How it that to be done . ? 
 
 By three fpeciall inltrumenr»:thati«,byDerinition,Diuifion, 
 and Argumentation : whereof we Irnll fpeakc hereafter in their 
 proper places. In the meane time.becaufe qucftions are the mat- 
 ter wherein Logickcis chiefly occupied, wee will fpcake firftof 
 aqueftion. 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 Of a queftioH, and of cert tune dittiftons of words. 
 
 r Jat is a que/Hon ? 
 
 A queftion is s fpeech whereof fome doubt is 
 made and vttercd with fome interrogatoric : a*, 
 How, What, or Whether : and fuch queftion is 
 either (imple or compound. 
 Wh ich call yofi fmple t and which compound f 
 It is called fimple, when the queftion confifteth onely of one 
 word: as when I aske what Iuftice is, or what Fortitude is, and 
 (uch tike ; and is to bee difcuffed by defining and diuidingthc 
 fame. It is called compound, when it confiileth of many words 
 ioyned together by rules of Gramar, to make fome perfect fen- 
 tence; as whrn I askc whether it beelawfullfor the Chrtftians 
 io make warrc vpon the Turkcs,or not: and fuch like qucftions, 
 whicharetobeedifcufledby argUiag and rcafoning on both 
 fides : For Definition, Diuifion , and Argumentation , as I faid 
 before,are the three efpectall inftruments whereby Logicke fin- 
 aecft out the truth in any doubtftiUnuccer, Of 
 
OfLogicke* 5 
 
 Of »h*t fdrts dtth 4 cemfounA^Hefioti ccnftft I 
 
 Of two, that is, the fubiect and the predicate. 
 What meant you by theft words, fu bitti *nd freMctit i 
 
 Thefubie&is the word or femence, whereof another wore 
 o* fentence,called the predicate^ ipoken: as when 1 fav,Man is 
 a fenfiblc body; here this word Man is the fubied , and fcnfible 
 body is the predicate : or each of them may contains many 
 words, as this,To be learned in the Law requircth a long ftudy; 
 here To be learned in the Law is the fubiec-t , and all the reft -15 
 the predicate. 
 
 Howjb»Ul know in longfreeches, AndfytcUlly btingfrefefttrotifij 
 f ttfVhich is thefnbitQ, andwhich id the predicate / 
 
 By asking this queftion, Who, or What : for that which an- 
 fwcreth to this queftion, is alwaie* the Subicdt, as in this exanv 
 pie: It were meet to learne my Grammar perfectly, before I r n- 
 tred into my Logicke : here if you aske,What is meet, you {"hall 
 find that to learne my Grammar perfectly is the Subiect, and all 
 the reft to bee the predicate. And note that thefe two words, 
 Subject and Predicate, are faid to bee the termes, limits, or ex- 
 treme bounds of a propofition,wherof v\c ftial fpeake hereafter, 
 
 Stth enery <ptrfltcn doth eonftft of words t we thm\et it were necef- 
 $ary to (btw bow words are divide d. 
 
 Of words the Schoolemen make diners and manifold diuifi- 
 ons, of which I mind here to recite but three onely,whereof the 
 firftis this:Of words fome be fimplc,which chey call IncZflex* ; 
 and feme bee compound, which they call Complcxs. Simple or 
 (ingle words , are fuch as are (ole or feuered one from another, 
 not making any fentence, as Man, Horfe, Wolfe. The com- 
 pound arc wordes ioyred ordctly together by rules of Gram- 
 mar, to rmkc fome perfect fentence, as Man is a fenfible body. 
 And hereof the quoftions arc faid to bee cither fimple or com- 
 pound, as hath beenc faid before. 
 
 ffhat is thofecond diuifi n of words f 
 
 Of words, fome be otihc firft Intention, and fome of the fe- 
 cond. 
 
 Which urethtyt 
 
 Words of the firft Intention arc thofe, whereby anything is 
 
 B % fignified 
 
The firft 'Boofy 
 
 fignified or named by thepurpofcand meaning of the firft Au- 
 thor or Inueneor thereof, in any fpeech or language whatfoe- 
 uer it be : as the beaft whereon wee commonly ride, is called in 
 Engltfh a Horfe , in Lattne EefMtu, in Italian Cau»Uo i in French 
 ChtH.d. Words of the fecond Intention are termes of Art, as a 
 Noune, Pronoune, Verbe, or Participle , are termes of Gram- 
 mar : likewife Genus , Species , Proprittvt, and fuch like, are 
 termes of Log'cke. 
 
 Wwt is the thtrd diuifon of wards? 
 
 Of word-* fame becalled lndimduaj\\%\ is to fay,particu!ar \ 
 or rather fine utar; and fomebe calLed Vmtirrf ah* t thai is to fay, 
 vniuctlall, corpmon or general!. 
 
 CHAP. 1 1 T. 
 
 Offvtgtthr and monarticular nerds t called Indiuidua, 
 
 hat is In&.uidtium ? 
 
 lndifttaMkm\s that which fignifieth but one 
 
 thing only, aid can be applyed bui to one thing- 
 only; as this name, fohn^ or Robert , fignifieth' 
 but one ce rta'pe man, ami not many. 
 Hove maty kin is of Ind'tudnnmi he tkerft 
 Foure, that is, Indmiuum ietrrmthdiHfk , Indmiduum slemon- 
 fira t wttm , tndimdttum vagum , and Indtrndnttm ex hypoi b<(i, 
 W.)*t t6 In d Hiduum dettrnanatum } 
 
 Jndiui nam da erminitnm, thai ii to fav,rertaine or determi- 
 ned, is the proper name of fame one certame thing , whatfoe- 
 uerube, as lohn ox Thomas is the proper name of fame or one 
 man • as»aine,7?»fe^W*# is the proper name of great Alexander 
 hh Horfe : and London'n the proper name of ihcchiefeltCiiicin 
 £r gland. 
 
 IV •at is fadiuidttum demon fir at iuttm ? 
 
 Indiuidtwm demonftratittum, which «s as much to fay,as View- 
 ing or poinnng,is a common word or name loyned wiih a Pro- 
 noune demon(Tratiue,to fignifie fame one certa'*ne thing oncly^ 
 as when we fay,t!iis man,or that horlcrand indmidnums demnn- 
 iatatiue be more redy to fignifie particular things^as vvel in acci- 
 dent^ 
 
ofLogicke. 5 
 
 dents as in fubftanees, then arc IndiutduAdetfrmwAta: for This, 
 or That , and fuch like Pronounes , doc point out a thing , as it 
 were, with the finger, when proper names oftentimes doe faile : 
 yea,tbc Pronoune demonrtratiue is of luch force , as being ioy« 
 ned co the moM g?nerall word that is , maketh it Indiuiduum, as 
 well as when it is ioyned to themo{teipcciail:for,this fubftancc 
 or this body is lndiutduum^ as well as this man or that horfe. 
 
 What is IndimdttMm vagum ? 
 
 IndiHidnHm v^gum, that is to fay,wandering or vncertayne,is 
 a word betokening feme one certa^ nc thing but not certainly : 
 as when I fay, There was a eertayneman heic tofcekeyou; by 
 this fpcech is meant but one man , and yet vncertayne who it 
 was : and therefore, to make the thing more certayne, we vfc to 
 addeiome token ormarke; as wereade in the vftf/of the Apo- 
 ftles, There wot a tertayne man which wm halt and Ittme from his 
 mothers w»mbe , whom they laid daily before the gate of the Temple, 
 <$c. And note , that like as we doe vie tndtutdua, dfMonjtratiM*, 
 and determinate, in declaring things either prefent, or certainly 
 lcnowne:<o in fpeakirg of things abfenr,or vncertainly known, 
 WC exprclTe our minds oftentimes by tnaimdna vaga, 
 
 Wh*t is Indmtduum ex kypjthef. ? 
 
 tr>dt*iduum ex kypo>he/i y ihat is to fay by fuppofition,is a word 
 which of his ownc naturall fignification being common and v- 
 niuerfall, is made notwithstanding by iuppofiticn a lingular 
 word, and to figmfie but one thing one'y :as for example, this 
 word, The fet.tie of ' Msrie , is a common terme.and yet by luppo» 
 fition is made to fignifie none but Gbrtft onely : likewife whea 
 We fay, The (jretke Poet, we meanc none but Hcmer, 
 
 CHAP. HIT. 
 Of words VMMerftll er generat. 
 
 Uatwnds arefaidto bevnitterfall or generally 
 
 Thofe words are faid to be vniucrfall , which 
 
 are fpoken of many things, that is to fay , which 
 
 may be applycd to many things, or comprehend 
 
 many things, as this word Animal (which is ss 
 
 B 3 niuchi 
 
the fir jl "Book 
 
 e 
 
 much to fay as a fcntible body) comprchcndeth both Man,bru»t 
 Bcaft,Fi{h,Fowlc,Bird,and euery thing elfc that hath feeling and 
 motiing. 
 
 How are fttch werds dinided} 
 
 IntoPredicables and Predicaments, 
 
 Of the fine e Prcdicab?cs. 
 
 W Hat call yon Pre die able s> 
 PredicMes are cert^yne degrees,or rather pedigrr es 
 of words that be or one arfinuie , (hewing which comprehend 
 more, and which comprehend kfTc. 
 
 How ntA*ty fuch be thrre ? 
 
 There be rui«, that is to fay , Genui y Speeies i r D fferemtia, Pre- 
 print* , & Accident-, which may be Engli(h«d thus, Ceneiall 
 kind, Speciall kind, Difference, Prop<rtie,and Accident. But wc 
 thinke it belt to begin fiat with Spictes, becaufe it is next to In* 
 dimdnanu. 
 
 Of the fpeciall hind galled in Latine Species* 
 
 WHat it Species} 
 Spates is a fpeciall kind , which is fpoken of many 
 things, thatistofay, itcomprehendethmany thing* differing 
 only in number , in asking the queftion , what the thing is: as 
 •when I aske, What is John ? it is nghily anfwered,to lay, A man: 
 for this word Man is an vniuerfall word , comprehending both 
 lehnJThomttyRobert, and all other Angular men. 
 
 How tnanifold ts Species ? 
 
 Twofold, that is, l*fima and Snbalterna t Ixfimajhat i« to fay, 
 the loweft or molt efpeciall kind, is that whic h comprehendeth 
 many thirgs differing only in number, and therefore cannot be 
 a general! kind, asMan,Horie,and luchlike fp'cioll kinds. Spe- 
 Cttsjubalterna, is that which cnmpichmdeth many things dtrre- 
 ring in kind , and in diucrs refpedts may be both get us and fpe- 
 f/rr,as thefe words, Anmal oxtcnhbXz body,Bird,Fifh : for this 
 word&y^, in that it con.prebendeihdiuers kinds of birds, as a 
 Blackbkd,a Mauys,a Goldrincb,and many other kinds of bird - % 
 
 it 
 
o/Logicfy, 
 
 it is a generall kind : but m refpec* of thcfe words , Subftance, 
 Body, or A*tm*l t it is but fpecies. 
 
 Haw is Jfeciet called, of the Greekj f 
 
 It is called ides, which is as much to fay, as a common (hape 
 cpnceiued in the mine!, through fome knowledge had before of 
 one or wo Indimduttrnt hauingtrm fhape : fo as after wcehaue 
 feeneone Wolfe,or two^vebcare the fhape thereof continually 
 in our minds , and thereby are able to know a Wolfe whenfoe- 
 ucr we find him, or (if need be) to paint him. But Genm cxten- 
 dcthtoo farre , and comprchendeth too many fpeciall kinds ro 
 be fo eaftly painted. And note that fuch fhapes or Idea arc faid 
 alfotobeperpetuall. 
 
 Why are they [aid to bs perj^t stall} 
 
 Becaufe they continue in the mind , though the things them- 
 felues ceafe to haue any being: as the fhape of a Rofe continneth 
 in our minds in the cold heart of Winter, when there is no Rofe 
 indeed. And this is the true meaning of Plat* touching /<&■<«, that 
 is, to be perpctuall in the mind , not frparate from mans intelli- 
 gence , as fome men faine : for vniuerfalities are alwayes to bee 
 comprehended in mans mind, but not Indiutdtta : which, becaufe 
 they are inflnite,thcrc can be had of them no certayae fciencc or 
 knowledge. 
 
 Of t he generall kjnd , called Genus. 
 
 WHat is Genus } 
 Genus is a generall kind which may be fpoken ofma- 
 ny things differing in Ipeciall kind, in asking the queftion, whae 
 the thing is r as if I a;ke, What is man, orhorfe ? It is rightly 
 anfwered,to hv y Animal: for this word ^/w-a/comprehendetb 
 both man,horfe, lyon, and many other fpeciall kinds of bcafts. 
 Hon is it dtmded } 
 
 Into two,that M^Gemu moft gencrall,and Getstu fubalternate* 
 W-oat it Genus mofi generall} 
 
 It is that which in no refpect can beffecies^s ihefc,Subftance, 
 Qviantitie, Qjalitie , and ail the reft of the ten Predicaments, 
 which be the higheft kinds, comprehending ail other kinds,an& 
 are comprehended of none* 
 
 What 
 
8 The firfl 'Booty 
 
 What it that which jot* call fubaltetnate t 
 
 It is that which in diuers refpe&s may be both genHtindfpt* 
 f sV/,as thefe, Animal or fenfible body,ftone,tree,fifh,bird:which 
 being compared to their Superiors, as to iubltance or body, be 
 fpeciall kinds: but if to their Inferiors, as this word fenfible bo- 
 dy being compared to man or horfe,or this word ftone to a flint 
 or Diamond, or this word tree to an Apple-tree or Peare-tree,or 
 this word fifh to a Salmon or Pickerell , or this word bird to a 
 Mauys or Goldfinch, and fuch like, then they be general! kinds. 
 The order of a»l which kinds, as well generall as fubaltr rnate,as 
 alfomoftcfprciall,you may fee herein the Table following ta- 
 ken out of the Predicament of fubftance : in which Table, Sub- 
 fiance is the higheft or moft generall kind, vnder which arr pla- 
 ced the leffe generall or fpeciall kinds , according as they be in 
 degrees high or low, nigh or farre from fubftance.Moreouer,ort 
 each fide of the generall kinds, are fet downe in this Table the 
 differences whereby the laid generall kinds are diuidedeuety 
 one into thofe inferior kinds which it comprehendeth. And the 
 like Table may be made of all the reft of the Predicaments. 
 
 A Table jhemngthe order and degrees of generall 
 
 kinds and (fpeciall ktndt, taken out of the Biedi- 
 
 cament of Subfiance. 
 
 D i ff e rcncc,,J|;"-; , k ^ ) |D, 1 r«c„c e s,^„ mp ,«; 
 
 StAn AngeU t 
 iA Sp'nt, 
 ^TbefouU of mmam 
 S*l ether C as p f g par«,ed from 
 
 <L the body, 
 C mpound */-v 
 
 the four, Ele-f f h y<j i - ithoiu He*ur*t. 
 
 menu . as al\* J . J yOrfmple i ai>~ / ... 
 
 !/ j f it (st it her I ' ( " 5 The 4. Elements. 
 naturaUbodtes\^ 
 
 and vnnatmalJ 
 
 Lifting 
 
Lifting, 
 
 Senjiblc, 
 
 Reafonable, ' 
 At man 
 
 [Body com- C 
 
 as 
 
 Againethe C 
 liuingbodfe2° r ™f' n f l ~ 
 [ueyther £ M* 4 * 
 
 'The fenfible 
 Jbody , called 
 in Latine 
 'Animal, 
 .it eyther 
 
 "The reafona- f 
 ble body is 
 man, called 
 in Latine 
 >! < Homo, 
 which is a 
 rnoftefpeci- 
 allkind : 
 
 )Or vnreafo* 
 nable, as 
 
 t/is 
 
 y St 0*6 S , 
 
 \Metals t 
 '^Ltqpters. 
 
 [Tree, 
 
 } Herbe t 
 
 [Shrftbbg, 
 
 *Fourefootedbeafts 
 \C reefing beafis, 
 
 ^Fowle, or 
 -Bird. 
 
 Socrates, Plato, 
 > and euery other 
 /insular maw. 
 
 Of Difference, called of the Latines, Differentia. 
 
 WHat is difference > 
 Difference is that whereby things doe differ one from 
 another, or any thing from it felfe. 
 
 Hew many kinds of differences be there ? 
 According to Porphyrin, there be chrec kinds, that is to fay, 
 common, proper, and moft proper or efpeciall,callcd of the La- 
 tines, Differentia jpectfica. 
 
 What call y ott a common difference ? 
 
 A common difference is fome feparable accident, whereby 
 one thing differeth from another, or from it felfe: as a hot man 
 from a cold, or a man ftanding from himfelfc fitting. 
 
 C What 
 
io The firjl <Booke 
 
 What ispPtfcr difertncc f 
 
 Apropci difference is fomc inftparaWe accident, whereby 
 one thing diflertfh from another , or from it Mft r as the Swan 
 by whitcnefle differeth from the Crow,the gray-eyed man from 
 another roan that hath blacke eyes, or from himfelfe , as hauing 
 now an vnmoueable skarrc in his face , whereas before hee had 
 none. 
 
 What it the mojl proper difference ? 
 
 The raoft proper difference, only receiued and alio wed of the 
 Logicians , is that which is fpoken of many. thing* differing in 
 kind or number, in asking thequeftion what manner of thing 
 •my thingis, as this word reafonable or vnreafonable: for if 1 
 aske the queftion , what manner of thing this man or that man 
 is, as lohn t Thomae, or Ttjchard.&c. it is rightly anfwered,to fay, 
 A reafonable body. Likewife if I aske what manner of thing a 
 Horfc is, it is truly anfwered, to fay, An vnreafonable body:for 
 thefe be the moft proper and elpeciall differences, whereby men 
 and bruit beafts doe differ one from another. 
 Hew manifold is the office of a Logic Ail difference ? 
 Twofold : the cne to diuide the gcnerall kind into his efpeci- 
 all kinds,and the other to conftitute or make the fdfe-fame fpe- 
 cial kinds. Wherefore fuch differences' are faid in diuers refpe&s 
 to be fometimes diuifiue, and fometimes conftitutiue, yea and 
 fometimes both ; as thefe differences, corporate and vncorpo- 
 rate,liuing and vniiuing,fcnfible and vnfer>(ibJe,reafoaablc and 
 vnreafonable; which, in that they do diuide fome gcnerall kind 
 into other kinds, eythermore fpeciall, or not fogenerall , they 
 i»ay be called differences diuifiue : but in that they conflitute or 
 make any fpeciall kind, as this difference reafonable beingad- 
 ded to a fenfible body, maketh the fpeciall kind, manjfuch dif- , 
 fereeccmay be well called a difference conftitutiue, or rather 
 fpecificatiue, as the farmer Table of gencrall kinds and diffe- 
 rences doth plainly fhew. 
 
 What other dim fun doe the Schoolemen make of this Legicall 
 difference} 
 
 They fay.that of thefe differeces fome do extend further then 
 fome/or fome may be apptyed tomany fpeciall kinds ; as"Jiuing 
 
 and 
 
efLogicfa ii 
 
 snd fnliuing, fenfible and ynfenfible, and a!fo the difference 
 vnreafonable, but the difference reafonable can be apply ed buc 
 Co one fpeciall kind onely., which is man. 
 
 Of Prcpertte, called in Latin* Pr oprium. 
 TTT7 Hat u frofertie t 
 
 V V It is a natural inclination or property incident to one 
 efpeciall kind,which is to be vnderftood foure miner of waies. 
 Shew how, 
 
 Firft, it is called Profrinm, which is proper to one onely kinfl, 
 but not to the whole kind,as to be a Poet or Mufician/is proper 
 to man, but not to euery manrSecondly, it is called proper thac 
 belongeth to all the kind, but not to that kind alone : as to bee 
 two-footed , belongeth to all mankind, but not to that kind a- 
 lone : for all flying Fowlcs arc alfo two-footed : Thirdly , it is 
 faid to be proper , when it belongeth to one only kind and to 
 all that kind, but yet not alwayes: as tobehore-headedor 
 bald , is proper to man in olde-age , but yet not alwaies: 
 Fourthly , it is faid to bee proper , or rather moft proper, 
 which is incident to one kind alone, to all that kind and al- 
 waies , as to haue a natural! aptnelTc to laugh or to fpeake is 
 proper toman onely, to euery man, and alwayes, and therefore 
 this kind of property is faid to bee conuertible, with the kind 
 whercunto it belongeth, as whatfoeuer hath naturally powerto 
 fpeake or laugh , the fame is man , and whatfoeuer is man , the 
 fame hath power to fpeake or laugh. 
 
 Of an accident , called m Latine, Accidcn $, 
 t 7T7 Hat is an accident ? 
 
 V V An accident is a voyce or word Signifying things 
 cafualljdeauing to fubftances or fubiecls , without which fub- 
 iecls they haue no being at all, and it is thus defined. An accident 
 is that wjiich may bee abfent or prefent without corruption of 
 the fubieft whereto it cleaueth,bccaufe it is no liibftantiall part 
 of the fubiecl, and of fuch accidents fome bee called feparable, 
 and fome vnfeparable. 
 
 What it a feparable accident > 
 
 A feparable accident is that which may beeeifily feparated 
 
 C a from 
 
ft The firfi Boofy 
 
 from the fubie&, as outward heat or cold from a mans body, 
 whitenefle or blacknefle from a wall. 
 
 What is an vnfep arable Accident} 
 
 An vnfeparable accident is that which cannot beefeparated 
 from his fubiecl in deed, but only in thought or imaginationjas 
 heat from the fire, heauinefle from lead. And fuch accidents bee 
 either incident to certaine fubie&s , or fubftanees in particular, 
 as iome men to bee gray-eyed , or red-headed ; or elfe to fome 
 whole kind in general!, as to all Rauenstobeblacke, and all 
 Swannes to be white. 
 
 Of the manifold vfes of the aforefc.id fine Predkables. 
 
 TO hovt many vfes doe the ? r edic able sf true t 
 To thefe foure neceffarie vfes : Firft, they (hew which 
 words doe comprehend more, or extend further*, and which 
 comprehend lefle or leaft, and what affinitie is betwixt word 
 and word, fo as in making any definition,a man may eafily per- 
 ceiue how eucry word ought to be expounded one by another, 
 that is to fay,the lefic common by that which is more common; 
 as if you. would define a Spanicll, you muft fay that he is a clog : 
 for this word dogge is a more common word then Spaniell,be- 
 caufeit comprehendethboth Spaniell, Grey-hound, Hound, 
 Curre, Maftiffe, and euery other kind of dogge. Secondly, they 
 {hew the nature of propositions, which be ncccflary,and which 
 be cafuall or accidentall. 
 
 Which call you necejfarj^ and which cafuall ? 
 
 That proposition is laid to be neceffary, whereof the predi- 
 cate is ey ther a generall kinde, a fpeciall kinde , a fpeciall diffe- 
 rence^ propertie, and is neceflfarily coupled to his fubiedr ; as 
 when I fay, lohn is a fenfible body, Iohn is a man, lohn is reaso- 
 nable, John is apt to fpeake. 
 
 When is a proportion /aid to be accidentall ? 
 
 When the predicate is an accident,as when I fay,/o£« is lear- 
 ned or vnlearned, white or blacke. Thirdly, they yeeld matter 
 meet to make definitions and diuiftons: for Logicall definitions 
 be made ofthe nigheit general kinds ioined together,with their 
 true differences or properties •, as in defining a man, we fay that 
 
 man 
 
o/Logicfy. 
 
 man is a fenfible body endued withreafon; and in making diui- 
 fions, wee either diuide the generall kinds into their efpeci all 
 kinds, as a fenfible body into man and bruit beafts, or the fpe- 
 ciall kinds into their Indiuiduums^s man into John, Thomas y &c. 
 or elfe we diuide fubie&s into their accidents, as of men , fomc 
 be free, and fome be bound, and fuch like. Fourthly , they helpe 
 much towards the inuention of arguments: for arguments bee 
 fetched from the common places, as from the generall kinde,thc 
 fpeciallkinde,the difference, the propeitie, and from other like 
 places of inuention, as fhall be taught hereafter in his proper 
 place. And note, that of thefe Predicables doe fpring certayne 
 Predications, whereof we come now to fpeake. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of Predication, and of the diners kjnds thereof. 
 
 Hat is Predication > 
 
 Predication is a certayne kinde or phrafc of 
 fpeech, whereby one word is fpoken of another, 
 and aptly applyed to another, as when wee fay, 
 lohn is a man ; for this word man is a generall 
 word, and is fpoken of Iohn i Thomas i Richard , and euery other 
 fingularman. 
 
 How many hinds of Predications be there ? 
 Two, that is, Effentiall and Accidentall. 
 What is effentiall predication ? 
 
 It is a naturall and vfuall kind of fpeech , whereby one thing 
 is naturally and properly fpoken of another,or as the Logicians 
 fay,when words fuperiour are fpoken of their inferiors being of 
 one felfeaffinitie, as when the generall kinde is fpoken of any 
 his fpeciall kinds, or the fpeciall kind of any his IndtutduHms % 
 or when the difference or propertie is fpoken of their fpeciall 
 kinds, or of any of the IndmduHms comprehended vnder the 
 faid fpeciall kinds ; as when we fay, Man is a fenfiblc body , or 
 that lohn is aman,or,faA» is reafonable,or,/o/;« is apt to fpeake, 
 or f'ich tike:for fuch fpeeches are both naturall,and ofnecefTuie, 
 becaufe the predicate is aptly applyed to his iubiett. To this 
 
 C 3 kinde 
 
*4 T6ejir/t$wl{e ' 
 
 Icinde of prcdiutioa fomc rncndocaHb referrc (wo other kind? 
 
 of fpecches. 
 
 Which be the; ? 
 
 Predication, Identical! and rnufuall. 
 
 What u Identic a II predication } 
 
 Itisakinde of fpecch, whereby one felfe thing is fpoken of 
 it felfe, as when we fay, John is fehn, which though it be eflen- 
 tiall, yet becaufe nothing is expounded thereby, it is not allow- 
 ed of the Logicians. 
 
 What is vnufuaH "Predication ? 
 
 It is a kinde of fpecch feidomc y(cd t as when we reade in the 
 holy Scriptures , God is man, The Word was made flefti j for 
 thele be moft elTehtiall and neceffarie fpecches , though not v« 
 Aiall in any other feknee then in Diuinitie. 
 
 . What is p-editation accident all ? 
 
 Predication accidentall is, when an accident is fpoken of his 
 fubiec^t, as, Wine is fweet, or, Wine is fowre, Socrates walketb; 
 for this is a cafuall kinde of fpeech , imploying no ncceflTitic, as 
 doc the other edentiall or oaturall fpecches before recited. To 
 this alfo may be referred Predications by way of fimilitude, as 
 when we fay, One man is a God or Deuill to another, A Tyrant 
 is a Wolfe or Fox, that is to fay, like a Wolfe or Fox, which are 
 othcrwifc called figuratiue or metaphorical fpeeches.But whilft 
 we talke here of accidentall predications,! t fhal not be amide to 
 fhew you that the Schoolcmen , the more diftin&ly to cxprefle 
 the nature of accidents, doe vfc two termes , Abftratium and 
 Concretupt, AbftraUum is the bare fhape of any lubiect fepara- 
 ted by imagination from the fame , as the whitened? or black- 
 nefle of a wall, or any other thing that is eirhcr whire or blacke^ 
 which abftradt cannot be properly fpoken of hisfubie6V; for it 
 were no proper fpecch,to lay,that this wall is whitcneffe:where» 
 fore we muft vfe the adiedttue called Concretum , figntfying the 
 fhape, together with the fubieft, as when wee fay , This wall i* 
 white. 
 
 CHAP> 
 
0fLogic{e. ly 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 Of Predicaments. 
 
 Hat are Tredicawcuul 
 
 Predicaments are certayne Titles or Tables 
 
 ^ontayning all things that be in the world: for 
 
 'eueiy thing, whatfoeuer it be , is either a fub- 
 
 ilar.fe, or accent :and if it be a fubftance, it is 
 
 found in the Table of fubftance hereafter following : if it bean 
 
 accident, it belongeth either toquantitie,quali*te,relation,ac-T,U 
 
 en, patfron, time, place, to be fmed,or tohaue : for thefebe the 
 
 Tables of accidents , in one of the which euery accident is cade 
 
 to be found. So that in all there be ten Predicaments or Tables^ 
 
 one of fubftance,and nine ol accidents, and thefebe called the 
 
 higheit and moil generall kinds , albeit there be others indcede 
 
 higher then they, called of the Schoolemen,Tr^»j^»^V«/w > that 
 
 is tof3y , furpafling , as thefc , Re s y e*s, vnum i ahquid t vtrnm^ t 
 
 botiHtm wbiebmay beEnglifhcd thus; a thing, a being, one, 
 
 fbme what, true, good. But forfomuch as thefe be not fpoken of 
 
 the other higher kinds according to one felfe fignification, but 
 
 maybe diuerfly applycd, they are excluded from the order of 
 
 Predicaments. 
 
 What other words are excluded from the order of Vredieamenti ? 
 
 All compound words, called of the Schoolemen Cemylexa^ 
 
 Goodman, Pitted ifputeth : and all doubtfull words bauing di- 
 
 ucrsftgnificatk)ns,©thcrwife called Equiuokes,and alfo terras 
 
 of Art , asaNoune,a Pronounc, a Verbe, which be termesof 
 
 Grammar, and as genu* ,ff<cit$ ^differentia^ which bee termes of 
 
 Logicke, and fuch like; which termes of Art are called of the 
 
 Schoolemen, names of the fecond mention, as hath beer.efaid 
 
 before,N'>twirhftanding,diifeTcncf s cofHtutuig efpecial kinds, 
 
 docbdong to the Predicament of the fame fpecial) kinds , anc. 
 
 the parts of any whole thing cW belong to the Predicament 
 
 wherernthc whole iscontaynedrandfiri^principles doe belong 
 
 to thePredicament or Table ofthofe things whereof they bee 
 
 principles,asapoint or prickc belongeth to thePredicament of 
 
 quantities all which fhall be plainly declared vato you , imn>e- 
 
 diattly 
 
i6 7 be firfi'Booke 
 
 diately after that wee haue fomewhat talked of thofe things 
 which the Schoolemen call t/intefredicamenta^ that is to fay 
 Forepredicaments. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 Of Forefrtdicamenti 
 
 Hat meant you by Forepredicaments > 
 
 Forepredicaments be certayne definitions , di- 
 'uifions, and rules taught by Anjiotle before the 
 Predicaments, for the better vnderftanding of 
 the fame, and therefore are called Anteyrcdtca- 
 menta, that is to fay, Forepredicaments. 
 What y and how many things definetb be ? 
 Three, that is, Equiuokcs, Vniuokes, and Denominatiues. 
 What call y oh Equiuokes ? 
 
 EcjHiuok's be fuch things as haue one felfename, and yet be 
 diuers in fubftance or definition; as a naturall Dogge,and a cer- 
 tayne Starre in the firmament , are both called by one name in 
 Latine,CW.r,yet they be nothing like in fubftance, kind, or na- 
 ture. And note that the Schoolemen doe call the word or name 
 it felfe, Equiuocum Equiuocans , and the thing fignified by the 
 word, Equiuocum Squiuocatum. They make alfo two kinds of 
 Equiuokes^hat is,Equiuokes by chance,and Equiuokes of pur- 
 pofe. Thefirftis, when one felfename is giuen to many things 
 by chance , and not for any likeneffe that is betwixt them, as in 
 Englifh this word Hart fignifieth as well the Hart of a man or 
 beaft, as a certayne beaft called a Hart in the Forrcft.The fecond 
 is, when one felfe name is giuen to diuers things of purpofe, 
 for fome likenefle that is betwixt them, as a painted man is 
 called man as well as the liuing man; for wee will commonly 
 fay,Here is King Henrie the Eighth, when indeed it is but his pi- 
 cture.But y ee mult note,that all Equiuokes being generally pro- 
 nounced without addition , ought to be vnderftood according 
 to their chicfc and moft principal fignification,as this word man 
 being generally fpoken,ought to be taken for a liuing man, and 
 not for a pointed man : but no Equiuokes ought to be placed in 
 any Predicament, neither can it bee defined, vnlefle it bee firft 
 
 brought 
 
of Legume. iy 
 
 brought to one cevtaine figr.if cation ; and therefore ali Ec^ui- 
 iu lies arc vttcrly barred from ail manner ©f Difcipline. 
 
 What call jcu IJmuvkes 2 
 
 Vniuokes bee thefe things that hauc one common nsme, 
 which is fpoken of them eflcntiaJIy , or really, a* a man, a hcrfc, 
 a Lion,whofc common nan e is amnstl, or fcnfble bec'y; fcrin 
 asking what either of them is, it is rightly anfwered, to fay,** j- 
 mat. Ar>d I fay here rcally,becauie it is not enough tor Vniut kes 
 to hate a common name,\nleflc the lame be alfo reall orcfFcn- 
 tiallj-wherby aie excluded all common r?rr < s ©r vnderflandings 
 that be accidentall:fot. though white ei bis cke,fwift or flow,or 
 fuch like, is a common name, and is con menly arp.lyed both to 
 man and beaft , yet that is accidentally , and net ically or fub- 
 fiantially. Morcouer, the Scheolesnen doc call the common 
 ytord it fctfc Vnitiocttm Vniuccanj t and the thing flgmfiedby 
 the word VmHvcum Vniuocatum. 
 
 What call J f*D enomwatiues f 
 
 Dcnominatiuts are thofe accidents that be of like name, and 
 differ only in cafe, or Fnall termination j as humble, humi]itie; 
 proud, proudnt fie : for of humilitic, i man is faid to be humble; 
 and of pride,to beproud:and according to the SchooImen,that 
 V ord whereof the name doth <pring,is called Denomwatsr t and 
 the name it felfe De»omir,attxe } 2ndihc thing or perfon fo called, 
 the Demmtnated\ as if] fliculdfay ofvaliantnefle, /V<?risfaid 
 to be valiant; berevalismni fife is theDencminator,valiantthe 
 E)cnominatiue,and Peter the Dcncminaredrfor Peter is the fab- 
 ice^ whereunto the Denominator doth clcaue. The Grammari- 
 ans doe call the Denominator Abfira<Hum i that is,a fubflantiue, 
 and thcDenominatiue CWw#*»,thatis,an Adieftiue. 
 
 T*9 what end doth Ariftotle chiefly vfe thefe definitions? 
 
 To fhew the differences of predicati©ns,or kinds of Ipeeches, 
 which are to be alio wed, and which not: againe,to know which 
 be predications t ficr.t jall,and which bee accidentall : for accor- 
 ding to the three definitions before rehcarfed, there bee three 
 Predications, that is to fay, Predication Equiuocall, Voiuocall, 
 andDcnfrmnatiue.. . * 
 
 What u Tredtcation EqttittocAll? 
 
 D Pre- 
 
18 7befirJl c Bco{e 
 
 Predication Equiuocall, is when the Equiuoke is fpoken of 
 any of the things that it figniflcth , as to fay, His Letter was a 
 Letter of the matter,racaning perhaps a hindcrer of the matter: 
 but fuch kind of fpecches ought to bee reie&cd from all good 
 difcipline, as hath beene faid before, 
 
 ffbtt if Predication VmnocalU 
 
 It is when the generall kinde is fpoken of his e fpeciall kinds, 
 or theefpeciall kindcof her inferiottrs^or the fpeciall difference 
 of that fpeciall kinde which it maketh , or of the Indiuiduums 
 contayned mder the fame fpeciall kinde, as when wee fay, Man 
 is a fenfible body, Man hath reafon, or, lobn is a man. 
 
 fVhat it Predication Denominatiae t 
 
 It U when fome accident is fpoken of his fubie&,as when we 
 fay, Peter it proud,humble,or valiant* 
 
 Vr1oAt % and how many diuifiont be there ? 
 
 Two: The firftdittifion is touching words fimple and com* 
 aound, whereof though we have faid fomewhat before , yet ic 
 /hall not grieue vs, here againc to fecit downc in fuch order as 
 the Logicians rfe. 
 
 Shew how. 
 
 Of words, fome be fimple, called in Latine, lncomphxd^ and 
 fome be compound,called Complex*. Simple words bee diftinlt 
 and feuerall words,noc fct together by any rule of Gramraar,to 
 make any perfe^fentence ( as,good,iuft,amaQ 9 ahorfe,to ftand, 
 to goc. Compound words.be words fignificatiue,which are ioy- 
 ncd together by rules of Grammar to make fome perfect fen- 
 tence, as, lohn is learned. 
 
 What ii thifeconi diuifion f 
 
 The fecond diuifion is fourefold,as followeth:Firfr,of things 
 that be, fome be fpoken of a fubie&,and yet be in no fubie£t,at, 
 man, horfe, and fuch likevniuerfall natures or fubftances: for 
 they be no accidents. Secondly, fome be is a fubieft,and yet be 
 ■ot fpoken of any fubie&, as all particular accidents, as this or 
 that colour, for thefc be Indiuiduums, and therefore not predi- 
 cafele.Thirdly, fome be in a fubie&,and alfo be fpoken of a fub- 
 ie&,as allrDiuerfall accidents, as Science, Grammar, Logicke, 
 a»d fuck like;for of theft fome be generally and feme be fpeciall 
 
 wit. 
 
ofLogicfy. 19 
 
 kincJs.and therefore arefaid to be predicable accidents.Fourth- 
 ly,fome beneithcrinafubic&, nor fpoken of a fubie&, as Uh» t 
 Th« mM t tn «$ man, or that man,this horfc,or that horfejfor thefe 
 bee firft natures or fubftances , and therefore are fubie&s them- 
 felues not predicable. 
 
 ifbtrtf ftrttttb this diuifiofi ? 
 
 By this diuifion ye may 1 earn e the diner fity of thefe two fpee- 
 ches,to be fpoken ofafubiect, andtobeinafubie& cfortobe 
 fpoken of a fubie &, is to be fpoken really or elTentially of fome 
 thing that is part thereof, as this word animal, or fenfible body, 
 is really fpoken of man, horfe, & of eucry other thing that hath 
 life and feeling ; for they bee fubftantiall parts of that generall 
 kinder for if ic be demanded v/h at a man or horfe is, itisrightly 
 anfwered, that he is a fenfible body. But to be in 9 fubieft, is to 
 be fpoken of another thing accidentally, and not effentially, as 
 this word white or blacke is fpoken accidentally of man, or of 
 any other fubielt, and not effentiallyj for neither is man any ef- 
 fentiall part of white, nor white any effenti all part of m an, and 
 therefore cannot be in man,or in any other fubie&,but acciden. 
 tally : and for that caufe it is fpoken of his fubieft accidentally, 
 and not really. 
 
 Ntw teBk*wmd»j } and 'what thefe rules bee t vrbtrttfjoM Jp*ke 
 before. 
 
 There be two rules.The firft is thus : When one thing is fpo- 
 ken of another eflentially, as of his fubieft, then whatfoeuer 
 may be fpoken of that predicate,muft needes be alfo really fpo- 
 ken of the fame fubie& : for as this word fenfible body is fpo- 
 ken of man or horfe elTentially , as when wee fay that man is a 
 fenfible body ; fo this word lining body, being fpoken elTenti- 
 ally of a fenfible body, as when wee fay that euery fenfible bo- 
 dy is a liuing body, is alfo as really fpoken of the forefaid fub- 
 ie<5r, man, in faying that man is a liuing body; for this word, li- 
 ning body,is a more generall kind then fenfible body is. 
 W bat it the fee end rule f 
 
 The fecond rule is thus: Diuers generall kinds not contained 
 one of another,nor both of a third,haue diuers fpeciall differcn- 
 cetjwbich doe make diuers fpeciall kinds, as a fenfible body and 
 
 D a fciencc: 
 
io ThefirJlBooke 
 
 fcience : for the fpeciall differences of a feniiblc body are thefe, 
 reafonable and vnreafonable.making both man and bruit beaft: 
 but the differences of fcience bcthefccontemplatiueand difpu- 
 tatiue,aBd fuchlike/wherefey are made fpeciall kitides ofknow- 
 Jedge : for the difference conteraplatiue maketh naturall Ph'ilo- 
 fophie, and the difference difputatiue maketh Logickc. 
 
 7* what end ferae tbefe rules ? 
 
 To the end it mi ght be eafily knowne what words are of afti- 
 nicic, and which bee of one feifc predicament, and which not. 
 Thus farre as touching fore- predicaments. Nsw to thepredi- 
 •caments thcrafelues. And fir ft we will fpcake of fubftance. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 Of Subjlance, 
 
 Hat ie fubftance? andkotn»*ny kjnles of fnh ft an- 
 tes be there f 
 
 Subftance is a thing confining of it fclfc, and 
 necdeth no helpctofuftaine the being thereof: 
 and yet it is cladwich accidents; for other wife 
 We could not difecme with pur outward fenfes, whether it were 
 a fub(tance,or not: for we cannot fee the fubftanceof any thing 
 With our bodily eyes, but only with the eyes of our mind 8c vu- 
 derflanding;but we may fee the fhape,the quantitie,the colour, 
 and fuch like accidents cleauiogtothe fubrtance, without the 
 which thofe accidents haue no being at all: and therfore in fee- 
 ing fuch accidents, we may alTure our fclues that there is a fub- 
 rtance fuftaining thofe accidents, which doth alwayes remaine, 
 though the accidents doe faile or change ncuer fo often. As for 
 example : We fee in water, that though it be fometimc hot,and 
 fomctime cold, now of one colour, and now of another,yet the 
 fubftance of water doth ftill remaine, foaswee may perceiue 
 thofe accidents to be one thing , and the fubrtance of water to 
 be anothcr.Now a? touching thekindesof fubtta»ce,according 
 to AnfiotU, there be two, that is, firfl and fecond. 
 rTa,tea!i je/t firjt [usances! 
 Firlt/ab an ces be thofe fubftances which the Logicians call 
 
o/Logic{e. a 
 
 Indiuidttd, as hbtt 9 TkensM, this man, or that nun, this Wrfe,or 
 that horfe,and by reafon of their accidents are to bee difcerncd 
 with outward fenfes. 
 
 Which caH youficond fubsldtnces ? 
 
 Second fnbftanccs are thofe which they call fpeciall kinder, 
 and generali kindes,as man, a fenfible bodie,a liuing bodie,and 
 fuchlike, which are to bee comprehended only by mans reafon, 
 and be not fubiedt to our outward fenfes,as firft fubftances bee* 
 And thefe fecond fubftances are otherwise called of the School- 
 men, vniuerfall natures. 
 
 How man) properties doe belong to fubftance ? 
 .Thefe three : Firft, fubftancc is contained in no fubicci,as an 
 accident is;for though the parts of a mans body be contained in 
 the whole , yet cuery fuch part is a peculiar body or fubftance, 
 and hath his proper being of it felfe fo well as the whole,wher- 
 as accidents without fubftance hauc no being at all. Secondly, 
 fubftances ai*c faid to bse diuers , but not coatrarie one to atf o- 
 tker : for neither is fire, as touching his fubftance , contrarie to 
 water, nor the Wolfe contrary to the Lambe , but onely in re- 
 fpedt of their qualitie , whercunto contrarictic doth properly 
 belong. Thirdly, offubftances.one cannot be more or lcife then 
 another; for the greatelt Giant, as touching fubftance, isn* 
 more a man then thelcaft Dwarfc that is; neither is a man full 
 growne,more a man,then a child newly borne : for more or kfle 
 appertained properly to quantitic, and not to fubftancc. But if 
 you will ?nderftand how farrc the predicament of fubftance 
 doth extend, and what it comprchcodeth, confider well this Ta- 
 ble fellowing,whereby you may lcarne how to define any kind 
 of fubftance, whatfoeuer it bee : for there you fhall find all the 
 kinds, both generali and fpeciall, together with their differen- 
 ces, moft plainly fet forth. 
 
 D 5 Tht 
 
n The firJI < Boo{e 
 
 The Table of Subft&ncc. 
 
 > An Angcll, as Gtbriel, Michael, &t. 
 
 "without body,as< A fpirit or foule fcparatefrom the body, as the fpirii 
 
 C or foule of this or that dead man. 
 
 "5 
 
 * 
 
 JO 
 
 Or with 
 
 body : if it 
 bee with < 
 body, it is ~ 
 lather 
 
 Simple, if it be fieri- 
 pic, it is cither 
 
 [Celeftiall, astheeleuenHeaaeni, 
 and all the (tarres and planets, 
 
 |Or elemental!, as fire, ayre, water, 
 earth. 
 
 iiuing: 
 if it be 
 
 liuing,'> 
 itis ei- 
 ther 
 
 fReafon- rSecrates, 
 I able, as^ y latt, 
 f Senrible,if J man,as C Viryl. 
 it be a fen- I 
 
 fiblebody/^ fAbirdorfowle, 
 
 called in I asaLarke,&c. 
 
 Latine, Orvn- A4.footcdbeaft 
 
 an]mali\ii%\ reafo-^ asahorfe. 
 
 either I nablc, A fim,as a ialm6 
 
 Or com 
 pound: 
 if it bee< 
 com- I 
 pound,it 
 n cither 
 
 Or vnfen- 
 fible, as a t 
 plat,which* 
 ^is eytber 
 
 or rn- 
 
 liuing, 
 if it be 
 vnli- 
 uing>it 
 is cy- 
 pher 
 
 fPerfecVf 
 
 it beep er- 
 
 aciecpingbeafl 
 asaworme, a 
 fnake, aviptr, 
 
 A tree,as an Okc,an Ap 
 
 pie-tree, &c. 
 J A (rmibbe, as bryers, 
 v broome,8cc. 
 'Orberbe, as Thyme, I- 
 
 fope, Margerum. 
 
 Oxtail, as Geld and Sil- 
 ucr,ltc. 
 
 fNaturall, as 
 | a precious 
 
 Or ftone> 
 
 fe ft, it is ^ eythcr 
 eycher 
 
 or ynper- 
 . feft, as 
 
 ftone, a 
 which is <;' flint. 
 
 ' Or artificial, 
 as a tile or 
 L bricke. 
 Or liquor, as Wine,Ho- 
 . nie, &c. 
 
 "Fiery inprerfiens , as 
 thunder, lightning. 
 
 )Or jratry imprcflions,as 
 raiae,haile,fftow,Jt<. 
 
of Logicfg* zj 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 Of ' J%*4Hiit$e. 
 
 Hat is quantities and how is it Maided } 
 
 Quantitie is that which comprchcndcth the 
 'greatnefle and number or multitude of things, 
 and is diuided into two kind es,that is,whole and 
 broken. 
 
 What is whole quantitie ? 
 
 Whole quantitie, called in Latinc,? ttantitas continue y is that 
 whofe parts are ioyned together with Tome common bound or 
 limi t, which is the ending of one part,and the beginning of ano- 
 ther, as the parts of the line here ftt downe in the raargcnt. mar- 
 ked with the letters a,e. are coupled together with the middle fc 
 point f .which point is the ending of *i.& the beginning of v,c. 
 
 How many kinds of whole quantitie be there ? 
 
 Of whole quantitie there be three kindi/hat is linea, fitter fi» 
 ties t tnd corpus. 
 
 Shew how thej are defined and diuided, 
 
 Lima (in Engliih, a line)is a length without either bredth or 
 thickneifcjwhich is either eight, or crooked; right, as a yard,an 
 ell, or pole ; crooked, as a hoope, or circle. 
 
 Superficies (which wee may properly interprece to be the yp- 
 per face of any thing) is a length and bredth without depth or 
 thickncfle;and that is either plaine,or bowing; plaine,as a plain 
 orftaoothfloore; bowing or comparting , as a vault orouen, 
 whereof the outward fide is called coniiex* and the inward fide 
 concaue or hollow. 
 
 Corfu* (which is as much to fay as a body)is tbat which hath 
 both length, brcdth,and depth,and that is cither rounder with 
 angles; round, as abowlc or ball; with angles or corners, at a 
 fquare die,or fuch like thing. All which three kinds of quantitie 
 are to be confldered onely with the minde mathematically , as 
 things abftraft, and feparated from all kind of matter, chat is to 
 fay,as things that haue no being at all,but imaginatiuely,& yet 
 So neceflari Jy inultcd by ruin,a» nothing can be mcaftirtid with* 
 
 out 
 
24. The fir ft <B coke 
 
 cut them. To thefe three kinds of whole quantitie may bee alfo 
 added two other kinds, that is to fiy, rnouing,and time, being 
 taken for the meafure, fpaee,or difiancc of place or time where- 
 in any thing is moued. 
 
 How m4*iy kj*ds of this moiling be there, and which be they f 
 
 Of this mouing there be three kindes, that is, right,circular, 
 and mixt.The right bclongeth to the foureElcmcnts,«nd to bo- 
 dies without life:for the ; r natural mouing is either right vpward 
 or elfc right downward, as the fire, whofe proper mouing is al- 
 wayes to afcend right vp, and the mouing of a itone,or luchhkc 
 r eauie thing, is to tall right downward : for (according to the 
 rules ofPhilofophie) all light things doemoue vpwsrd,and all 
 heauie things downward. Circular orroundmouing,belongeth 
 to the Heauens, and cclcfliall b©dics,which do turne round like 
 a Cart wheele.The mixt mouing(that is to fay,partly right,and 
 partly round) belongeth to alJ liuing bcafts, that goe fometime 
 forward, fometime backward, or fidelong, fometime vpward, 
 and fometime downward. 
 
 HvW is time diuided / 
 
 Time is diuided into threekinds, that is, into time paft, time 
 prefenr, and time to come : and ynder time are comprehended 
 yet res,moneths,weekcs,dayes,heures, and all other words fig- 
 nifying diftance or difference of time. 
 
 WfljAt is broke" quantitie ? 
 
 Broken quantitie, called of the Latines , quantity di/creta, is 
 that, whofe parts are not ioyned with any common bound or 
 limit,but be loofe and feuerall one from another; which quanti- 
 tie is diuided into twokinds, that is, number and fpecch. 
 
 fVhdt is number \ and how u it diuided ? 
 
 Number is a multitude or fumme of ynities or ones gathered 
 together : and fuch number is cither n"mple,refpe£iue,or figura- 
 tive • Simple,a* two,three, fourc,fiue, &c. Refpec*iue,as halfe, 
 double,treble,quadruble, and fuch like : Figuratiuc, as a threc- 
 fquare or fourc-fquarc number, like totbefc here Bgured .\ n 
 and fuch like. 
 
 What things are comprehended v#dtr broken qntntttie? 
 
 All names of mcafurcs,whercby we meafure any thing,eithet 
 
 dry 
 
of Logicfy. 25 
 
 drie or liqnid,as gallonjquar^pint^bijflicl^pcckcjpcundjdram, 
 feruple,graine, &c. 
 
 How is fpeech here taken ? 
 
 Speech is taken here for the meafure or quantitie of fyllab!e$, 
 wherof fome be long.and fome be fhort : and fuch quantitic is 
 to bo considered either in harmonie,in rythme,or verfe;ofwhich 
 things, the gener all and fpeciallkindes, together with the reft 
 that haue beene faid touching quantitie, are orderly fct forth in 
 the tableof quantitic here following. 
 
 What , and how many properties dee belong to quantitie ? 
 
 To quantitie belong three properties ; Firft,to haue no con* 
 trarictie; for great and fmall be not of themfelues contrar ie,but 
 only by way of comparifon. Secondly, to be greater or letter, 
 but not more or lefle, fpoken aduerbially ; for a -little quantitic 
 is a quantitic as well as the greateft quantitie of all. The third 
 and chiefeft propertie of quantitie, is, to be equall or ynequall. 
 
 The 
 
2$ The firft Boo^e 
 
 The Tabic of Q^tantitie. 
 CA line, which is either * 
 
 C permanent, A fnpe-r fides , which is ' 
 if it b: per -^ either 
 manent , it I . 
 
 is either J j 
 
 jO/iWji, which is ei- 
 
 L thtr 
 
 3 
 
 -a 
 
 (Who\t,\f it 
 bee whole 
 it h either 4, 
 \ 
 
 Or miuea- r Motion, which is either < 
 ble,ifit be) I 
 
 moueablejty ( 
 
 is either "Corime^ and that is ei- ■ 
 
 Rk bt ***aydrd,anelt. 
 >Or crooked, as ahoop, or 
 » biiPj&c. 
 :Pkine, as a pnmb 
 \ fitore, &>c. 
 J)?bo»ing,as a vault, 
 ' or oven, &c. 
 'Round, as a fowle or 
 > ball. 
 
 )Or with corners, as g 
 _ CquarediCf&e, 
 
 r Right, 
 
 f Circular, 
 
 I Or Mixt. 
 
 rT'tmepafi, 
 
 ffimepreftnt, 
 
 tortimetotomtt 
 
 S< 
 
 %} 
 
 "a 'umber ,wbicb is either 
 
 Or brok,en: - 
 ifhbebro- \ 
 Iten quanti-< 
 tie, it is ei- ' 
 tber. 
 
 Simpte>ateu(norodde, &e, 
 )ReJpeHi»e^as double treble, &e» 
 )Or figuratiue,as tkrte>cornered 6 
 foure~cornered,&c. 
 
 'ineompofitiott 
 t>( (yUables, at 
 Dacltlus, Sptn* 
 deut,&e. 
 
 ; tf>r meafurt tfffttcbpbUb conftfttth either^ 
 
 in hamonie,, 
 atatbird,afift, 
 
 lnrytbme,*; 
 char me , barmt. 
 
 Orinver/e,as 
 hexameter, fen* 
 tamtter , lam- 
 
 CHAP* 
 
ofLcgic^e. ij 
 
 chap. x. 
 
 Of Qnalttte. 
 
 Hat is qua! tie ? *) 
 
 Qualitie is an affection, fhape, or forme of 
 the minde or bodie, wherorthe thing fo affc&ed 
 or formed taketh his name s as of wiidomc a man 
 is faid to be wife, and of iufticc hce is called iuft. 
 How many kindes of quahtie he there ? 
 
 Of qualitie there be foure kinds, that is,habit and difpofition, 
 naturall power and impotencie,paflion and pJfible qualitie, fi- 
 gure and forme. 
 
 What is htbit, and how is it diuided ? 
 
 Habit is a conftant and abfolute perfection in any thing, not 
 giuen by nature, but gotten by long vfe and exercii'c; and it is 
 twofold, that is, of the minde,and of the body : againe,habit of 
 the minde is twofold,whercof the one is called intcllcdiuall, be- 
 longing to the reafon andvnderftandingofman, and the other 
 morall,beJonging to the will of man.Of intelle$uail habits, ac- 
 cording \oAnfiotU i there be flue, that is, Intelligence, Science, 
 Prudence, Art, and Sapience, 
 
 1 Intelligence is the knowledge of fpeculat'we principles, as 
 1. ar>d 2. make 4. the whole is more then his part; takeequall 
 from rquall, and equall remaine, and fuch like. 
 
 2 Science is the knowledge of true conclusions, confifting 
 of moft certaine and infallible propofitions;as,Man is a fcnfible 
 body,Man is apt to learnerand vnder Science are comprehended 
 the fciences rationall, as Grammar, Rhetorickc, and Logicke j 
 alfo thefciences Mathematical!, as Arithmeticke,Gcometrie, 
 Muficke, and Aftronomie, which are otherwifc called Quadri- 
 uials, that is to fay, the foure waies or kindes of mathematical! 
 difcipline; and finally, the fcience phyficall, that \i to fay, natu- 
 rall,as the naturall philofophie oSAriflotle s oi of any ether Wri- 
 ter creating of the fecrets of nature. 
 
 3 Prudence is an habit working with true iudgement and 
 according roiightreafon in all things appertaining to man, bee 
 they good or cuUl.Pjudcncemay be diuided into prudence mo- 
 
 £ % naiiicill, 
 
i8 Tbefirjl 3oo{e 
 
 rufticaII,domefticall,and politicall. Monafticall teacheth to go. 
 uernc one fole perfon : domeftical^togouerne a houfhold or fa- 
 milie; and politicall, to gouerne a Common, wealth. 
 
 4 Artisan habit of knowledge eonfifting of a(Tured and cer- 
 taine rules,tried and approucd by experience,and learned by ex- 
 ercife,teaching to do or to make fomcthing rhat is profitable to 
 roans behoofe: and Art comprehendeth all Arts, both liberal! 
 and mechanicall,that is to fay, handic-.crafts. 5. Sapience, con- 
 iifhng both of intelligence, and of fcience, is the head and chiefe 
 of chofc knowledges that be rooft honourable in nature,compre- 
 hending two notable Sciences, that is, the Chriftian Diuinitie, 
 and the Philofophers Diuinitie, othcrwife called Metaphyfica^ 
 that is, fupernaturall. And all thefe intelle6haall habits are con- 
 tained vnder a certaine and moft furc knowledge, which is al- 
 waies true; for vncertaine knowledge is fometimes true, and 
 fometimes falfc : whereto belongcth opinion, fufpition, conie- 
 clure, and fuch like. Thus much of habit intelle&uall. 
 
 What is ntirall habit y and how is it dim ded ? 
 
 It is a qualitie of the mindc, gotten by cuftome and do&rine, 
 teaching and inuicing mans will to worke, either well or euill ; 
 and is twofold, that is, either good,or euill.-co the good belong 
 allkindeofvertuts,asiuftice, liberalitic,fortitude,temperance, 
 &c.to the euill al kindeofvices,as pride, couetoufneiTc,coward- 
 lineflfe, and fuch like. And note, that of vertues, fomc bee called 
 morall, and fome theologicall, that is to fay, diuine. 
 
 Which e ally oh theologicall or distme ? 
 
 Thofe that be not gotten by cuftome, or mans induftrie, but 
 are the meere gifts of God, as faith, hope, and perfed^: charitie, 
 and all other gifts of the holy Ghoft,as the gifts of the tongues, 
 ofprophecying,of hcaling,and fuch like: which fome doe attri- 
 bute to habit infufed,making a difference betwixt habit infilled, 
 &habitacquired orgotte^asyouraay fee in: theTable following. 
 
 What is'hahit of the bo die ? • 
 
 Habit of the body is a certain aptneffe & agility of doing any. 
 thing with the body,not giuen by nature, but gotten by cuftom 
 &exercife,as to ride well,to run,co leape,co daunce,to wreflle,to 
 Jhootj to fence,to darc,to fwim,t© write, to paint, and fuch like. 
 
 ^ The. 
 
T§ fence, 
 
 To dart, 
 Tijhott, 
 7e vreflle, 
 
 ofLogic{e. 
 
 The Table of Habir. 
 f intelligence, 
 
 i? 
 
 Clnfu- 
 fed, at 
 
 
 Or of 
 the 
 
 m'inde, 
 if it bee 
 of the * 
 minde, 
 it is ei- 
 \jber 
 
 C Faith, 
 C cbaritie, 
 
 CKnm- 
 
 ledge 
 certain, 
 if it bee 
 certaine 
 it con- 
 tained 
 the fine 
 intelle- 
 cluall 
 flntel- habits 
 letln- 1 before 
 al,in-\ defined, 
 
 CRatio- 
 I nail, 
 \as 
 
 Ma- 
 
 , the mi 
 
 S \ ie l Ce >J ticall, 
 with ^ m 
 
 Pbyfi- 
 caU\as* 
 
 Grammar, 
 Logicfe, 
 , Rhetoric^. 
 
 ' Aritbmetk\e 3 
 S Geometric, 
 Mufclee, 
 .Ajironomie. 
 
 Knowledge 
 )the fecrets of Na- 
 ture and of the 
 Joule. 
 
 'f 
 
 Or ac- 
 quired, 
 if it bee 
 acqui- < 
 red,itu 
 jitber 
 
 telle- 
 
 ftuall. 
 
 copre- 
 
 ben- 
 
 deth 
 
 qotb 
 
 10 At IS, 
 
 Trudence 
 is either 
 
 Art is 
 either 
 
 ""Me-mHicill, 
 ) Dome fik. ill, 
 )?olit'.caU , tobiih are be- 
 £- fore defined. 
 
 raU^af^Arcbiteclure, 
 
 ,or Me- rTailors craft, 
 cbani- <Shaomal^en craft, 
 .call, asLcaffenterurft. 
 
 And Sapid ce, 
 .which contai- 
 \jietb both 
 
 •ChrifiiattBiu'itt'tie, & 
 ilfo Pbilofopben Diui- 
 'riitie, etberwfe called 
 iMclapfyficail and fii* 
 „fewatur.ilL wijdome. 
 
 \jLnd knowledge vncertaine,a$ 
 Venue, as 
 
 Or MoraU, 
 
 ■which com- 
 
 prebendetb 
 
 \Jotb 
 
 Opinion,, 
 Sufpition, 
 Cemcofrtre* 
 
 Iujlice,. 
 
 Fortitude, 
 
 Temperance ,&c. 
 
 r Andvtce,-tfhich 
 is eyiber 
 
 'lyex* ^Raptboldaes, 
 I ccffc,asl?Tod}gality t 
 
 IByde- $Covnrdlines, 
 f(8 } aslcouetdit/nts. 
 
5 o The fir/i'Bookc 
 
 What u dtfyofitiortyAttdhow isit diuided? 
 
 Difpofition is an habit begun, but not perfe£ted;and it is ci- 
 ther of the body, or of the mindc : for to difpofition may be re- 
 ferred whatfoeuer was before attributed to habit (pcrfc 6hon in 
 the thing only excepted) in which they differ for lacke of'conti- 
 nuance, by reafon whereof, difpofition is faid to beeeafily re- 
 mooued,but habit not fo, becaufc it is thorowly grounded : as 
 for example, ofthe difpofition that a man hath to learning, he is 
 faid to be ftudious : but of perfect habit, gotten by continuall 
 ftudie in learning, hee is faid to bee learned, which iropoitcth a 
 perfection, which is more then a difpofition. 
 
 Of naturail power and impotencie , thefecond kind* of 
 • Qualities 
 
 WHat is nattiraU fewer f 
 It is a naturail abilitie to doc,to fuffer,or to refift,not 
 gotten by exercife,but giuen by nature to the minde or body:to 
 the roinde, as to hauc a good wit or memerie, to Le apt to lear- 
 ning, and fuch like : to the body , as to bec healthful!, nimble, 
 (hong, and fuch like. 
 
 What is naturail impotencie f 
 
 It is a natiirall weaknefle ei ther cf the minde or body: ofthe 
 minde, as to bee dull of wit, to bee forgetfull , or vnapt to bec 
 taught, and fuch like : ofthe body, as to be fickly, to bee weake 
 and feeble, and vnapt to fuffer any thing that an able body can 
 docorfuffer. 
 
 What U comprehended vndtr thiifecond kjndof qttalttie ? 
 
 To this kind may be teferred all the naturail powers and im- 
 potencies ofthe foule vegetatiuc, fenfitiue, and intellc#iue : al. 
 fo all naturail powers or vertues of herbs and Hones,and the na- 
 turail influences ofthe Heauens, Stars, Elements, andofall the 
 fuperiour or vpper bodies. All which things you may fee plainly 
 fee forth in this Table following* 
 
 #4- 
 
" Of the body, at 
 
 (Power 
 
 l vegeta- 
 tint it 
 
 tuber 
 
 of Logic^e. 
 
 ^Health, 
 
 iuavdinefle, 
 
 j7(iinble»efe, 
 
 .Strength. 
 
 <+ tfutritiue, 
 'Pmeipxll, at ^ Augment* we, 
 C. Generative, 
 
 £-Attraftiue, 
 .Or adittutntfdt J Immutatiue, 
 ^Retentive, 
 ^Expulfine. 
 
 ? 
 
 £< 
 
 or of the 
 
 minde, 
 
 if it bee 
 
 of the J Power 
 
 fenjitwe^ 
 is either ' 
 
 *Comprehen* 
 fine , fthie h 
 i is either 
 
 minde, 
 itisei 
 thir 
 
 (• Common f eH f(, 
 \ interior t as } Phantafte> 
 C Memorie. 
 
 ■Sight, 
 ^Hearing, 
 'Smelling, 
 )Tafling, 
 Feeling. 
 
 [txterior,** 
 
 I 
 
 Or motive, 
 which it e\tber 
 
 Appetitive, 
 twhicb is either 
 
 Ctncupifciblt or 
 rafcible , hereof 
 )fpring all the per* 
 Uarbadons and pif- 
 fftons of the minde, 
 t asloue,bate,w*tb$ 
 
 t-Togoe, 
 frogreffiue, as \ To flie, 
 
 £ To fnfimtne. 
 Cfo contemplate* 
 >Specnktiue,asiTo vnderftand, 
 ^Towill, 
 \to mil, 
 'Prafiiut,as <Tocommnd,. 
 (Tocbufe. 
 
 5Tobefici(e, 
 Tobeaeahe, 
 The feeble, 
 Maiuratimptemie it either £ Qr t t t y e m ' in b . To beforgetfuU, 
 
 i 
 
 (Or power inttl- 
 UHiue, which h 
 \jitber 
 
 of 
 
jz The fir/i c Boo{e 
 
 Ofp*Jfionandp<*Jpl?te qualitie, thethirdktndeof quaint e. 
 
 WHat doth the third fade ofqualitie comprehend ? 
 Paflion andpaffiblc qualitie. 
 What u^JJion} 
 
 It is a fudden motion of the minde or body.that cndurcth not 
 long, and therefore eafie to be remoued. Paflion of the minde is 
 a fudden fcare or ioy conceiuedof fome euill or good that is 
 offered ; and of the body, as palcneflc of colour, blufhing, or 
 trembling of the flefh. 
 
 What tsp.ijfible aaalttie } 
 
 It is an inucterate affection or motion of the minde or body, 
 not eafieto be remoued : of the minde, as madneffe growne of 
 fame continuall forrow or melancholic :of the body, as black- 
 nefic of the ftcc by continual boiling heat of chelloud.or palc- 
 nefle by continuail fickncffe of the body: and therefore paflibl* 
 qualitie is compared and likened to habit,and fudden paflion to 
 di/pofijion. 
 
 What U comprehended vnderpajjfib/e qmlttie ? 
 
 All theobie&sof the fiue outward fenfes, as colours, light, 
 brighenefie, which be the obie£ts of the fight ; founds,voices, 
 and noifes,the obic£ts of hearing;fauours,the obiedts of raftings 
 odours and fmels, theobietfs offmclling; tangiblequalities, 
 which be the ©bie&sof feelingrof which tangible qualities fome 
 are faid to be firft, and fome fecond: the firfi be thefc,heat,cold- 
 neflejmoirtneflejdrinefre.-thefecondbehardncffejfoftnefTcjhea- 
 uinefle, lightne<fle, roughnefle, fmoothne(Te,and fuch like. 
 
 Which be the chief e pajpons or affettions of the minde} 
 
 The chiefe affections be thefe foure,ioy, Iuft, forrow, feare. 
 
 tiow is ioy defined, and what good or §nill branches doe faring 
 thereof ? 
 
 Ioy is a fweet and delectable motion of the heart, wherewith 
 it is ftirred and delighted, whileft it cnioyeth fome good ihat is 
 prefent,or (at theleaft)fecn>eth goodrand hereof fpringeth de- 
 light, boafting, maleuolence, reioy cing at other mens euill. 
 What is tuft, and what affeftiont ioe ffring thereof 
 
 Lutt is a motion of the mindc,ftirrcd ▼ p by thinking of fome 
 
 good 
 
of Logicfe. 33 
 
 good indeed, or Teeming good, that is abfent,whercof do fpring 
 thefe affections, Hope, Defire, Loue, Ange^Wrath^fic Hatred. 
 What is forrovf, and what affetttons doe arsfe thereof} 
 It is a grieuous motion ot the heart, caufing it to fhrinke to* 
 gether, whileft it flyethfomeprelenteuill , that iseuill indeed, 
 or fecmeth cuill : and hereof fpring thefe affections, Enuie, 
 Slandering, Mercy, Agony, Lamenting, Calamitie, CarefuU 
 nefle, Griefc and Dcfperation. 
 
 What tsfeare, and what affcBiens doe rife thereof} 
 Feare is a grieuous motion, caufing the heart to fhrinke toge- 
 ther/.vhillt it flyeth fome euill that is to come:and hereof fpring 
 thefe affections, HeauinefTe, Shame, Terrour, Sownding, and 
 fuch like: all which things you may fee briefly fet forth in the 
 Table next following. 
 
 The Table of paflion and paflible quahtie. 
 
 'Oftbtminde,*^;^ 
 
 tr<{ ^ Ftare ' 
 
 CSudden palenefe, 
 ■orcfthebodj, ^JSuddenbluJh^ 
 
 CTremblittg of the flefh* 
 
 fAll the hueterate pajftom both of m'tnic and body before 
 fit downe: 
 
 lontajottb 
 
 • tru j: r Colours, JL r f tbe h bt f 
 
 Taffible quduy, <, A „ da , f9all f W ,| 1 f Oftearug, 
 
 th ; t ff s <?^ r ' , >rbtobUft, 2%^z u 
 
 Stnjes t at flangtb'e qua-Ss *? Of touching, 
 
 V. laies, J \.Or feeling. 
 
 Why are thefe obieUt of thefenfes called pajftble qualities ? 
 Becaufe they make the fenfes to fuffer , as the colour of any 
 thing, by (hiking into the eye, makcth the fight to fuffer, and 
 
 F caufeth 
 
34. The fir ft c Boo{e 
 
 caufeth eyther pleafurc or griefe to the fight : To likewife the 
 fweetneife of hony in Ihiking the cafte, dclighterh it: and con- 
 trariwife, the bitternefle of Gall, or fuch like thing, endued 
 vyith a bitter fauour, offendeth the tafle. 
 
 Of figure <%nd forme, the fourth kjnalof e^'Anlitie. 
 
 WHat difference is betwixt figure and forme ? 
 Figure,according to fome,is that which is inclofed 
 with one bound or limit, or with many, as a Circle enuironcd 
 with one round JmCjCalled thecircumfercnce,oras a triangle or 
 foure-fquare figure , whereof the one is enclofed with three 
 lines, and the other with foure , and fuch like : but forme is the 
 drawing or defcribing of the faid figure. Againe, according to 
 the opinion of fome , figure is compared to an image represen- 
 ting fome liuely thing : and forme is faid to be the due propor- 
 tion and feature of the fame. Some 3gaine doe attributefigure 
 to things without lifc.and forme to things thathauc life,briefly 
 fet downe in this Verfe following : 
 
 Formam vwentts, filli die effe Figuram : 
 
 Englifhed thus: 
 The fhapes of painted things they Figures call : 
 But liuing things (they fay) are formed all. 
 What doth this fourth kind of ' qualttit comprehend? 
 Ic comprehendeth the accidentall figures and formes,as well 
 of naturall, as artificiall things : of naturall, as the fhape of man, 
 beart, or fowl'e : or artificiall, as the fhape or figure of a Houfe, 
 Temple,Ship, or fuch like: alfo it comprehendeth all Geome- 
 tricall figures, as well perfect as vnperfect. 
 Which call jouferftU ? 
 
 Thole that are inclofed within fuch bounds as nothing can 
 be added or taken away from them , without marring or alte- 
 ring the fame, as a Circle, a Triangle, a Square, and fuch like: 
 whereof fome areplaine, inclofed only with Lines, as Circles t 
 Triangles, Squares, and fuch like : and fome are folid or whole 
 bodies, enclofed with vpper faces, either one or many, as round 
 Spheres, fharpe Pinacles, Cubes, as aDye, and round Pillers. 
 Which ctll yon vnperfefl. t 
 
 Thofc 
 
of Logickg. 
 
 Thofe which are not fo enclofed with their bounds, but that 
 fomc one thing may bee added or taken away from the fame, 
 without changing or altering of the figure, as the rightneffe, 
 roundnefle, concauitie,orconucxitieof mperfedt figures, may 
 be lengthned or fhortned^and yet the former fhapc thereof fhall 
 ftiil rcmainc, and not be altered, but only in quantitie. 
 
 A Table of figure and forme, 
 f A per fe ft Circle. 
 
 
 < 
 
 lfepleuriu, 
 Ifofceles, 
 A Tri rule, Scalenen, 
 
 whereof rime be Ambligonim, 
 fixe fades. Oxgomw, 
 
 Onlogomuu 
 
 -?erfeft U either J 
 
 55 
 
 
 CA ferfift fquart, 
 y hngfquare, 
 Plaine , at 4 quadrangle t as <(A /quare li^e to a 
 ) Tborne-baclte t cat- 
 L led Rhombus. 
 
 J Or hauhg many C A figure of <{.6.orj t 
 \^' Angles as £ Angles, or more, 
 
 r Spherical! , 
 Or folid , rvhkh is eyther-j Pyramidicall, 
 
 tight, 
 ^Circular, 
 OrvnperfeU ,*bkbueytbcr <jconuex, 
 
 or 
 Conczue. 
 
 ^ Butthetruedefcriptionsof all the figures contayned in this 
 Table, are to be learned of the Geometricians, and not of the 
 Logicians. 
 
 ¥ z Of 
 
3d ThefirJl'Booke 
 
 Of the properties of qualitie. 
 
 HOwntany properties doe belong to Qualitie f 
 Three : Firft, to bee comrarie, as Vcrtue is contrarieto 
 Vice, Heat to Cold, White to blacke : yet luch contrarietie bfc. 
 longeth not to euery kind of Qualitie; for Triangles bee not 
 contrarie to Squares, nor round pillers to fharpe pFnacles. 
 
 What is the ^e c on d proper tie f 
 
 To be more or Iefle : for one man may bee more vcrtuous, or 
 leffe vertuou* ; more learned, or letffc learned ; more hcalthfull, 
 or lcfie healthfull ; more or leflc hot or cold. Yet this propertie 
 belongeth not to euery kind of Qualitie; for one Triangle is no 
 more a Triangle then another. The like may bee faid of the reft 
 of the perfect Figures, as well plaineas folid. 
 
 What is the third propertie f 
 
 To be like or vnlikerand this is thechicfcft propertie belong- 
 ing to euery kind of Qja!iric:as,two Grammarians be like one 
 to another in their prof'eflion,tvvo healthful or vnheaUhfull,two 
 ■white or two blacke , two Triangles or two fquares are faid to 
 be like or vnlikc one to another. 
 
 Jiox» define you Itkeneffe or vnltkenejfc t 
 
 Likeneffe, according to Boetitu , is when diuers things hauc 
 one felfe quality. Vnlikenes is, when they haue diuers qualitie*. 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 
 Of Relation, 
 
 Hat is Relation ? 
 
 It is the referring, comparing, or applying of 
 
 one thing vnro another/or fome refpeCt of afrt- 
 
 nitie or liken e(Te , wherewith they arc knit fo 
 
 together, as the one cannot be well vndcrftood 
 
 without the other : and therefore the things fo compared are 
 
 called Relatiues, or rather Correlatiucs; for of things, fome are 
 
 faid to be ablolute, and fome tefpeCtiue or relatiue. 
 
 Which call yen abfolute I 
 
 Abfolutc are thofc which may be vndcrftood by themfrlues, 
 
 without 
 
ofLogic{e. 37 
 
 w'rthout being applycd to any other thing, as fubftancc, quan- 
 tise, qualitie. 
 
 Which are fat d to be relatiue or rejpefiiue f 
 
 Thofe that cannot be wel vnderrtood of ihemfclucs, without 
 hauing relation to fomc other thing, as the Father and the Son, 
 the Lord and theBondman, the Mafter and the Scholer, &<:► 
 Hercnote,thac oftheSchoolementhe thing from which the ap- 
 plication is made, is called in Latine, Fftndamentum, in Englifii, 
 The foandation^znd the thing whereunto the relation or applica- 
 tion is made, is called in Latine, Terminus , in Englifh,the bonnd^ 
 w& % ox ttrme 3 as in thefe Correlatiues,the Father and the Sonne, 
 the Lord and the Bondman,the Schoolemalter and the Scholer. 
 Here, the Father.the Lord, and Schoolemafter, are called, euery 
 of them, Fundament um\ but the Sonue,thc Bondman, and Scho- 
 ler, euery of themi3called,7~Vr»MWM*, that is, the end orterme; 
 and the application of the one to the other is called relation. 
 
 R.wmany kinds of Lei Mines be there ? 
 
 Two : Rehimcs ft cvudumejfe, that is, indeed, and Relatiuei. 
 fecmdttm diet, which we may call, Rclatiues in name. 
 
 Which call you T^Litiuci indeed ? 
 
 Thofe which according to their principall fignification haue 
 relation to fome other thing , without which they cannot bee 
 vnderrtood : as a Father is not to be vnder ftood, without there 
 bee a Sonne, nor a Sonne, vnleffe there bee a Father. The like 
 may be faid of a Tutor and Pupill , the Matter and his Scholer, 
 and fuch like. 
 
 What call you ReUtiues in name? 
 
 Thofe that according to their principall fignification may be 
 vnderrtood, without hauing relation to any other thing; and 
 yet, becaufcin fomc refpedt they haue relation to fome other 
 thing, they are called Relatiucs, but not properly, for they dif- 
 fer not from the abfolute things before defined, as VcrtuCjVicc, 
 Habit, Dftpofition, &c. 
 
 fffiat other dim poms there of Relet iues > 
 
 Of Relatiucs, lome are laid to be of one felfe namc,and fomc 
 *>f diucrs: or onefelfename, as like, vnlike, cquall,vnequail, 
 fchoole-fcUow,i>eighbour,and futhlike:ordiuer* names, as the 
 
 F 3. Father* 
 
?8 
 
 < IbefirJl ( Booke 
 
 Father, the Sonne, the Lord and Bondman, &c. And of fuch 
 fome be more worthy, and fome be le(Tc worthy, as rhe Father 
 is more worthy, the Sonne lcfle worthy ; the Matter more wor- 
 thy, the Scholerlcflc worthy : which diuifions this Table doth 
 fhew. 
 
 The Table of Relation. 
 
 fOf one felfe 
 name, as 
 
 fin deede , if in 
 
 CA Scboole-feUow t 
 
 Like, 
 
 J Unlike t 
 
 <; Eqitall, 
 
 IynequaU t 
 Yjnfman, 
 ^Neighbour. 
 
 deed ', it it tyt her 
 
 U 
 
 Colore worthy, 
 
 < 
 
 Relation j 
 it either | 
 
 Or of Hitters 
 _ namet, whereof 
 {.fome Lee 
 
 And fome bee 
 \JieJ}e worthy 3 *s 
 
 {Or in name, as 
 
 rSubflance, 
 
 The Mafler, 
 The Father, 
 f The double, 
 iThecaufe, 
 The whole, 
 .The Captaine. 
 
 • TheScbolcr, 
 The Some, 
 \Theonehalfe t 
 iThe effedt, 
 'The fart, 
 .TbeSonldier. 
 
 < JQuantitie, ^gnd fuch like abfoluteu 
 Lghtalitie, J 
 
 Of the properties of Relation. 
 
 HOw tunny properties doe belong to Relation ? 
 FiuerFirtt, to haue contrarietie, as Vertueand Vice, 
 Science and Ignorance. But this propertic belongeth not to all: 
 for double and the one halfe hath no contrarietie, nor the Fa- 
 ther and the Sonne, 
 
OfLogicfy. 3P 
 
 What is the fecond propertie ? 
 
 The fecond is to be more or leflc, as to bee more like, or lefle 
 like ; or more equall, or lefle cquall. Yet this belongeth not to 
 all : for double hath neither more or leflfe, nor one Father is faid 
 to be move or leffe then another. 
 
 What is the third proper tie ? 
 
 The third is, that all Relatiues ( which are Relatiues indeed) 
 are conuertible : for he is a Father, that hath a Sonne , and he is 
 a Sonne, that hath aFathcr,&c. 
 
 What is the fourth propertie ? 
 
 The fourth is, that one Correlatiueis not before another, 
 but are both together : as the Father is called no Father, vntill 
 he hath begotten a childe, and a childe is called no Sonne , be- 
 fore he be begotten of the Father. For this is a generall rule of 
 Correlatiues : If the one be, the othcrmuftneeds be : If the one 
 be taken away, the other muft alfo be taken away. 
 
 What is the fift propertie ? 
 
 Thcfiftis, that whofoeuer afluredly knowcththc oneCor- 
 relatiue , muft needes know the other : for whofoeuer certainly 
 knoweth that I am a Father , muft needes alfo certainly know 
 that I haue a childe* The like may be faid of all that be Corre- 
 latiues indeed, to whom this propertie only belongeth, as Art- 
 ftotle faith. 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 Of lAftion. 
 
 \ Hat is aft ion ? 
 
 Adtion is fome accidentall forme or fhape, 
 whereby any thing is laid to doe or to worke 
 vponhis fubie&. 
 What meaneyott here by this -word fubieSi ? 
 The thing that fuffereth, as the water is the fubiedl whereon 
 the fire induceth the ihape of beating : for here the water is faid 
 to be pafliue, and the fire acliue. 
 How is aBion dmided} 
 
 Into adtions of the foule,and of the body. The aclions of the 
 foule,arechofe which the foulc cloth :for>accoxding to his power 
 
 vege. 
 
4 o The fir ft Boo^c 
 
 vcgetatiue, Ms a&io is are to nourifh,to increafe, and to ingen- 
 der; and according to his power fenlitiue, to fee, to hcaie, to 
 fmell, to ufie, to feele;and according to his power incellc&iue, 
 to vnderftand, to will, to nill, and fuch like. 
 
 The actions of the body are thote that doc immediately be- 
 long to Torn? body or corporall accident, as to cut, to llnke, to 
 heat, tocoole, tomoylten, to dry, to make white, to make 
 blacke, and fuch like. 
 
 Is there no other dtuifion of aft ton } 
 
 Yes diners, but fuch as doe rather belong to naturall Philo- 
 fophers, and to Diuines , then to Logicians :and therefore wee 
 leaue to fpeake any further of them. 
 
 jVoat doth this predicament comprehend} 
 
 AH Nounes and Verbes of the a&iue fignification : as thefe 
 Nounes, generation, coriupcion, augmentation, diminution, al- 
 tera' ion, moouing from place to place, and fuch like; alio all 
 Verbes acliue, as, to engender, to corrupt, to increafe, to dimi- 
 nifli, to alter or change, and to mooue from place toplace,and 
 fuch like Verbes of the adtine fignification. 
 
 How many pre Rentes doe belong to atlion ? 
 
 Two : Firft,to admit contrarietie 3 not fimply,but/><fr accidens t 
 as to kindle, andtoextinguifh: fecondly, tobeemoreorlcfle, 
 and yet accidentally , as one fire to burne more , and another 
 lefTe, one water to coolc more, and another kflfe. 
 
 CHAP. XIII. 
 Of Tojfton. 
 Hat is faffim ? 
 
 It is the relation or application of the Patient 
 to the Agent : as for example , whileft the water 
 fuffereth to be heated by the fire, this fuffcrance 
 is called Paflion. 
 what doth this predicament comprehend} 
 All Verbes of the pafliuc fignification, as to bee engendrcd, 
 corrupted, increafed, diminifhed, or altered,and fuch like. 
 What properties doe belong to Pajjton ? 
 The fame that haue beenc faid before to belong vnto acYion. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
of Logical 4.1 
 
 CHAP. XIIII. 
 Of the Vtedictmcnt Where , called in tat ine ,Vbi. 
 
 Off define you the predicamentVb'i ? 
 
 ybi\% to bee in Tome place, as when a body is 
 inclofed within a place , and therefore is defined 
 of 'fome, to bee the description of the place 
 wherein any thing is faid to bee, or to be done or 
 made,asintheBcaucns, in the Earth, in the Temple , in the 
 "Hou fe, and fuch like. 
 
 H off is this -predicament diuided} 
 
 Into Vbi fmyUx, and ybtcompfitum, that is to fay,fimple and 
 compound. 
 
 VVhen is it faid to befmfle ? 
 
 When a thing indiuifible is in fome indiuifible place , as an 
 Angell in funUo\ or when a thing indiuifible is in a place diuifi. 
 ble,as an Angell in the Temple; for the Temple may bee diui- 
 ded into many parts, though the Angell cannot. 
 When is it faid to be compound ? 
 
 When fome diuifible body is contained in a place diuifible,a$ 
 the being of things corporal in the water,or in the ayrejfor cor- 
 porall things be fodiuifibly placed in their places,as eueryparc 
 of the thing placed, isanfwcrable toeuery part of the place 
 wherein they arc containedjand fo contrarily, as to the parts of 
 a mans body enuironed with the aire,one part of that aire is an- 
 fwerable to the head, another to the feet, & Co confequently of 
 all the reft : and therefore the Schoolemen fay , zhztj4>icempo(i- 
 turn, is to be in a place circumfcriptiuely , tut Vbi fimplex, is to 
 bee in a place definitiuely, that is to fay, in fome certaine place, 
 though not according to the pofition or order of placing the 
 parts.But when a thing is faid tobe in a place circumfcriptiuely, 
 then fuch place and thing may be both diuided according to the 
 parts of pofition or placing, as this part hcre,and the other pare 
 there, whereof fpring thefe differences, aboue, beneath, before, 
 behind, en the right fide, on the left fide, and fuch like. And fi- 
 nally, this predicament comprehendcth whatfoeuer anfwereth 
 to this queflion, where any thing is faid to be or to be done. 
 
 G Prhat 
 
4* 
 
 Tbefirfi 'Book? 
 
 What properties doe belong to theprtdicament , Where? 
 
 Three : Firft,to admit no contrarietie ; for though to bee a- 
 boue and beneath feeme to be contrary, yet that is to be vnder- 
 flood phyfically, and not dialc&ically : fecondly , itadmitteth 
 neither more nor leflc ; for to be in the Templc,is no more to be 
 in place, then to bee in the market, or in any houfc : but the 
 third and chiefeft propertie oiVbi'xs to containe. 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 
 Of the predicament When, called in Lathe t 
 Quando. 
 
 j Ow define yonthu predicament } 
 
 This is faid to bee a relation or application 
 
 jofathingraeafured by time, vnto timeitfelfe, 
 
 ' and containeth the differences of times, whereby 
 
 ,any thing is faid to be, to haue bcene, or (hall be, 
 
 to doe, or to fuffer : and to fpeake briefly, it comprehendeth all 
 
 words that anfwere to this queftion ff r aen t as yeftcrday, to 
 
 morrow, the next day, and fuch like. 
 
 How fi Qu an d o diuided > 
 
 Two manner of wayes ; for fometime it is faid to be definite, 
 chat is, ccrtaine, as in this or that houre,day, oryeere, which is 
 certaine; and fometime indefinite; that is,vnccrtaine,as to haue 
 beene, without any limitation of time, which is vncertaine. Se- 
 condly, Quando may be diuided into his parts of fucceffion, as 
 Into time paft, prefent, and to come. 
 
 What properties doe belong to this predicament ? 
 Firft, to haue no contrarietie : Secondly, to admit neither 
 more or lefle: Thirdly, to bee alwSyes flitting or fluxiblc, and 
 neuer permanent, which propertie it hath by rcafon of time 
 "which continually pafleth away. 
 
 CHAP, 
 
eflogic{e. 43 
 
 CHAP. XVI. 
 
 Of the 'frtdicaueHt, t befituaiei, t*lltdin Luting 
 Situm effc. 
 
 ,#*/*> Situm cflfe? 
 
 guintilian faith , that Situm ej[e\sa$ muchtc 
 *fay, as to becfituated , ordered, or placed fome 
 'manner of way; and it is a gcnorall word,comprc« 
 hending all names that doe exprefle the fite ot 
 ordering of the body and parts thereof , as to ftand,to fitjto lye 
 either groucling, or right vp, or on the one fide : and finally, it 
 ^omprehendeth all thofe words which anfwer to this queftioni 
 how any thing is fituated , as when it is required how Norwich 
 ftandeth from London , either Northward, Southward, Weft- 
 ward, or Eaftward. 
 
 Bow is fite divided of the Scheolemen} 
 
 Into fite naturall and cafuall. 
 
 Which call yen naturall fite f 
 
 That whereby euery part of the body hath his naturall place; 
 as in mans body,the head to ftand aboue, the belly in the midft, 
 and the feet beneath ; and Co in a trce,the root to be loweft, the 
 body in the midft, and the boughes or branches to be higheft. 
 
 What call yon fite cafuall .* 
 
 That whereby thepofition or ordering of the parts is altered 
 any way by accident , as> now to ftand vpright,now to ftoop, 
 now to fit, or to lye downe, this way, or that way. 
 
 IPhat defcriftions are to be fetched from this Predicament t 
 
 The descriptions of places. 
 
 What properties doe belong to this Predicament ? 
 
 Two:Firft, to admit no contrariety; for though vpward fee- 
 meth to be contrary to downward,yet that is vnderftocd phyfi- 
 cally, and not diale6tically. Secondly, it hath neither more, nor 
 leffe; for to ftand is no more a fite, then to fit , nor fitting more 
 then ftanding. 
 
 Which things doe alter their fituation, and which not ? 
 
 All things without life and feeling, doekttpe their fite,if by 
 
 G 2 violence 
 
44 'The firjl Woofy 
 
 violence they be not changed:but all things hailing life and fee- 
 ling, doe alter their fite , when and as often as it pleafcth them, 
 as a beaft to fund vp, or to lye downe, and fo forth. 
 
 The Table of Site. 
 
 r The bead ttjiandaboue, , 
 ■Natural! , as <Tbe billy to be in the mid(l ?> 
 (.And the. feci benestb, 
 
 iiuktythct ^ ^ 
 
 1 „ jStandinr, 
 
 ■Or cafuall 3 as* ^Lyinggrottelih&or 
 
 CtPitb the face vpward. 
 
 CHAP. XVIL 
 Of the predicament, To haue, called™ Lathe, Habere. 
 
 ijg35 H*t doth this word to haue /tgntfie ? 
 
 It hath three fpeciall fignificaticnstFirft, to be 
 clad with garments, Armour, or ornament :fe-. 
 condly,to pofleffe any thing, as to polfeflfe wife, 
 lands, or goods : thirdly, to containe any thing, 
 as a veffell to containeey ther liquid or dry matter that is pow- 
 jed therein : and therefore this predicament comprehendeth alt' 
 fuch words as are deriued of the names of garments , as to bee 
 gowned, cloked, or coated-.alfo of Armour,as weildcfenirtie.as 
 offenfiue ; defenfiue, as to be armed withaCorfeiet, Iacke, or 
 ftiirt of Male, and fuch like : offenfiue , as to bee armed with a 
 Sword, Dagger, Caliuer, Halbert, or Pike. Alfo beafts and fi- 
 fties are faid to be armed with Nayles,Hornes,Tanons,BeakeSj 
 Scales, Finnes, and fuch like. Alfo it comprehendeth words of 
 ornament, as to be decked with Chaines, jewels, and Table ts: 
 alfo words of poffeflion, as to haue lands or goods : alfo words 
 of contayning , as to bee full of Wine, Oyle, or Hony, as you 
 may fee in the Table following, 
 
 Th«, 
 
o/Logicfa 4.5 
 
 The Tabic of the predicament To hatte. 
 
 r- frith pirment$,4u to be gowned or closed. 
 
 C To bet lad 2 With Armour, a* mtb a Corftlet or Halbert, 
 
 _ , . . N C Or with ornaments, as -mtb Tablet or c baint* 
 
 To baut » three- J 
 
 fold, that u t \opefife, as topofefe lands or goods. 
 
 {_To contain, as a retfejlto be fell of liquor, &c. 
 
 J&hat properties doe belong to this predicament I 
 Two: Firft, to admit more andleffe: for a man at Armesis 
 faid to bee more armed then a light Horfeman , and a Pike- 
 man more then a Caliuer or Harquebuzier. Againe, hee that is 
 clad with two coats,is more clad then he that wearcth but one. 
 Secondly, this predicament admitteth in fome fort contrariety: 
 for to be armed and vnarmed,clad and naked, are contraries by 
 priuation^but nototherwife*. 
 
 CHAP. XVIIL 
 
 Of the vfe of the Predicaments* . 
 
 what vfe or end doe thefe Predicaments ferue t 
 
 To many good vfes. Firft, if you will define 
 any thing, you fhallbefure in fome of thefe Pre- 
 dicaments to find out the generali kind thereof^ 
 together with all the differences (for the moft" 
 pare) belonging to the fame.: which if they bee 
 not fet downe, then they are to bee gathered out of the proper 
 accidents incident to the thing which you would define.Secod- 
 Jy, if you would diuide any thing , here you ihall find both the 
 generali kinds, fpeciall kinds, yea., andciiuers examples of the 
 Jndiuiduums comprehended vnder the fame kinds. Thirdly, 
 out of thefe Predicaments you may gather matter apt to prcue 
 any queftion, either generali or particular, . 
 
 G .2 CHAP,. 
 
4<J c Thefr/i c Boof^ 
 
 CHAP. XIX. 
 Of ?ofl -predicaments. 
 
 Hat meane yon by Pojt-predicament ? 
 
 They bee interpretations of ccrtaine words 
 more plainly expounded after the predicaments, 
 for the better vnderftandingof certaincof the 
 laid predicaments. 
 Which are they ? 
 
 The k Hue, Oppofitio, prim ^•pofleriu4 i fimul y motHS ) & habere, 
 that is to fay in Englifh,0^p0/frwir, before and after, together, mo. 
 mng> and tohaue :cucry one whereof may be taken and interpre- 
 ted diuers wayes. 
 i Tfhat is oppofttion ? 
 
 Oppofition is the repugnancy or contrariety of two extreme* 
 which are contrary one to anothcr,in fuch fort as none of them 
 is in like manner repugnant to any other thing : as for example, 
 white and blacke being two extremes, are more contrary one 
 to another, then cythcr of them is to any other colour,as to red, 
 yellow, rulfet, or blue. 
 
 Sith Jome things are faid to be agreeable one to another ',andfome 
 contrary one to another ,andfome diuers one from another ; it were 
 not dMif[e,firft, here to tell how , and when things are faid to bee a- 
 greeable, diners, or repugnant one to another. 
 
 Things are faid to be agreeable one to another three manner 
 of wayes :Firft,when they agree in generall kind,as thofe which 
 are fubiedt to one next generall kind,as man and horfe do agree 
 in generall kind, becaule this word animal, or fenfible body, is 
 the next generall kind to them both. Secondly , things are fayd 
 to agree in fpeciall kind , as Edward and John arc both compre- 
 hended vnder this word man. Thirdly, things are faid to agree 
 in number , as wordeshauing one felfe fignification, called m 
 Greece Syncnjma,zs a blade, a rapier, a curtilas or ftucke, figni- 
 fying a fworchalfo things of like fubflance or definition, as man, 
 and a' fe/ifiLle body endued with reafon. And by thefe three 
 wayes things arc fayd alfo to differ one from another ; for they 
 
 may 
 
of Logic{e. 47 
 
 may differ one from another in gencrall kind , in fpeciall kind, 
 and in number: in generall kind, as a fenfible body, and a tree; 
 in fpeciall kind, as a Horfe,and an A(Te:againe, they may differ 
 in number, as the Indiuiduums that be coprehcnded vnder one 
 fpeciall kind, as lohn and Edward, doe differ only in number. 
 
 Is it all one, to be dtuers, andcontrarie ? 
 
 No : for thofc things are faid to be diuers, which differ any of 
 the wayes abouefaid,or by any other difference, be it common, 
 proper,or moft proper. Yet few or none of shefe things are con- 
 trary one to another: for no fubftancc admitteth contrarietie, 
 nor yet many accidents , vnleffe it bee by reafon of qualities 
 whereunto contrarietie doth properly belong. 
 
 Hew many wayes are things faid to be contrary one to another ? 
 
 Fourc manner of wayes, that is, relatiue,contrarie,priuatiue, 
 and contradictory, that is to fay,by relation,by contrarietie,by 
 priuation, and by contradiction. 
 
 Which things are [aid to be offlojite orcontrarie by relation ? 
 
 Thofe things are oppofite by relation, which according to 
 their owne fignifications,haue mutuall relation one to another, 
 neither can they be both verified of one felfe thing in one felfe 
 refpedt, as the father and the fonne, the Lord and the bond- 
 man : for one man cannot be both a father and a fonne in one re. 
 fpe£t, but in diuers refpe&s hee may : for euery man that hath a 
 ibnne, is notwithstanding a fonne to his owne father, and a fa- - 
 thcr to his owne fonne. 
 
 Which things are [aid to be op fejite by contrarietie ? - 
 
 Thofe things are faid to bee contrary, which being compre° - 
 hended vnder one felfe kind, doe moft differ one from another, 
 and yet both may be one after another in one felfe fubieft meet 
 to receiue the fame , becaufe the one giueth place to the other, 
 vnleffe it be fiich a thing as is naturally incident to the faid fub= 
 ie6t : as heat and cold, being contayncd vnder qualitic,are moft 
 contraty one to another, and yet may bee one after another in 
 mans body, or any other fubie£t apt to receiue the fame: for 
 many times heat driueth out cold, and cold heat. Yet in fire it is 
 not fo : for heat is alwayes naturally incident to fire, and will 
 neuer giuc place to cold, fo long as it is fire a and not extinct. 
 
 How a 
 
4-8 the fir jl $00/% 
 
 How are contraries divided? 
 
 Of contraries, fomc haue a meane,calletl of the Schoolemen, 
 Cw/r^dw^w^, and fome haue no meane, called, Contrari* 
 immediata. 
 
 When are they f aid U haue a meane} 
 
 When the two contraries arc fuch, as neither of themisof 
 
 meere neceflity,in any fubie<St meet to receiue the fame,as white 
 
 & black:for that fubie& which is apt to receiue them both,may 
 
 be yellow or rufletjSc fo the fubieft is neither white nor blacke. 
 
 When are they [aid to batte no meant ? 
 
 When the one of the two contraries may be al waies truly af- 
 firmed of any fubieit apt to receiue the fame , as ficknefle and 
 health; for man or beaft is truly faid to be either fiek,or whole. 
 Alfo vice and vertue haue no meane : for a mart is faid to be ey- 
 ther good, oreuill: yet fome make good andetiill to haue a 
 meane, called a thing indifterent.Likewife,hot & cold to haue a 
 meane , that is to fay, Luke-warme. And betwixt health and 
 ficknefle, C/^ wma kethameaneeitate, tnac is to fay, neither 
 whole nor fickc, but betwixt both. 
 Which are oppofites by privation ? 
 
 Oppofites by priuation are two contraries belonging to one 
 felfe-fubiedt apt to receiue the fame, in the which fubie£t,whert 
 the one is wanting at fuch time as nature doth appoint,thc other 
 muft ncedes bee, as fight and blindnefle in the eye, hearing and 
 deafenefle in the eare, light and darknefle in the skie , or in any 
 other thing meet to receiue both. 
 
 Wherefore doe yon adde this claufe, at fuch time as nature doth ap- 
 point ? 
 
 Becaufe it is not needfull that one of thefe oppofites be in the 
 fubiedt in all timesras for example, the whelpc which is not nine 
 dayesold, though as yet hefeeth not; yet is hee not faid to bee 
 blind, becaufe Nature hath appointed him no fooncr to fee. 
 Which be oppofite by contradiction ? 
 
 They be two contraries, hauing no meane, and doe eonfift in 
 jContradi£tion,thatis to fay, in<lenying the one the other: and 
 fuch contradidionconhftcth either in propofuions, or elfein 
 simple or finglc Ecaraies. 
 
 Qiut 
 
ofLogic{e. 49 
 
 (jiue Examples of both. 
 
 In proportions thus : lohn is honeft, lohn is not honeft:?/*** 
 difputeth,/7*tf«difputetli not: in which kindcof proportions, 
 there is no meane of truth or falfhood ; for of neccflitie the one 
 of them muft al waycs be cither true or falfe,in fuch forc,as both 
 cannot be true together,nor both falfe together. In fimple terms 
 thus : a man:to know, not to know : to be, and not to be : and 
 therefore oppofites by contradiction be moft contrarie,and doe 
 differ from all the reft; for in all the other Oppofites , it is eafie 
 to find out fome meane fubiedt, whereof neither of them can be 
 truly fpoken or affirmed. 
 
 C H A P. X X. 
 
 Of before and after, called in Latino, P rius & 
 Pofterius. 
 
 Or» many way es is a thing fail to bee before and af- 
 ter! 
 
 Fiue manner of wayes,that is, by time, nature, 
 order, honour, and caufe, contained in thefc two 
 Latine Verfes : 
 Tempore natura y prim ordi«e die & honore: 
 Et caufa effects dicitttr e^e prior. 
 Gine Examples ofeuery one. 
 
 Firft, by time, Cicero is faid to be before jQulntil>an f and So- 
 (rates before Anttotle, and fuch like. Secondly, by nature, that 
 thing is faid to bee firft, or before, from which the consequent 
 cannot returne backward :by which way all gcnerall kinds arc 
 faid to be before their Speciall kindcs,and Speciall kindes before 
 their Indiuiduums:for if man be,then fenfiblebody(which is the 
 generall kindc) muft needs be,but not contrarily : So likevvife,if 
 lohn be, man muft needs be, but not contrarily;for it followeth 
 not ofnecefficie,Becaufeitisafenfiblebody,E>£0,it isaman,or 
 becaufeitis a man,£r£*, it is hhn. Thirdly, by order one thing 
 is faid to be before another, as one before two, and two before 
 three, letters before Syllables, and Syllables before words, and 
 words before Speech .To this alfo appertained that which is faid 
 
 H to 
 
7he fir/i Too^e 
 
 5o 
 
 to be before by fuuation, as in going from Norwich to London, 
 Thttford\s before Newmarket, and Newmarket before ffare 3 2n<i 
 fo forth. Fourthly ,by honour or digmtie,an Emperour is faid to 
 be before a King, a King before a Duke,a Duke before an EarJe, 
 an Earle before a Baron,&c.Fiftly, the caufe is faid to be before 
 hisen°e&,as the rifing of the Sunne is fatd to be before day; fo 
 thedirTerencis faid to be before his fpeciall kinde, andthefpe- 
 enll kinde before his propertie. And thefe be conuertible: for if 
 it be day , the Sunne muft needs be vp : and if the fpeciall diffe- 
 rence be, the fpeciall kinde muft needs be, and fo contrarily. 
 To what endferueth *his manifold way of before and after * 
 To the intent that wee may the better vnderftand what hath 
 becne faid before touching oppofites by rclation.that is to fay t 
 that Relatiues are alwayes together by order of nature, and not 
 one before another, but only by their fourth way,that is to fay, 
 by honour or worthinefTe, which way, as ^Artfiotle faith,of all 
 the other waycs,is moft vnproper,and lealt to the purpofe, 
 
 CHAP. XXL 
 Of the word Together, called in Latine, Sinoul. 
 
 WtOw many wayes are things faid to be together t 
 
 Two wayes, that is, by order of time, and by 
 -rder ot nature. Firft by order of time, iheheat 
 •nd (riitiing of the Sunne are- faid to bee in the 
 Sunne together, that is, at one time: alfo the An- 
 gels were created all together, and at one time. 
 Secondly, thofe things are faid to bee together by order of na- 
 ture, which haue natur all relation one to another, and bee con- 
 uertible, neither is the one caufeof the other, as the father and 
 the fonne, fingle and double, and fiich like : and many doc addc 
 hereunto diuers fpeciall kindes and differences fubiedt to one 
 felfe gencrall kind, as man and bruit bcaft , 1 eafonable and vn- 
 reafonable, are fubied to the generall kinde , fenfiblebody, or 
 animal, 
 
 CHAP. 
 
ofLogic{e. 51 
 
 CHAP. XXII. 
 
 Of Mouing or Motion, called in Latine, Mocus, and 
 of the km&ti thereof, 
 
 Hertford* mention made here of Moving ? 
 
 For the better vnderrtanding of the Predica- 
 ment Action, whereunto Mouing bclongeth. 
 Hove many kinds of Mot ton or Matting hetherel 
 Six, briefly touched before in the predicament 
 of Action, that is to fay, Generation, Corruption, Augmentati- 
 on, Diminution, Alteration, and Mouing from place to place. 
 'Define thefe kindes, 
 
 1 Generation is a proceeding from the not being of a fub- 
 ftance, to the being of the fame, as from an Acornc to an Oke. 
 
 2 Corruption (contrariwifc) is a proceeding from a being to 
 a not being, as fcotr- an Oke to chips or afhes. 
 
 2 Augmentation is the increafing of a great quantitie in the 
 whole: asfromachilde to a man. 
 
 4 Diminution is cor.trariwife a decreafing or diminishing of 
 quantitie in the whole, as a bodie that confumethor pinethby 
 difeafe or otherwifc. 
 
 5 Alteration is a proceeding or changing from one qualitie 
 into another, as from hot to cold. 
 
 6 Mouing from place to place, is, as the mouing of the Sun 
 out of the Eaft into the Weft. 
 
 CHAP. XXIII. 
 
 Of themrdHibcre t that is, to haue, and how many 
 voayes it is to be vnderjiood, 
 
 Otv many fgmfications hath this word t io haue? 
 Eight. 
 
 1 Firft, to haue a qualitic,as Science, Vice,©r 
 Vcrtue. 
 
 2 To haue a quantitie, as to bee fix, feuen or 
 eigh' foot long. 
 
 3 To be dad, as to haue a Cloke or Coat. 
 
 H 2 4 To 
 
S I The fir/t c Boo{e y &c. 
 
 4 To haue fome part of the body clad or decked with fome 
 thing, as the finger with a ring, the necke with a chaine. 
 
 5 To haue a parr,or member, as a hand, a head, or foot. 
 
 6 To containers a hogfhead that hath therein beere or wine. 
 
 7 To poflcire, as to haue lands, tenements, or goods. 
 
 8 To haue a Wife , which (according to Ariftctlt) is vnpro- 
 perly faid, becaufe nothing can be properly faid to haue,which 
 
 is had it felfe of the fame : for the wife hath the man, as well 
 as the man the wife ; and therefore this way 
 of hauing ferueth to little 
 purpofe. 
 
 Bertendetch tbefrft Booke of Legtckc* 
 
 THE 
 
THE ARTE OF 
 
 LOGICKE. 
 
 The fecond Booke. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Of Definition, 
 
 ! Auing hitherto fuflficiently fpoken of the 
 Predicables and Predicaments, and of 
 all things belonging vnto them , with- 
 out the knowledge whereof, no true de- 
 finition, nor good diuifion can bee well 
 made; me thinkes it were mcete now to 
 treate of definition and diuifion. 
 
 What u 'Definition, And hew manifold 
 u it? 
 Definition is a fpeech, whereby either fome name or thing is 
 declared : and it is twofold,that is , of a name;and of a thing. 
 What u definition of a name, and how manifold is it ? 
 Definition of a name, is a fpeech whereby the fignification of 
 fome word is declared : and it is ten-fold. 
 
 i Definition yerball, as when a word lcfieknovvne is decla- 
 red by a word moreknowne, as thus, To imitate, is as much to 
 fay, as to follow, or to counterfeit .-againe, to accomplish, is 
 to fulfill. 
 
 H 3 2 De- 
 
54- Thefecond'Bookf 
 
 2 Definition by difference; as, HeisaKing,whichrulethby 
 Xaw; but he that ruleth by force, is a Tyrant, 
 
 3 Definition metaphorical!, or by figure; as, Adolefcenceis 
 the flower of mans age:Good Preachers are the fait of the earth. 
 
 4 Definition by contrarie; as, Vertue is, to flee vice. 
 
 5 Definition by circumlocution; as,The writer of the Troian 
 Warre,that is to fay, Homer. 
 
 6 Definition by example, as to fay, that this word rcafona- 
 ble or vnreafonable is a fpeciall difference. 
 
 7 Definition by wont, or defect; as, That is three quarters, 
 which la eke th a quarter of a yard, or any fuch like thing. 
 
 8 Definition by prayfc,or difprayfc : by prayfe,as,Logicke is 
 an Art of Artes, and Science of Sciences : Iuflice is the Queene 
 of all Vertues. By difprayfc, as, Idlencfleis the corruption or 
 definition ofyouth. 
 
 c Definition by fimilitude; as, The Sunne is the eye of the 
 World; ACitie without a Magiftrate, is as a Ship without a 
 Goucrnour. 
 
 io Definition by Etymologie; as, He is rightly called good- 
 man, becaufe he is a good man indeed, and full of good workes. 
 
 When is definition of the name needfullto be vfed ? 
 
 When fome doubtfull word is caufe of the controuerfie. 
 
 Of the definition of a thing, 
 
 WHat is the definition of a thing? 
 It is a fpecch, which dt clareth briefly, plainly, and 
 aptly, the yery nature and fubftanceof the thing which is de- 
 fined. 
 
 How is the definition of a, thing dittidedi 
 
 Into thefe fix ^indes, that is to fay, into definition elTentiall, 
 caufall,by the Relatiuc, by the effects and offices, by numbering 
 vp of the parts, and by heaping vp of accidents. 
 What is definition effentiall? 
 
 It is that which confifteth of the next generall kinde, ioyned 
 with fome fpeciall difference or property belonging to the lame 
 kinde;as when I define a man to be a fenfible body,e nducd with 
 mion,or apt to fpcake: and this is the Logicali definition moft 
 
 fure 
 
of Logtcfy. 55 
 
 Cure of all others , but not eafie to bee made of cucry thing, for 
 lacke of fpeciall differences and naturall properties. 
 When is it f aid to be a eaufaR definition ? 
 When it is made of ihe gcnerall kinde,and of the proper cau- 
 fes of the thing defined. 
 
 JJovd many chiefe kindofcaufes be there ? 
 Foure, that is, matter,forme, caufe efficient and end. 
 How define joh matter ? 
 
 Matter is that whereof any thing is raade,as cloth is the mat- 
 ter whereof a doake or coat is made, and wooll is the matter of 
 cloth. 
 
 What is Forme f 
 
 Forme is the fhape whereof any thing taketh both his being 
 and his name : and therefore the Schoolemen do define forme to 
 be that which giueth a being to any thing, bee it naturall or ar- 
 tificial!, as in the Examples before recited, thecoatorcloake 
 hath both his beirg and name of the fhape which it hath, and 
 not of the matter. 
 
 What is the caufe efficient ? 
 
 1 hat which maketh or worketh any thing, and is the authour 
 thereof, as the Carpenter is the caufe efficient of the houfe, and 
 Ship bright of the Ship. 
 
 What is the end or finall caufe ? 
 
 It is that for whole lake 3ny thing is done,as the end of warrc 
 is to haue peace , the end of iiudie is to get learning and know- 
 ledge. 
 
 due Examples of definitions mxde of etsery one of thefe eaitfes. 
 Of matcer let this bee your Example : Beere is a Drinke 
 made of Mault, Water, 3nd Hops. Of forme thus : Man is a 
 fenhble bodie , endued with a Soule intcllectiue or reafonable, 
 which is the true fhape of man. Of the caufe efficient thus : 
 That is a Decree of the Senate, which the Senate commandcth 
 andordainethjfor the Senate is the caufe efficient of the Decree. 
 Anger or wrath is the boyhng of the bloud about the heart, 
 through the ftirring vp ofcholer. Of the end thus : A houfe is a 
 building made to defend our bodies from the injuries of the aire 
 and weather.. 
 
 Lftfajf 
 
5 6 The fecond *Boofy 
 
 Uvfay not a good definition be mads of many of thtfe cattfesioyned 
 together? 
 Yes indeed. 
 Cine Example. 
 
 Lo here the example ofDemoJlkenes t \n defining what Law is. 
 Law (faith he) is the inuention and gift of God, and the decree 
 of wifemen, the correction of crimes, cither rafhly or aduifedly 
 committed,and a common couenant or confent of the Citie,ac« 
 cording to the which ail men ought to liue. In this definition, 
 the firft and chiefeft caufe efficient is God, the fecond caufe effi- 
 cient is the common couenant or confent of the Citie : the mat- 
 ter is the decree of the wife : the end is the correction of crimes, 
 and the keeping of the Citizens in good order of life. 
 
 When is a definition faid to be made by the Hjlatiue ? 
 - When one Relatiue is interpreted by another; as thus, He is a 
 Fathcr,which hath a Sonnejand he is a Maftcr,which hath a Ser- 
 uant. 
 
 When is a definition [aid to be made bjtheejfeds i vtrtties i or offi- 
 ces of thethirg dt fined ? 
 
 When the nature of the thing is plainly declared by fhewing 
 the faid effects or offices, as thus: An adamant ftone is that which 
 being laid nigh to Iron or Steele, draweth the Steele ynto hiro: 
 luftice is a vertue which giucth cuery man his right. 
 
 When is a definition faid to be made by numbering vp ofthepartst 
 When it contayneth either thechiefe,orall the parts of fome 
 whole thing , or elfe all the fpeciall kindesof fomegcnerall 
 kinde. 
 
 due Examples of both thefe vtayes. 
 
 Of the firft thus: A Houfe is a building, hauing a foundation, 
 walles, andcouering.Of the fecond way thus : A fenfiblebodie 
 is that which comprehendeth both man and bruit beaft. 
 
 When is a definition faid to be made by heaping vp of accidents f 
 When a thing is rather defcribed, then defined, by fuch com- 
 mon and proper accidents as doc belong to the fame,as fire is an 
 Element that is hotand dry,and excccdcth all other Elements in 
 lightneffe: and therefore this laft kind of definition ought rather 
 to be called a defcripcion then a definition, which is vfuall to the 
 x Poets, 
 
ofLogicfy. 5 y 
 
 Poets, Orator** and Historiographers, in defcribing either per- 
 fon,fa<5t,or thing:alfo to the Phificians, in defcribing their fim- 
 ples, as Roots, Plants, Herbcs, and fuch like. 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 Of the precepts to be obferaedin 1) efinition. 
 
 Ow many precepts are to bee obferued in making* 
 true definition? 
 
 Thefc three :Firft , that it briefly exprefle the 
 
 whole power and nature of the thing defined : 
 
 Secondly, that there bee nothing therein fuper- 
 
 fluous, nor any thing wanting : Thirdly,that the 
 
 definition bee not common to many things, but proper to that 
 
 thing only which is defined, fo as it may make it to differ from 
 
 all other things. 
 
 If hat order is to be obferned in making a dialectic all definition ? 
 Firft,you muft know in what predicament the thing is contai- 
 ned which you would define, to the intent that in descending 
 from the raoft generall kinde, downe towards themoft fpeciall 
 kinde of the fame predicament,ye may find out by the way that 
 which is next generall kinde to the thing that is to bee defined: 
 which next generall kinde being found out, yee muft then feeke 
 out the fpeciall difference orpropertie, the proper caufe, effect, 
 or common accidents belonging to the fame : as for example, if 
 ye would define what vertue is, ye muft rcfort to the predicamet 
 of qualitie, wherein vertue is contained:then in defcending from 
 quality,proceed to habit/rom habit to habit of the rnind,which 
 is two-fold,that is to fay,intelle6tuall and moral!, & not rinding 
 it vnder habit intelle<5tall,procecd to habit morall,for that is the 
 next generall kind to vertue:that done, feeke out the difference 
 orpropertie, true caufe or effect: the difference is to bee good, 
 wherein it differeth from rice , for vice is alfo a morall habit as 
 well as vertue: the effect of vertue is to incline mans will to doe 
 alwaics according to right reafon or true iudgcmenttfo fhai you 
 make a true definition of vertue, in faying that vertue is a good 
 morall habit, inclining mans will to doe alwaies according to 
 
 I true 
 
5 8 The fecond TSooke 
 
 true iudgement. And after this fort yee may learne to define any 
 other thing. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 OfDimfan, 
 
 Wat U Diuifion ? 
 
 Diuifion is the parting or diuidingof a word 
 or thing that is more generall,vnto other words 
 or things lefle generall: for Diuifion is twofold, 
 that is, of a name, and of a thing. 
 
 When u itfasd to be the dtfufion of a name ? 
 
 When fomc Equiuokc or doubtfull word is diuided into his 
 manifold fignificationSj. as this word Wolfe into a roan hauing 
 that name, into a foure-footcd beaft,intoanYlcerous fore, and 
 into a c rrainefifl^each one called by thcnameofWolfcrwhich 
 kind of difrin<ftion or diuifion is very nece{Tarie,to auoid ambi- 
 guitie of fpcechjwhich ambiguitic caufeth many times great er- 
 rour, 
 
 How manifold is the diuifion of a thing f 
 
 It is threefold, that is, fubrtantiall, partible, 8nd accidental]. 
 
 When is itprtptr/jfaidte be fa bft ant tall ? 
 
 When any generall kind is diuided by his fpeciall differences 
 into his proper fpeciall kinds :as thus; offenfibiebodies,one is 
 reafonable,as man,& another is vnreafonable, as a bruit beafr. 
 
 When is this k$nd ofditei don to be vfed ? 
 
 When the fpeciall kindeslacke proper names, as moft com- 
 monly the fpeciall kindes fubalternate doe, which may be diui- 
 ded againe as generall kindes into more fpeciall kindes : as for 
 example, of vnrcafonable bcafts fome bee terreftriall, feme bee 
 aquaticall,and fome aierie : againe, euery one of thefe may bee 
 diuided into their fpeciall kinds.euen vntill ye come so the low- 
 eft of all, and vnto the Indimdttums comprehended vnderthc 
 famejand that not only of things contained in the predicament 
 offubftance,but alfo in any other predicaments of accidcnts,as 
 of magniiudes,one is long,as a line,another is broad,as a fuper- 
 jBcics, and another is thickc, as a body. This diuifion, though it 
 
 be 
 
o/Logic{e. 59 
 
 be of accidents contained in the predicament of quantitie, yet it 
 is called a fubftantiall diuifion,becaufe the generall kind here is 
 dinided by his fpeciall difference into his proper fpeciall kinds. 
 What c -ally on a partible dmifton ? 
 
 I calj that a partible diuifion, which diuideth fome whole 
 thing into his parts, which is called of the Lzt\nes f partition if 
 yee would diuide the Romane Gommon-wealth into Senators, 
 Knights, and Commons. You may alfo diuide a houfe into his 
 principall parts,as into the foundation, wals, and roofe thereof. 
 But thebettert© vnderftand this kind of diuifion, it fhall not be 
 aniifle to (hew you here what kindes ofwhole,and what kindes 
 of pans there be: for there is whole fubftantial,aad whole inte- 
 grall:aqaine,of parts,fome arc called fubftantial,and fome inte- 
 gral!; and ofparts integrall,fome arc called fimilar or like, and 
 fome difTimilar or vnlike : againe, of the diffimilar,fome arc cal- 
 led principall, and fome not principall: of all which things I 
 tninde here briefly to fpeake. 
 
 Firfit lf rA ) yon tell what yott meane bj whole fubftantiall 9 and 
 whole integral!. 
 
 Whole fubftantiall , is that which confifleth of fubftantiall 
 parts clcauing wholly together, and not fcuerally diftincl: in 
 number, as whole man,confifting of foule and body:but whole 
 integral is that which confiftcth of integral parts, which though 
 they cleauc together, yet they are diftincl: and feaerall in num- 
 ber's mans body,confifting of head,breft, belly,legs, &c. 
 Hew define yott fubftantiall parts ? 
 
 Subflantiall parts arc the firft and chiefe parts whereof any 
 thing is compounded, ofwhich parts if any bee wanting, the 
 whole rauft needs perifh,and lofeth his name,as the matter and 
 forme of any compound thing, be it naturall or artificially the 
 body and foule are the firft and chiefe parts of man; themetall 
 and fafhion of a filuercup arc the firft & chiefe parts of the cup, 
 whereof neither can be wanting : for the foule without the bo- 
 die is a fpirit, and notraan; and the body without the foule is 
 but a dead carcafle : againe, the cup without matter or diapers 
 nocupatall. 
 -Wiiith fa called integral} parts ? 
 
 I 2 Cer- 
 
60 The fccond *Boo{e 
 
 Certaine feccndarie parts,which being all gathered together 
 do make the whole perfec\as the hcad,breft,belly,armes,hands, 
 thighes, legges, and feet, are the integrall parts of mans body : 
 and of thefc integrall parts , fome are called fimilar , and fome 
 diffimi!ar,that is to fay, like and vnlike. 
 
 W 'rich are fimilar } and which dijfimilar 1 
 
 Similar, or like, are thofe that be of one kind, and ofonefelfe 
 name; and being diuided into parts, euery fiieh part, be it neuer 
 fo fmail, bcarcth alfo the name of the whole, as flefh, bonc,fi- 
 new,skin,andfuchlike:for euery little part of the flefh is called 
 flefh, and euery part of bone is called bone ; andfoof all the 
 reft. Hitherto alfo may be referred water, fire, gold, iron, or a- 
 ny other fimple metall,wine,wood,(tone,and fueh like : for eue- 
 ry drop of water is called water, and fo of the reft, 
 
 Jtfhich call j oh dijfimilar or vn like ? 
 
 Thofe parts that differ both in kinde and name, as the head, 
 breft, belly, armes, and legges, are the parts diffimilar of a mans 
 bodyrlikevvifea houfe, a fhip,and many other things, haue alfo 
 fuch parts, of any one of which parrs the whole cannot be fpo- 
 ken: for you cannot fay, Becaufe here is the head of a man, Erg* 
 here is a man. Againe, of thefe diffimilar parrs, fome are called 
 principal!, whereof if any be wanting, the v\holemuft needs pe- 
 rifh : as without the head, belly, heart,liiicr,nr guts,mans body 
 cannot be.The not pr'.ncipallare thofe part', without the which 
 the body may be : for though thofe parts bee wanting , yet the 
 body is counted a whole thing, though not perfect in euery 
 point,as without armes,hand?,lcgges, or fect,the body may hue: 
 that building alfo that hath a foundation, walles, and roofe, is 
 counted to be a whole houfe,though it hath neither doores nor 
 windowes, yet not perfect in euery refpeel. 
 Wherein doth partition and dittifion differ ? 
 
 In diuers points: for in diuifionany gcnerall k-inde may bee 
 lightly fpoken of euery fpeciall kind contained vnder the fame; 
 «s this word,/**/7l/f body, which is fpoken both of man & beaft. 
 But in partition,the whole cannot bee fpoken of euery part : for 
 you cannot fay that the foule or body of man is whole man,nor 
 that the head or foot is his whole body.Again,diuifion diuideth 
 
 vni- 
 
of Logic kf. 61 
 
 vniuerfall things into their particulars, and partition diuideth 
 particulars into their parts, and moft commonly followeth diui- 
 fion,helping to make iubdiuifionsras for example,when diuifion 
 hath diuided a fenfible body into nan and beaft .then followeth 
 partition,and diuideth man into foul e and body, and the body 
 into his integrall parts,as head,breft,belly,leggcs,and fuch like. 
 How manifold is dmifion accident all f 
 
 Threefold : for by that we cither diuide fome fubic& into his 
 accidents, or fomc accident into his fubieft, or fomc accident 
 into his accidents. 
 
 Gine Examples of all tkefe three wayes t 
 Of the firft let this be your Example : Of men, fome bee free, 
 and fome be bond; fome be vertuous, and fome be vicious : and 
 after this fort you may diuide the predicameut of fubftance into 
 as many accidents as you will , running thorowoutall the nine 
 predicaments of accidents. Of the fecond way thus : Of goods, 
 fome are faid to be of theminde, fome of the body, and fome of 
 fortune. Of the third thus : Of good things,fome are faid to bee 
 honeft,fome profitable,and fome pleafant or delectable : which 
 kind ofdiuifion is much vfedofthe Orators. To this alformy be 
 referred the common order of diuiding any fpcech or oration in- 
 to his parts, which the Orators call partition or distribution, 
 whereby is fet do wnc in what order euery thing fhall be vttered 
 and declared,which fir(t,and which laft,and io forth, 
 
 CHAP. IIII. 
 
 Oft he precept stobe obferued in Dwjtoir. 
 
 \Ow many precepts are to be obfertted in making a trtte 
 
 I diuifion ? 
 
 Three : Firft, that the generall kind bee diui- 
 Jed into his next fpeciallkindes, by fuchfpeciall 
 
 [{differences as aremeercly repugnant onetoano- 
 
 ther , and doe comprehend the whole nature of 
 the thing diuided: as thus; Of fcnfiblebodics, fomc be reafona- 
 ble,and fome be vnieafonable : for it were no good diuifion, to 
 fay ,of fenfible bodies,oneis reafonable, & another is two-foo- 
 ted, 1 i What 
 
6% ThefecondlSooke 
 
 What is thefecond precept ? 
 
 That the par ts,being ioyncd together,may bee equall to the 
 whole , and may comprehend neither more nor leflfe then the 
 thing which is diui-ded, as reafonable foule, and carnallbo- 
 die.being the chiefe parts of man, do comprehend neither more 
 nor letfe then whole man. 
 
 What is the third precept > 
 
 That no part or fpeciall kinde be vfed as a generall kinde,nor 
 the generall kinde as a part or fpeciall k'mde : as in this diuifioti 
 which Cicero reproucth. I will (hew that through the coneupi- 
 fcence, boldneffe, and couetoufneffeofour aducrfaries,all mif- 
 chiefes haue chanced to the Common-wealth : here couetouf- 
 ncfTe is mingled with concupifcence,wherof it is a partrfor con- 
 cupifcence is the generall kinde of all luftsordefires. But this 
 precept feemcth rather to appertaine to a Rhetorical! partition, 
 then a Dialectical! diuifion. 
 
 To what endferueth Diftt/io/t ? 
 
 To diuers good ends.Firft, as Cicero faith, it helpeth greatly 
 to teach plainly to define ,& to make things that be compound, 
 intricate,orconfufed, toappeare fimple, plainc, andecrtaine: 
 Secondly, by diuiding things orderly into their pans,it greatly 
 helpeth memorie: and thirdly ,it helpeth to ansplific any kind of 
 fpeech, and to make it more copious. 
 
 Chap. v. 
 
 OfCMetkod. 
 
 Auing hitherto fufficiently fpoken of words, 
 both lingular and vniuerfal,& alfo of Definition 
 and Diuifion , which are the two chicfc inftru- 
 mentswherby all fimple queltionsare difcufled, 
 I minde here to fhew with what order or method 
 euery fuch queftion is to be handled. 
 What is Method ? 
 
 Method is a compendious way of learning or teaching any 
 thing : and it is three-fold, that is to fay,Compofuiue,Rtfolu- 
 tiue, and Diuifiue ox definitiue. 
 
 What 
 
of Logtcjp. 6^ 
 
 what is method eomf* fame ? 
 
 It is thar whereby we compound the whole of his parts, be- 
 ginning at the fmallcft, and fo proceed from greater to greater, 
 vntill wc come to the chiefe end whereto we tend, which kindc 
 of order or method we obferue here in writing this Logick: for 
 firft wetreatof wordsorterms ; thcnofapropofirion,and Jaftof 
 all of aSyllogifme. So likewile hecthat will teach the mgheft 
 \wy from Norwich to Londonby order compofitiue, will bid 
 him firft go to Wwdh .**»,from Windham to Aileborongh y hom A- 
 tUbormohtoTheifrd) from Thstfordxo ^ewmar^ety from \ey*~ 
 market to Barkjvayj'rom Barkjvaj to Wart fiom Ware to London, 
 What is method rcfoltttiue ? 
 
 It is that whereby any whole thing is refolued into his parts : 
 or when weeproceed from the end to the next and immediate 
 caufe therof,and from that to the next caufc of that,and fo from 
 one to another, vntill we come to the fii ft caufe of all, and moft 
 remote & furtheft off: as when werefolue aSyllogifme into his 
 Propofi ions, and a Propoficion into his vttermbft bounds or 
 termes, which are the fubie<5t and the predicate : and this way is 
 vnlike to the other before recited^ecaufc it goeth back ward,as 
 in the former example.Tfye will teach the way from Norwich to 
 London by method refolutiue, ye muft fay that there is a Towne 
 called Ware ,twentie miles from ZW<?*;next to that is a Townc 
 called Barhveay , and fo till yee come to that which was firft in 
 method compofitiue. Tothefe two methods Galen addeth the 
 third method, that is, method diuifiue or definitiue. 
 What is that method ? 
 
 It is,when in defining and diuiding we defcend orderly from 
 a moft generall kind to all the fpecial kinds contained vndcr the 
 fame, and fo to the loweft ofalhas hauing to fpeake of qualitic, 
 we define it,anddiuide it into his fourc fpcciall kinds, and euery 
 fuch fpcciall kind into his parts and members,euen till we come 
 to the loweft of all, as you fee in the Table of quality before de- 
 fcribed. Which kindc of method is more fully handled by my 
 friend Accontio, in his little Treatife which hee wrote in Latine, 
 de methods : the e£fc& of which Booke I thinke it not out ofpur- 
 pofe to fet downeeucn here. 
 
 The 
 
6\ Thefecond^Boofy 
 
 The effeft of Accontius his Boeke i de mcthodo y which he 
 
 affirmeth to be the fecondyart or office of 
 
 Logickf, 
 
 FOr the firft office of Logicke teacheth how tofindeoutthe 
 truth in any fpeech : but method teacheth how to attainc to 
 the Arte or knowledge of anything. In which method, three 
 things (as he faith) are to be confidered : Firft, what method is : 
 Secondly, what is the effect or vttermoft end thereof .-Thirdly, 
 what be the caufes of that end or effect. 
 
 Method is a certaine right way, whereby we may fearch out 
 the knowledge of any thing; & hauing attained it,how to teach 
 the fame commodioufly to any other, without examining whe- 
 ther it bee true or falfej for that belongeth to the firft part of 
 Logicke. 
 
 The effect or vttermoft end of method , is the knowledge of 
 anything. 
 
 The caufes of that end are thefe three , forme , matter, and 
 caufe efficient. 
 
 Forme here feemeth to bee that which isknowne by all the 
 parts of fuch knowledge, being gathered together (as it were) 
 into one felfebody : which parts are thefe; firft, what the thing 
 is ; fecondly, what be the caufes thereof, and alfo what bee the 
 caufes of thofe caufes, euen to the laft or vttermoft.caufe: third- 
 ly, what be the effects, and alfo what bee the effects of thofe ef- 
 fects, as well when the thing is taken generally, as for fome 
 whole thing, or as when the whole is diuided into all his parts, 
 euen vnto the parts indiuifible. 
 
 Matter here is generally taken, and not for the matter of any 
 determinate or certaine kind : vnto which matter do appertaine 
 all things that be finitc,perpetual,and immutable,that.is to fay, 
 all vniuerfals. 
 
 The caufes efficient arc partly thofe things that are more 
 knowne, as firft, to know what the thing is by definition confi- 
 fting of the gencrall kind, and of the differences thereto belon- 
 ging : fecondly,wbat is the effect or end of the thing,as in thofe 
 things which doe not depend vpon our will : and thirdly, what 
 
 be 
 
ogicfc 
 
 '«1 
 
 bee the ca»fes of that end or effect , the eonfjderation of which 
 end belongeth to thofe things which doc depend vpon our will, 
 and partly the caufe efficient is the right applying or ordering 
 of the more knowne things, which order containeth two parts: 
 for firft we muft proceed alwaies from the moft genera! kinds to 
 the next generall kinds, as hauing to begin with the definition 
 of the thing which you feeke to know when need reduireth,you 
 muft proceed from the moft generall kind of all , that is to fay, 
 from the highcft general kinde, and fo defcend downward, vn- 
 till you come to the thing that is to be defined :but it you haue 
 to begin from the vttermoft end of the thing , then next of all 
 confiderthat, from whence the end doth immediately fpring, 
 and what doth follow next to that, and fo proceed from one to 
 another,till you come to the firft caufe of ftll.FinallyJf you haue 
 to begin from the firft caufes, then you muft orderly proceed 
 from that which is firft vnto the fecond, and fo to the third, and 
 fo forth vntill you come to the v ttermoft crTe-3 or laft end . 
 
 Now as touching the fecond part of applying or ordering 
 the more knowne things, you muft haue confederation of euery 
 whole thing,and of all his parts rwhcrefo re if you haue to define 
 any thing,Art,or Science.wherof you treat, you muft define the 
 whole,and then euery part therof,vntill you come to the loweft 
 part thereof, and yet euery one in his proper place. And if yoit 
 cannot comprehend in one definition all thofe things that are 
 to be referred to one head, then vfe diuifion in diuiding the 
 whole into his parts, and define euery fuch part in order. But if 
 all the parts which the thing containeth,haue not one fclfe end a 
 but diuers, then diuide it by fuch differences as euery part may 
 haue his proper end. 
 
 Moreouer, if the forme, matter,or caufe efficient haue diuers: 
 refpe&s and confederations, then (according to that diuerfitie) 
 make diuers diuifions, and firft declare what is common to all 
 the parts in general,& what is proper to euery one in particular, 
 
 Fioally.if fome one whole thing lyeth hidden,then it is to be 
 found out by looking into fome of the particular parts thereof. 
 Andthefeareall the chiefeft points cotained in the LatimYrzz- 
 tife which my friend esicmiw wrote diMsthofo. And though 
 
66 The fecond ^oofy 
 
 that Petrue Ramtu maketh but one kind of method , that is to 
 fay,to proceed from the firft principles or elementsryet I am furc 
 he wil not deme,but that to goe forward and backward, be two 
 diuers things, though not contrarie, as doth well appcarc by the 
 compofitiue and rcfolut'iue method before de6ned. 
 
 / doe not jet perfectly vnderfiandby all this , with what method a 
 fimple quejlten is to be handled : therefore I fray yon flew the true 
 way and order thereof. 
 
 The method or way in handling a fimple queftion, dependeth 
 vpon thefe nine Interrogates, that is to fay, i .Firft, what figni- 
 fications the name or word hath, whereof the queftion is made, 
 and how it is to be taken. 2. Secondly , whether there be any 
 fuch thing, or not. 3. Thirdly, what it is. 4. Fourthly, what be 
 the parts or fpeciall kinds thereof. 5. Fiftly, what be the caufes. 
 6. Sixtly, what be the effects. 7. Seuenthly, what things be in- 
 cident or appurtenant vnto it. 8. Eight'y, what things arc like 
 vnto it. 9. And ninthly, what things be contrarie to it. All 
 which qucftions tAriftotle rcduceth into thefe foure , that is to 
 fay, Whether it be ? What it is ? What manner of thing it is ? 
 and, Why it is? 
 
 Gi^e example of a fimple queftion handled according to the nine 
 quefihns before recited. 
 
 As for example : If wee haue to treat of vertue > firft,wee muft 
 fhew the diuers fignifications of Vertue ; for Vertue fignificth 
 fomttime power and abilitie, as when we fay,Vertuc attra&iue, 
 Vertue digeftiue , or Vertue expulfiuc: but here Vertue is to be 
 taken for a morall habit.bringing forth good and commendable 
 actions. Secondly, whetherVertue be,or not,it plainly appeareth 
 by the diuers doings of men, whereof fome be good , fomebe 
 bad.Thirdly,what Vertue is, we know by the definition thereof, 
 in faying, that Vertue is a morall habit, inclining mans will to 
 do that which is alwaies good,and agreeable to true iudgemenr. 
 Fourthly , the kinds of vertue be diuers , as Prudence , Iuftice, 
 Temperance,Fortitude,Modeftie,and fuch like.Fiftly,the caufes 
 of Vertue be alfo diuers ; for the caufe efficient thereof is good, 
 and mans will obedient to true reafon , and to true iudgement : 
 the matter or fubied of Vertue is the mind or heart of man : the 
 
 final! 
 
o/Logicfy. 
 
 «7 
 
 finall caufe is bleffcdneffe.Sixtly,the effect of vertueis tranquil- 
 litic of the minde, and many profpcrous fucceffes, and alfo pub- 
 likeycilitieand peace. Scuenthly, things incident to vcrtue are 
 thefe,the honour, prayfe, and commendation of good men. 
 Eightly, things of affinicic or like to vertuc,be all good inclina- 
 tions, difpofitions, or good naturall afreclions,as to bee louing, 
 kind, and mercifull. Ninthly, things contrary to vertuc, bee all 
 manner of vicei, as Pride, Couetoufneflfe, Hypocrifie, Diffimu- 
 lation,&c. 
 
 What method is to be obferuedin handling a compound que fl ion*. 
 A compound queftion is to be handled by arguing and reafo- 
 ning on both fides, whereof wee (hall treat hereafter. In the 
 mcane time we hauc to fpeake of a Proportion, without 
 the which no argument can bee made : for all 
 arguments dec confift of pro- 
 positions. 
 
 Here endeth the fecond Booke of Logicke. 
 
 K 2 
 
 THE 
 
6? 
 
 T HE ARTE OF 
 
 LOQICKE. 
 
 The third Sooke. 
 
 CHAP, t 
 Of a Zropofition* 
 
 ^Hdtisd Profoftion? 
 
 It is a perfect fpecch, whereby Come* 
 thing is manifeftly declared to bee true 
 or falfe. 
 
 Whereof is fitch Jfreech Jpeeiallj com- 
 pounded ? 
 
 Of Noune and Verbe, which Noiine 
 would bee oftheNominatiue cafe, and 
 the Verbe of thelndicatiue Moode, as 
 when I fay, Man is a fcnfible body ; for the Logicians doe feU 
 dome allow any fuch fpeeches as are eyther of the Optatiue, 
 Imperatiue, Interrcgatiue, er Vocatiue Moode, as, I would to 
 God I had a good Horfe: this fpeech is not accounted tobccfo 
 true or certaine,.as to fay, I haue a good Horfe. 
 Of hovunany parts doth a Proportion confift } 
 Of three, that is to (ay, the Subicc\Prcdicat, andCopulat, 
 What is the Copulas ? 
 
 It is the Verbe Sub flan tiue,callcd in Latine,Sw», f/,/a«,that 
 is^to be, which doth couple or ioyne the Predicat with bis Sub- 
 It 3 Jcc\ ; 
 
jo The third Boo^e 
 
 ie&,as when we fay,Man is a fcnfible body : here in this propo- 
 rtion, the word man is the fubic&, and the word fcnfible body is 
 thepredicat, and theVerbe w,is the copulat: which copulat is 
 not ahvayes incident to euery proportion, and fpecially when 
 the predicat is fome other Vcrbe,and not the Verbe fubftantiue; 
 zs y ?Uto difyutcthySocratej walketh; which is as much to fay, as 
 Plato isdifputingjiSWrvrrwis walking. 
 
 How many wayes is apropoftion divided ? 
 
 Three manner of way es, that is, according to fub(tance,qua- 
 lity.and quantity. According to fubftance thus:Ofpropofitions, 
 fome are faid to be categoricall,that is,fimplc, and fome hypo- 
 theticall, that is, compound, of which compound propositions 
 we mind not to fpeake, before we haue treated of all things be- 
 longing to a categoricall and fimple propofition,which is two- 
 fold, that is to fay, abfolute and modall. 
 
 What is an obfolute categoricall proportion ? 
 
 It is a fpeech which affirmeth or denyeth fomcthing abfo- 
 lutely, without any refpec"t; as when we fay,God is true, or, E- 
 uery man is a Iyer : and this is otherwifc called of the Logici- 
 ans, Tropofitio categorica deinefe. 
 
 How is afmplepropofition diuided according to qualttie f 
 
 Into an affirnaatiue and negatiue proportion. 
 
 When it it faid to be affirmatiue, and when negatiue ? 
 
 It is faid to bee affirmatiue , when the predicat is affirmed of 
 the fubie<5t; as when I fay, that John is learned : and that is nega- 
 tiue, when the predicat is denyed of the fubie<St; as, hhn is not 
 learned. And note, that in fuch kind of fpeech, the negatiue is 
 alwayes ioyned to the Verbe. 
 
 How many waies is a fimple proportion diuided according to quan- 
 tities 
 
 Fourc manner of wayes, that is to fay,into an vniuerfall,par» 
 ticular, indefinite, and lingular proposition. 
 
 When is it faid to be vniuerfaU ? 
 
 When fome vniuerfall figne is added to the fubiecr. 
 
 Which words are J aid to be vniutrfall figne s ? 
 
 Thcfe call, euery,whatfoeuer,\vhofoeuer,none,nobody,not 
 one,none at all,euery where,no where, and fuch like ; as Euery 
 man is a Lyer, No man is true. When 
 
ofLogic^e. ji 
 
 When is it faid to be a particular propojititn ? 
 
 When fomc particular figne is added to the fubiect. 
 
 Which call you particular (ignes ? 
 
 Thefe : fome, any, many, few, and fuch like; as, Some man 
 is wife, Few are wife. 
 
 When is it [aid to he indefinite ? 
 
 When the fubiedt is a common word,hauing neither vniuer- 
 fali nor particular figne added vntoit; as when we fay, Men in 
 thefe dayes be giuen to great follies. 
 
 When u ttfaid to he ftngular ? 
 
 When the fubiedt is fomc lndimdnum, as when wee fay, that 
 Cicero is eloquent. 
 
 What, and how many quefiions doe rife of thefe three diuifons > 
 
 Thefe three : that is, of what kind? of what qualitie? of what 
 quantitie Pin Latine thus, ^*<?f »<»/«? & quanta'* for if it bee 
 asked what kind of proportion it is, then you muftanfwere, 
 that it is eyther categoricall, or hypotheticall,that is, fimple or 
 compound : and if it be demanded of what qualitie it be, then 
 you muft anfwere, that it is either afRrmatiue, or negatiue : if it 
 bee asked of what quantitie, then you muftanfwere, that it is 
 eyther vniuerfall, particular,iadefinite,or lingular. 
 
 C H A P. I I. 
 
 Of the three properties belonging to a fimple proportion. 
 
 Hich are thofe ? 
 
 Thefe : Oppofition, Equiualencie, and Con- 
 uerfion. 
 
 Whatk Oppofition} 
 
 It is the repugnancie of two fimple propofiti- 
 ons, hauing one felfe fubiect, and one felfe prcdicat. 
 How many kjndi ofoppofitepropoftions be there ? 
 Foure :Contrarie, Subcontrarie, Contradic~torie,and Subal- 
 ternat. 
 
 Which are faid to be contrary ? 
 
 An vniuerfall aflfirmatiue,and an vniuerfall negatiue;as,Eue- 
 rymanisiuft. No man isiuft. 
 Which are f aid to be Subcantrarie? 
 
 A 
 
The third Boo^e 
 
 1% 
 
 A particular affirmatiue, and a particular negatiue ; as, Some 
 man is iuft, Some man is not iuft. 
 
 Which Art faid to be Contradi&me f 
 
 Either an vniuerfall affirmatiuc, and a particular negatiue, or 
 elfe an vniuerfall negatiue,and a particular affirmatiuejaSjEuery 
 man is iuft,and, Some man is not iuft : or, No man is iuft, Some 
 man is iuft. 
 
 Which arefaidto be Sub Alternate ? 
 
 Either an vniuerfall affirmatiue , and a particular affirmatiue, 
 or elfe an vniuerfall negatiue,and a particular negatiue:as,Euery 
 man is iuft^and,Somc man is iuft: No man is iuft,and,Somem*n 
 is not iuft. 
 
 AH which kind of oppofitcs you may the better remember, 
 byconfidering with what order they are placed in this Figure 
 following. 
 
ofLogicke. 73 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 Of the Lawes and conditions belonging tothefefoure kinds ofoppo- 
 fites before recited : and of the diners matter of a 
 Proportion. 
 
 £ Or the better vnderftandingof thelawes belon- 
 ging to the oppofites , it fhall be neceffaric to 
 fpeake fomvvhat of the matter of a-propofition, 
 whereupon the faid lawestloe partly depend. 
 Hor^manifold is that matter ? 
 Threefold, that is to fay,naturall,cafuall,and 
 remote orvnnaturall. 
 
 When is a propoft ion faid to confifl of matter naturaR? 
 When the predicat agreeth with his fubiect eflentially,or at 
 the leaf! neceffarily : as when the generall kind m fpoken of his 
 fpeciall kinde,and the fpeciall kinde of his Indiuiduums,or the 
 difference of his fpeciall kinde^or the propertie of his fubiect: 
 as, Euery man is a fenfible body, John is a man , Euerymanis 
 reafonable, Euery man is apt to fpeake. 
 
 When is a proportion faid to conjift of matter contingent ? 
 When the predicat agreeth with his fubie6t accidentally, fo 
 as it may either be, or not be ; as, John is learned. 
 When is a propoft ion faid to conftfi of matter remote or vnnatural? 
 When the predicat agreeth no manner of way with the fub- 
 iect ; as, A man is a horfe, A man is a ftone, &c. 
 What are the I awes of contrary proportions ? 
 Contrarie propofitions can be true no way both together; 
 asEuery man is a fenfible b od y , No man is a fenfible body : 
 but they may be both falfe, and fpeciallyconfifting of matter 
 contingent; as when I fay , Euery man is iuft, No man is iuft, 
 which are both falfe. 
 
 What are the'lawes of fubcontr arte proportions ? 
 SubcontrariepropofitionSjConfirtingofmatternaturaljCan- 
 notbec both falfe at orjee ; as , Some man is a fenfible body, 
 Some man is not a fenfible body : but confifting of matter 
 contingent; both may bee fometime true ; as, Some man is 
 iuft, Some man is not iuft. 
 
 What be the lavees of contradt&orie proportions ? 
 
 L Thofe 
 
74- < Ibetkird c Booke 
 
 Thofc can neither be true nor falfe both at once : for if one be 
 true , the other muft needs be falfe, whether the matter be natti- 
 rail, or contingent ; as, Euery man is iuft ; Some man «s not iuft: 
 No man is iuft; Some man is iuft. 
 
 What be theLawes of fuh alternate prepefitions} 
 
 If the vniuerfall be true, the particular muft needs be truejai, 
 Euery man is iuft , Ergo, Some man is iuft ; but not contrarily. 
 Againe , if the particular be falfe, the vniuerfall alfo muft need* 
 be falfe ; as, Some man is a ftone, Euery man is a ftone. 
 
 What good U ts be reapt&bj the knowledge oflhefe oppofites ? 
 
 It teacheth to know what fpeeches be repugnant one to ano- 
 ther, and thereby to difcernc truth from falfhood, 
 
 CHAP. 1 1 1 1. 
 
 Of the ccjtiiualencie efjimple proportions. 
 
 Hat is cquiualencie ? 
 
 It is the reconciling or agreeing of two pro- 
 positions, hauingoneielfcfubied, andonefelfe 
 predicate, in fuch fort , that though they bee di- 
 ucrs in words , yet they are made to bee all one 
 in fignification. 
 
 Hew is fuch reconciliation made} 
 
 By the helpe of fignes, cither vniuerfall orparticular,thatare 
 of like value, and cquaU one to another, and thereby make the 
 fpeeches equall. 
 Cjine example, 
 
 Asthus:Whoknowethnotthis tobctrue?Euerymanknow- 
 eth thisto bee true : There is none but that knovveth this to bee 
 true. All thefe arc of like value, and doc fignifie one fclfe thing, 
 Againe, Some men arc wife, Few men are wife, All men arc not 
 wife, Not many are wife, are alfo equiualent fpeeches. The 
 Schoolcmen doc giue diuers rules touching the equiualencie of 
 fpeeches; but fuch as, in mine opinion, are neither neccfTaric* 
 nor profitable, for that they caufc many times barbarous, vnufu.. 
 all,and intricate fpeeches. And therefore I rhinke good here to 
 patfe them oiler with filencc, wishing all men toiudgetheequi- 
 walencie of fpeeches,rather by the care,and by cuftome of fpca- 
 
OfLogicfa J? 
 
 king j and by vfual! manner of taking the fame in euery feuerall 
 tongue or language, then by any rules, which perhaps will ierae 
 in one tongue, but not in another. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of anutrfion of ftmple proportions, 
 
 ; Hot is Conner fisn ? 
 
 It is the changing or turning of the fubie& 
 ■and predicate, the one into the others place. 
 How manifold ts fnch Conner jion ? 
 It is threefold, that is,fimple,by accidenr,an4 
 by contraposition. 
 
 W.oat u Jimple Conner fion ? 
 
 It is that whereby tfce termes are onely changed the one into 
 the others place , the felfc fame quantitie and quahtie being ftill 
 referued. 
 
 What vroyofuions are conuertedby this manner ofcoruerfon ? 
 An vniuerfall negatiue, and particular affirmatiue. 
 Giue examples of both. 
 
 Of the ftrft thus: No venue is difcommendable, £>£<?, no did 
 commendable thing is vercue. Of the fecond thus : Some man is 
 aPhilofopher.and fome Phiiofophcr is a man. And by this way 
 fometime vniuerfall aftirmatiues may be alio conuertcd, as thofe 
 whofc termes are conuertible, as the fpeciall kind and his diflfe* 
 rence or propertic ; as,Euery man is reafonable,and euery reafo- 
 nable thing is man : o/ , Euery man is apt to fpeake , and euery 
 thing.that is apt to fpeake, is man. 
 What is conuerfion by accident ? 
 
 It is that whereby the termes arc changed, and alfo the quan- 
 titie of thepropofitions, but not the quahtie. 
 What proportions are concerted this way } 
 An vniuerfall affirmatiue into a particular affirmatiue, and an 
 vniuerfall negatiue into a particular negatiue. 
 Gwe examples.. 
 
 Euery Pat ience is FortituderiVgtf/ome Fortitude is Patience* 
 Againc : No Vertue is Vice: Ergo, feme Vice is not Vertue. 
 What it conuerfion by eantrapojition ? 
 
 It is that whereby neither quantitie nor qualiric is change^ 
 
 L 2 bun 
 
7<S The third "Boo{e 
 
 but only termes finite into termes infinite, that is to fay, termes 
 limited into termes vnlimited. 
 
 iVhich call you termes infinite ? 
 
 All Nounes hauing a negatiuefct before them, as, not man 
 notbeaft. 
 
 What propofitions are concerted this manner of way * 
 
 An vniuerlall affirmatiue into an vniuerfall affirmatiue , and a 
 particular negatiue into a particular negatiue. 
 
 due examples. 
 
 Of the firft thus : Euery man is a fenfible body , and eucry thing 
 that is not a fenfible body,it not man. Of the fecond thus : Some 
 vertueis notluftice: Erg*,fome thing that is not Iuftice, is not 
 vertue. Thefe fpeeches in Englifhhaue fome fauour ; but to be 
 fpoken in Latine, after the Schoole manner,arc very barbarous 
 or rather monftrous, as Valerius termeth them, as to hy,^uadam 
 non lfifittia nan efinon virtus. 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 Of a Modall Propofition. 
 
 Hat is a modall propofition ? 
 
 It is that which affirmeth or denyeth fome- 
 thing, notabfolutely, butinacertainerefpeft, . 
 fort, or mood, which mood is commonly the 
 predicat in this kinde ofpropofition, and all the 
 reft of thefubiect called of the Logicians, 1> tblnm. 
 What is a mood? # 
 
 Mood is a word determining and limiting the fignificatiou of 
 fomeother word whereuntoitisioyned, as a wife man, a white 
 horfe; for here this word wife being added to man, dothlimit 
 and reftraine the generall fignification of the word man , which 
 other wife ©fit felfecomprehendeth both wife and foolifli. And 
 the like is to be faid of any other generall word, whereunto any 
 fuch addition is put: but of moods making modall proportions, 
 there are but thefe foure, that is, Poilible, Contingent, Itnpoffi- 
 ble,andNeceffarie. 
 
 Hove manifold is a modall propofition > 
 Twofold, that is, Co»iun& and Difiunft. 
 When is it faid to bs Conittoft . ? 
 
 When 
 
ofLogic(e. 77 
 
 When the mood is placed cither in the beginning or ending 
 of a proposition ; as, It is impoflible that hbn is ftckc : orlhusj 
 That lohn is fkke it is poflible. 
 
 When is itfaid to be Difftntt ) 
 
 When the mood is placed fo, as it diuideth the one part of 
 the fubiedt from the other ; as, for lohn it is poflible to be ficke : 
 and the Dhlunft is faid many times to bee true, when the Con- 
 iun& is falfe, being both made of felfe termes : as for example, 
 the Logicians affirme this to be true, A white man it is poflible 
 to bee blacke : but this other , A white man to bee blacke it is 
 poflible, they affirme to be falfe. 
 
 What maketh them fo to doe, fttb by conftruttton tkefe two [fetches 
 infenfe doe feeme to be all one} 
 
 Becaufe the mood is the Difiun£fc,*vhich by parting and fenc- 
 ring the Subiett,maketh tlie Proportion to feeme fpoken in di- 
 uers refpeirs ; as man to be white in one refpedt, and blacke in 
 another, and fo the fpeech to be true. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 Of the proportion, pqt4htalencie y and ccnuerfton of 'moduli proportions '. 
 
 Ee told you before, that of modall proportions, 
 fome were called coniuȣt, and fcmedifiunc.1:: 
 and as for the modals di(iunc~t,they differ but lit- 
 tle from abfolute propositions before declared: 
 And therefore we hauehere chiefly to deale with 
 opposition, equiualencie, and conuerfion belonging to modall 
 coniun6t,the matter whereof being not altogether To neceflary 
 as fome men affirme, I minde to make no long fpeech thereof. 
 *But for the better vnderftanding of opposition, equiualencie^ 
 conuerfion thereof, it is needful firfl to declare the quantitie and 
 qualitie of a modall proposition : of both which things,though 
 Ariftotle maketh no mention,but only a little of qualitie;yet the 
 latter Writers doe necefTarily fuppofe modall propositions to be 
 indued with quantitie and qualitie : for they fay that the mood 
 neceff&rie is much like to a figne vniuerfall afrirmatiuejrhempod 
 impossible, to a figne vniuerfall negatiuc ; the moods pofsible and 
 w»f />/£«tf,which are both of one value,are -like to flgnes particu- 
 lar affirmatiue. Now as touching the qualitie, which is to be ei- 
 
 L 3 ther 
 
78 
 
 The third < Boofy 
 
 ther aflRrmatiue,ot: negatiue,like as the ncgatiue in abfolute pro. 
 portions is wont to be added to the verbe,euen (o in modalpro- 
 pofiiions it is added to the mood, as by the examples let downe 
 in the figure of opposition hereafter following , yee may eafily 
 percciue. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 Of the ofpoftiott of Modal'. 
 
 Ow man j wajts *re moduli propo ft ions faid to be of* 
 iofite t 
 
 They are faid to be oppofite foure manner of 
 wayes, euen as abfolute proportions are , that is 
 30 fay,contrarily,fubcontrarily,contradi»Stoiie, 
 and fubalternately , as you fee in this figure fol- 
 lowing,whcrin themood isofet before in the place of the fubiecl, 
 the better to (hew the quantitie & qualiuc of euery proportion. 
 
ofLogicke. 59 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Of the tquiuahKcie and cornier [ion of moduli propofitiont. 
 
 He Schoolemen doe affirme, that modall propo- 
 rtions arc eafily made cquiualent,by rcafon that 
 they may be Yttcrcd foure manner of wayes, that 
 is to fay, twe manner of wayes affirmatiuely, and 
 two manner of wayes negatiuely. The firtt way 
 affirmatiuely , is, when no negatiue is added ci- 
 ther to the fubicft, or to the mood ; as, for a man to be iuft, it is 
 poffiblc, contingent, impofsiblc, or neceffarie. Thefecondway 
 affirmatiuely, is, when the negatiue is addedto the Verbeofthc 
 fubieft, the mood remayning IVill affirmatiue; as^foramannoc 
 to be iuft, it is pofsible,contingcnt,&c.The firlt way negatiuely, 
 H^vhen the negatiue is only added to the mood; as, a man to be 
 iuft, i: is not pofsible,ccntingent,&c. The fecond way negatiue- 
 ly, is, when the negatiue is both added to the verbeofthe fub- 
 iec>, andalfotothcraood ; as, a man not to bee iuft, it is not 
 pofsiblc, contingenr,&c. which is all onctmd cquiualcnt to this 
 affirmatiuepropofuion,faying,th3tforaman tobeiuft,it is pof- 
 fible, contingent, &c. for two ncgatiues, as well intheLatinc 
 tongue^s in ours, doe alwayes make an affirmatiue. Againe, as 
 touching the conucrfion of modall propofitious , they fay , that, 
 the difiunft being like to an abfolute or fimple propofition,may 
 beconuertedboth (imply and pcraccidcni\ but the comunct.fufv 
 fereth no conuerfionrand though the Schoolemen doe fct down, 
 diners and manifold rules, and haue inuentedthefe foure words 
 of Art, that is, Pvrpvrf. a, Iliac e, Am abi m v s, E- 
 den T v l i attributing as well to the vowels, as totheconfo-.- 
 nants thereof, ccrraynefignifications, forthebettcrvnderftan- 
 ding and bearing inmemoricthecquiualcncics and conucrfions- 
 of the (aid modall proportions : yet becaufein mine.opinion: 
 they are more meet to breed prcpoftcrous, intricate and barba- 
 rous fpcechcSjthen to ferue to any other goodpurpofe-, Ithinke 
 it better to psffe them oner with filence ,. then to trouble your 
 memoric therewith : wherefore leauingthem as things fupcr- 
 fluous , I mindenow totieatofan hypothetical! or compound 
 propo(ttion,andofal the needfary accidents thereunto belbnj*. 
 ing, CHABl. 
 
80 The third "Boo^e " 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 Of a compound or hypothetical! proportion. 
 
 Hat u a compound proportion ? 
 
 It is that which confifteth of two or more Am- 
 ple proportions, coupled together with ibmt 
 coniunition. 
 
 How manifold is it} 
 
 Threefold, Conditional^ Copulatiue,and Difiun&iue. 
 
 When is it f aid to be conditional! } 
 
 When the coniunc-Vion 7/is fet before any fimple proportion, 
 as thus : If it be a man, it is a fenfible body. 
 
 When is it [aid to be copulatiue ? 
 
 When two fimple propositions are ioyned together with a 
 conitin'clion copulatiue ; as, God is true, and man is a lier. 
 
 When is it f aid to be diJiunSiue ? 
 
 When two fimple propositions are ioyned together with a 
 coniunclion difiun£tiu,e ; as thus, Either it is day, or night. 
 
 Of how many parts doth a compound proportion conjifi ? 
 
 Oftwo,thatis, of the antecedent, and of the confequent. 
 
 Which call you the antecedent ? 
 
 That which followeth next after the coniun&ion, as thus : If 
 it be iufHce,it is a vertue : here this fpeech,If it be iuftice,is the 
 antecedent,and the reft of the fpeech,that is to fay,It is a vertue, 
 is the confequent : and fo it fhould be , though the words were 
 contrarily placed, as thus : It is a vertue, ifitbeiultice. 
 
 What things are to be conjideredin hypot heticall yropofitions ? 
 
 Thefe: Firft, whether they haue any quantitie, or qualitie : 
 then, whether any opposition , equiualence, or conuerfion doe 
 belong to them, or not : thirdly. how to know the truth or falf- 
 hood ofeuery fuch proposition, be it conditionall,copulatiue,or 
 difiun6"tiue. And firft, as touching quantitie, they haue none at 
 all : for quantitie is to be meafured by fignes vniuerfall, or parti- 
 cular,which are only incident to the fubiedts of categorical pro- 
 pofitions : but qualitie they haue, in that they affirme or deny 
 fome thing, by reafon whereof there may bee contradiction in 
 
 typo- 
 
ofLfrgicfa Si 
 
 hypothcticall proportions , buc it cannot bee properly faid., 
 thai they be either contrarie , fubcontrarie , or lubahernar, for 
 that they are without quantitic ; for want whereof they nei- 
 ther doe aptly admit oppoiition, equiuatencc, or conuerlion , 
 but only contradiction. 
 
 How is that f.ntradiftion to be vnderftood f 
 Byrc3fotiof affirmatios, orncgation; which, asinfimple 
 proportions is to bee taken on the behalfe of the vcrbe copula- 
 tiue, and not of the fubiect or predicate : fo in compound 
 proportions, It is to bee taken on the behalfe of the coniun6ti- 
 on, hauing a negatiue (et before it ,and yet not of euery con- 
 junction, but onely of that coniuncfaon conditional, If: 
 whereof I cannot aptly gine you any example in our natiue 
 tongue, becaufe ic is contrarie to our naturall and vfuall fpcech, 
 to put a negatiue before the coniuncYion, If; and therefore I 
 leauetofpeake thereof any further : and to fay the truth, it rna. 
 keth but a ftrange kinde of fpeech in the Latine tongue , and I 
 belceueis feldome vfed in any difputation : as to fay thus, 
 7fy* f Animal eft , homo eft : or, Nen fi lax eft } dies eft : both 
 which are faid to be negatiue fpeeches, according to the rule 
 before giuen, becaufe the negatiue is fee before the coniundti- 
 on,£, and by virtue thereof (as thcSchoolemen fay) makcth 
 the whole proportion to be negatiue. 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 
 Of the truth and falfhoodof Hypothetical propofitions , and fir ft , 
 of the Conditional/. 
 
 Hat is to be conftdered, to k*?oxv the truth orfalfjocd 
 of Condition all Proportions ? 
 
 Fidt, whether they be affirmatiue or nega- 
 tiue: for in the aflfirmatiues it fufticeth , that 
 the one part doth neceflarily follow of the o- 
 ther, as thus: If it be a man, it is a fenfiblc body: and it ma- 
 kcth no matter, though the parts feuerally taken, be both falfe, 
 foas theConfcquent be good: as, If a tree be a man, a tree is 
 tfenfiblebodic: for though both thefe parts be falfe, yet the 
 
 M Confcquent 
 
Si The third Booty 
 
 Confcquent conditionally is true : for a conditionall Proporti- 
 on hath no regard to the truth of the parts , but onely that the 
 Confe 
 Hove 
 
 quent may neccfTarily follow of the Antecedent. 
 jwW *r /£* truth of the negative Preoption to be knevene ? 
 By the Gon#qucnt : for if the Confequent bee not rightly 
 inferred ofthe antecedent, then thenegatiueis true, as thus: it 
 followethnot that bccauftaLycn is a fenfiblc body , that 
 therefore a Lyon is a man. 
 
 Of the truth an dfalfhood of Proportions copulative. 
 
 WHen is a copulative Propoftionfaidtohe true or falfe t 
 It is faid to bee true, when both the parts bee true, 
 as when I fay, God is true , and man is a lyar : againe it is laid 
 to be falfe, when either one part or both.parts be falfe : as when 
 Ifay,ManisafenfibIebodie,aedGod is not a Spirit. Here be- 
 caufe the firft part is true, and the fecond part falfe , the whole 
 Proportion is faid to bee falfe. It is faid alfo to bee falfe, when 
 both parts are falfe, a6 thus j Man is true, and God is a lyar. 
 Heereboth parts be falfe. 
 
 What kiude of Prof oft ions Are wont to bee referred to this copula- 
 
 tine ? 
 
 ■ Thofe which they call Tcmporall, Locall, by hmilitude 
 and caufall : as of time thus, When a penitent firmer pray- 
 eth, then God hcareth him. Of place thus, Where, two or 
 three are gathered together in the Name of the Lord, hee is in 
 themidftof them. By limilitude thus , As am3n dealethwith 
 his neighbour , fo will God deale with him. Of the caufe thus, 
 Bccaufe the Sunne fhineth, it is day. And therefore certaine 
 Aduerbes as thefe, When , Where, Vncili , folong as,as,fo as, 
 for therefore, bccaufe and iuch like, hauc the iignification 
 jfomctime of the Conjunction (And) and fomctime ofthe Con- 
 iuncVion ( If)* 
 
 Of the truth andfaljhoodofdifiuuQiuei. 
 
 Rat belongeth properly to difmBiue Propofitions t 
 
 To cpnfift of repugnant parts, according to the 
 
 figni* 
 
of Logicfy. 83 
 
 fiotiificitioti of Conjunctions difiun&iuc, fuch as thefe bee, vet 
 oreither,orcIfc,andfuchlike: as either it Is day, or it is night, 
 whereof the one deftroyeth the other : for if the one bee, the o- 
 ther cannot bee: and therefore they cannot bee both true : but 
 they may be both falfe, if there be any meaneTOtwixt the two 
 cotraries:as when we fay , This woman is either white or blackc, 
 both thefe arc falfe, if fhe be brownCj which is ameane colour 
 betwixt white and blacke. But the later Writers aflfirme the 
 difiun&iue to bee true, if any one or both of the parts bee 
 true,as thus, Either a man is a fcnfiblc bodie, or clfe a 
 tree is a Subftance : and to bee falfe when both 
 parts bee falfe, as Either a man is true, 
 or God is a Lyar. 
 
 The end *f the third Booke t/Ugicke. 
 
 * M ^ THE 
 
Si 
 
 THE ARTE OF 
 
 LOG1CKE. 
 
 The fourth (Booh, 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 Of Places. 
 
 cy€ v <g7 ^? Hough immediately after the Treat ife cf a 
 ^JEj^j^ Proportion , the oldmen are went to dealc 
 vrtth the order of rc*[oning , called Argu* 
 mentation t andr»n h the formes thereof: yet 
 firh by order of Nature it u tneete to finde 
 out matter , before veee got abnut to fcrme t 
 frtfZirfoT order thefame y and that the mat- 
 ter of proumg any guefttonu to be fetched 
 from eert <yne common Places, 1 thought tt befi to treatefrjl ofthofe 
 Places, and then to jhiwthe order of re*fontng. 
 What is a Place? 
 
 A Place is a marke or token, fhcwing from whence any 
 Argument', apt to gjoue the Qucftion propounded ,i» to bec 
 taken. 
 
 What difference u betwixt Argument and Argumentation ? 
 Argument is the bare preofe or mcanc terme which is in- 
 uented by him ihatdifputeth, to ^roue the truth of the Quefti- 
 on : but Argumentation is the whole reafoning it fclfe, of what 
 
 M 3 (orme 
 
$6 ykcfourth € Bock$ 
 
 forme fo eucr it be, comprehending both the Qiieftior^and al- 
 (o the proofe thereof: whereof wee fliall fpeake hereafter in his 
 proper place, and giue you examples of both. 
 
 How manifold if Place? 
 
 Two-fold , the one of perfons , the other of things: the or- 
 der and diltribution of both which, you may plainly fee in the 
 Table following. 
 
 To what end ferneth this manifold diuifion ? 
 
 That the difputers may the more perfectly know the pow- 
 er and proper nature of euery Argument, according to the 
 great or little force of the Place, from whence fuch Arguments 
 are fetched. 
 
 Hov is Place diutded according tp the Schoolemen ? 
 
 Into two kindes, the one called Maxim, and the other diffe- 
 rence of Maxim. 
 
 What is Maxim ? 
 
 It is a generall rule approued and receiued of all Logicians, 
 in fuch fort as no man will deny the fame, as of contrarie 
 things there muft needs bee contrarie confequents. Againe, 
 Whatfocuer agreeth with the thing defined , agreethalfo with 
 the Definition of the fame: ?nd fuch like. 
 
 what is the difference of Maxims ? 
 
 It is the proper name of euery Place whereby one Maxim is 
 knownc front another,and to what place euery Maxim belong- 
 cth , as from the contrary, from the Definition, from the thing 
 defined : for by thefe names and, r , S like , wee know to what 
 Place euery Maxim belongeth. 
 
 To what end feruet* this dmsjitn * 
 
 The Maxims ferue as fhoote-ankers , and as places of refuge, 
 when the aduerfarie {hall deny our Conclusion : againe, the 
 differences being few in number, doe caufe the multitude of 
 Maxims to be the more eafily kept in racruorie. 
 
 The 
 
of Logic ke. 
 The Tabic of Places. 
 
 87 
 
 
 O 
 
 '"IS 
 
 Places be 
 
 either 
 
 "NamtjftockfjbirthnatbrTexjor kinde,jge,edueaiion, 
 Jiabit oi the body 3 3fTections of the mind.ftarcjcsllino.or 
 /condition of lifc,die:,ftudy,or exercifc,a<fts donc.dcath, 
 
 ^wonders chanfing bei ore death , or after death , momi- f The Definitioiijand the things defined, 
 'incnts left of dungs done, or written, and kinde of Fune- j T he Dt fcrip:ion,& the th ing defer ibed , 
 .rah fhewing how well or cuill the perfon was beloucd. The Intcrprecauo.n , and the thing in- 
 terpreted, 
 fliward f~Of the fubftancc itfelfe, whicb> The Matter, and the thing mad?. 
 bctbele, . The Forme, and the tring formed. 
 
 • Trrcaeneral! k:nd,&his fpeciall kind, 
 
 I The Difference, and his propcrtie. 
 The whole , 2nd his pai ts Integral!, 
 (^.Princip 11 > ai:d no: principal], 
 
 /"Generation, and the thingingendred. 
 
 I Corrupt ion j and the thing coirup ced. 
 fft j Abufe. 
 . Subieftj. 
 < Adiacents, and adtioas, 
 
 IAppofition. 
 Common Accidents. 
 5 Signes and circumftances , as time, 
 VI place, and mcane* 8cc. 
 
 U3'C 
 
 ftance, astheic 
 
 Outward 
 Places be 
 thefc 
 
 ' mm /. ~»- • .,•«•* _Rc'atiues. 
 
 The Caufe Er5cienr,and his eftcc*. C Contraries. 
 The End, and the thing enacd.< p f j uanuc$# ' 
 The fourc Oppofltw 5 as £ Contradidories. 
 
 Things diuers in kinde, called in Latinc, Difptrtt*. 
 
 Comparifon, as more orkiTe. f From the Comparatiue to the Super* 
 Like or Vnhkc. I latiuc. 
 
 Example and comparifon. I From the Pofitiue to the Comparatiue. 
 
 Alfo to Companion may be added< From two Pofitiueito two Compart 
 
 thefc places. j tiucs. 
 
 Proportion. \ Ftom two Pofin'ueJ to two Supcrla* 
 
 Changed preportion. L tiues , and contrariwife. 
 
 Difproportion. 
 Changed Difproportion. 
 (JTranflation or Figtuatiue fpcech. 
 
 Orraeane C Coniugates. 
 Plaees be< Cafes.. 
 i^thefe'3. ■*£ DJuiflon. 
 
 ForeiuJgemencs. 
 Rumors. 
 Torments, 
 Writings. 
 ' Oath. 
 
 WltnefTei, 
 
 A'l which £x places arc comprehended wider the place 
 of Authoritie, as you may fee in the Table of Authorise 
 hereaf:er following in which Table are fet downe the 
 faid inartificial! place* , together with the definitions 
 and vfes thereof. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
88 The four thTSoofy 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 Of the Places of Perfons. 
 
 I tie examples of all the Placet offerfons. 
 
 Though the Place* of persons may bee very 
 i well applyed to rhe place of common Accidents 
 hereafter following , becau'e they eythcr goe 
 before, accompanie, or follow the fubitdi 
 whereunro they doe belong : yet becauf'e there 
 is a difference betwixt perions and things , and that the Places 
 before mentioned in the Table of perfon* , doe more properly 
 belong to Perfcns, then to things, I thouoht it belttogiue 
 you examples of cuery Place belonging to the perfon, before I 
 come to treate of .the Places of things , and hrlt of the name, 
 then of the ftocke and family, and io forth. 
 Of the name. 
 
 Of this Place you may reafoneythcr in praifeor difpraife 
 more probably then truely , as to fay thus : his name is Cjbed- 
 man : Ergo, he ought to bee a good man, for that name lmpor- 
 tcth good, I did once fee an euill woman executed at Ty- 
 borne, whofename was Sweepeflak,?, wfiich name was anfwer- 
 ableto her propertie , which was tofweepeall her louers pur- 
 fes (o cleane as fhee could. Ctccra d\d not Jet to fcorfein like 
 manner with ZJerres the Roman extortioner , againft whom he 
 made fomany inueyghing Orations , faying many times , that 
 he had not his name for nought : for Verres was as much to fay 
 as a i weeping thicfe,dcriucd of the vei be verro t which in Eng- 
 lifh is to fwcepe. 
 
 Oftheftotke or birth. 
 
 Of this Place you may reafon th us : Hee had ftrong parents : 
 Ergo,hc is ftrong. He came of an euiil race : Ergo, it is no mar- 
 ucll though he be euill difpofed. 
 Oj the nation. 
 
 He is of the Hand of Crete ox Candte : Ergohcc is a lyar. Hee 
 is aFIcmming : Ergo,* drunkard. He is an Englifhman : Ergop 
 glutton. He is an Italian : Erqo ,a dilfembler. 
 * *' Of 
 
of Logic f\e. 8p 
 
 Of the fix *r kind. 
 
 It is the proroife of a woman , Ergo not to bcc performed ot 
 trufted. 
 
 Of the age. 
 
 He is but an Infant, Ergo not malicious. He is yong of age, 
 and therefore to be pardoned. , 
 
 Of education, • 
 
 He was euill brought vp, and therefore can not be good. 
 
 Of the habit of the body. 
 
 He is bigge let, Ergohe is ftrong. He is redheaded , Ergo e- 
 uill conditioned. 
 
 Of the affefttous efthe minde. 
 
 He is giuen to exceffc and ryot, Ergo he is not temperate or 
 model) : to this place may be referred all manner of vertues and 
 vices. 
 
 Of the Jf ate, calling, or condition of life. 
 
 He is a bondman : Erg* he can neither fue nor be fued. 
 
 Ofdyet. 
 
 He loueth to fare delicately, and to lie foft : Ergo hee is laf- 
 ciuious. 
 
 Offtttdie or cxercifi. 
 
 He is very ftudious and applycth his Booke : Srgo no volup- 
 tuous man. 
 
 Of things done. 
 
 Pompejr hath had many profperous and noble Victories: Ergo 
 he is moft meet to be fent as Genet all of the warrc againft My- 
 thridates. 
 
 Of death. 
 
 The death ofSetpio was much lamented of the Romans,Z:rjr o 
 hee was dcarely beloued of the Romans. Such a one fuffered 
 death molt conflantly for Chrifts fake, Ergo hee was a good 
 Chriftian. 
 
 Of things chancing after death. 
 
 Honourable Monuments were fct vp by the people of Rome 
 in th&honor oiluhus Cafar after his death, Ergo he was hono- 
 red and beloued of all the people of Rome in his life time.Therc 
 were great earthquakes, and dead bodies did arife immediately 
 
 N after 
 
90 The fourth < Boo{e 
 
 after the death of Chrift, Ergo hce was the Sonne of God , and 
 was vniuftly condemned. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Of the 'Places of things, and fi.fi of artificial! Places. 
 .&®&*&mm Hat be artificial 'Places > 
 
 *) Artinciall Places are thofc wherein arc con- 
 'tayncd Inch Arguments as of their ownc force 
 and nature are able to prouc or difproue : which 
 are diuided (as I faid before ) into inward , out- 
 ward and meane Places. 
 VVhat are inward Places ? 
 Inward Places are thofe which yeeld Arguments either ap- 
 pertaining to the nature and fubitance of the matter in quefti- 
 on, orelfe to fuch things as doc accompany the fubftance and 
 nature of the thing. 
 
 Which bee the Places of SttbftancH 
 
 Thefe , Definition and the thing defined , together with the 
 reft rehearfed before in the Table. 
 
 Of 'Definition and the thing defined, 
 
 WHat is Definition ? 
 It is that which briefly, plainely and properly decla- 
 reth the nature of any thing , by fhewing the fubftantiall parts 
 thereof. 
 
 How may a man reafonfrom this place ? 
 
 Both affirmatiucly and negatiuely , afwell from the Subie£ 
 as the Predicate of the QuelVion. Affirmatiucly thus, Euery 
 rcafonable bodieisaptto learne Letters, Ergo man is apt to 
 learne Letters. Negatiuely thus, No vnreafonable bodie is 
 apt to learne Letters , Ergo no brute bealt is apt to learne Let- 
 ters. 
 
 What be the Maxims or gener all r tiles of this Place ? 
 
 The Maxims be thefe, Whatfoeuer agveeth with the defini- 
 tion, agreeth with the thing defined : and contrariwife what- 
 foeuer 
 
of Logic^e. pi 
 
 focuer agreeth not with the definition , agreeth not withthe 
 thing defined. 
 
 yyhat is the thing defined* 
 
 That, whofe nature and propertie is declared in the defini- 
 tion. 
 
 How may a man reafon from this place ? 
 
 Both affirmatiuely and negatiuely : arfirmatiuely, as Peter is 
 a man :<5Vg0 he is a reasonable body. Negatiuely, as an Ape is 
 no man: Srgoan Apeisnoreafonablebody. 
 
 What be the CMaxims of this 'Place ? 
 
 Whatfoeuer agreeth with the thing defined , agreeth alio 
 with the definition thereof: and whatfoeuer agreeth not with 
 the thing defined,agreeth not with the definition of the fame. 
 
 Of Defcription t and the thing defcribed. 
 
 WHatisDefcription} 
 It is a fpeech declaring what a thing is, by Chewing 
 the properties and accidents whereby it differeth from other 
 things. 
 
 How m*y a mtn reafon from this place } 
 
 Both amrmatiuely and negatiuely : affirmatiucly thus,Euety 
 laudalle habit adorneth his poffeflor : Erg" veitue adometh 
 his poiTcflor .-negatiuely thus, nolandjble habit fhameth his 
 owner or pofleffor : Ergo no vertue fhameth his owner or pof- 
 fiflbr. 
 
 What is the thing defcribed ? 
 
 It is that, whole properties ey ther naturall or accidentall are 
 declared in the defcription. 
 
 Hcvt are arguments to be fetched frem this Place ?. 
 
 Both 3ffirroatiuely and negatiuely : affirmatiuely thus, This 
 
 beaft ii foure-footedjiauing longeares and whole feet : ergo it 
 
 isanAiTe: negatiuely thus ; This foure-footed beatf hath no 
 
 long eares, nor whole feet : Ergo it is no Afle. 
 
 VVhtn are arguments to be confuted^ emg fetched from theft places ? 
 
 When the definition or defcription is not true or proper to 
 the thing defined or defcribed. 
 
 N 2 Of 
 
pz The fourth ISookf 
 
 Of Interpretation and the thing interpreted. 
 
 WHat u Interpret ation} 
 It is the declaring of a name lefTe knowne by ano- 
 ther that is more tnownc , as thus , Jefus is as much to fay as a 
 Sauiour, a Philofopher is a louer of Wifdome. 
 
 what is the thing interpreted ? 
 
 That which is declared by the Interpretation, as this word 
 Iefus to be a Sauiour, or this word Philofopher to be a louer of 
 wifdome. 
 
 How may a man reafonfrom this place ? 
 
 Both afifirmatiuely and negatiucly, if the termes be conuer- 
 tible. Affirmatiuely thus: Heeis a louer of Wifdome : Ergo a 
 Philofopher. Negatiuely thus : He is no louer of Wifdome:£r- 
 go no Philofopher. 
 
 What be the maximes of thefe two places ? 
 
 The Maxims of thefe Places are like: for whatfocuer agreeth 
 with the one, agreeth with the other, and contrariwife. 
 
 Of the Place of ^Matter, and of the thing made. 
 
 WFTat is CMatter ? 
 That whereof any thing is made, as Siluer is the mat- 
 ter of a Siluer Cup,and the Cup is the thing made, called of the 
 Logicians materiatum. 
 
 How is Matter divided ? 
 
 Into Matter permanent, and Matter tranfient. 
 
 V03at is Matter permanent ? 
 
 It is that which remaineth in the thing made, rctayningftill 
 both nature and name , as ftone and timber is the matter of an 
 Houfe. 
 
 What is Matter tranftent ? 
 
 It is that which being changed,doth not returne againe into 
 his firft nature : as flower and water being made bread, will nc- 
 ucr be flower and water againe. 
 
 How are arguments to be fetched from Matter permanent ? , 
 
 Both affirmatiuely and negatiuely: affirmatiuely thus , Here 
 is timber,limc and RoncErgo here may be an Houfe: negatiue- 
 ly 
 
<f Logic{e. % 
 
 ly thus, Here is neither timber, lime nor ftone : Ergo t here is no 
 ho ufe. 
 
 How are arguments to be fetched from Matter tranfient ? 
 Affirmatiuely , but not negatiuely , as , here is Water arid 
 Meale : isr£«,herc may be bread : but you cannot fay,here is no 
 meale : Ergo , here is no bread : for the matter permanent being 
 taken away , the efTe& thereof is alfo taken away : but this 
 Maxime taketh no place in Matter tranfient , vnleffe the Argu- 
 ment be made by the preterpcrfe& Tenfe or time paft , as thus : 
 Here was no Meale : £r£#,hereis no bread. 
 
 What he the Maxims of this Place ? 
 
 The matter being fet downe , the effect alfo may be accor- 
 ding to the difference of the matter. 
 
 How may we reafon from the thing made to the Matter ? 
 
 In matter permanent you may reafon from the prefent Tenfe 
 to the prefent Tenfe, thus : Here are Iron weapons : Ergo fax*, is 
 Iron. But in matter tranfient wee mult reafon from the prefent 
 time to the time paft, thus ; here is bread : Ergo^xc hath beene 
 meale. 
 
 What be the Maxims of this place r* 
 
 The thing made of matter permanent being fet downe , the 
 matter alfo muft needs be : and the thing made of matter tranfi- 
 ent being fet downe, the matter thereof muft needs haue beene. 
 
 Hove may you elfe reafon from thefe two places? 
 
 By adding thefe two adieitiues (good or euill) as thus : The 
 houfc is good : Ergo , the timber and ftone was good : for the 
 goodneffe or defect of the matter permanent, fheweth the pre- 
 fent goodncfle or defect of the thing made : and any good or 
 euill thing made of Matter tranfient, proueth the Matter to 
 haue beene good or euill. 
 
 Of the Places of Forme and fh ape, 
 
 W' 
 
 'Hat is Forme ? 
 
 Forme is that which giueth fhape and being to the 
 thing formed , whereof alfo the thing taketh his name , as the 
 foule of man is the forme, and man is the thing formed. 
 
 N 3 How 
 
94- The fourth 'Boolg 
 
 How is Forme dim aed ? 
 
 •-Mortall, as the foule 
 ^- Forme fubftantiail , which is^ ofa bruit beaft. 
 ^ the firft being or {hape of a-.^ 
 Into «^ ny thing, and that is either JOi irnmortall, as the 
 J V* foule of man. 
 
 v.And into Forme accidentall t which isameereacci- 
 dent, called of the Logicians *Abftratiurru , as whiteneffe or 
 blackneffc. 
 
 How are Arguments to be fetched from the Forme and the thing 
 formed ? 
 
 Two wayes, affirmatiuely from the fubftamiail forme, thus : 
 Here is the foule of a beaft : Ergo , here is a bead : from the acci- 
 dentall forme thus : Here is whiteneffe : Srgo , here is fome 
 white thing : from the fubftaiitiall thing formcd,thus :The beaft 
 is here : Ergo, his foule is here : of the accidental! thing formed, 
 thus : Here is fome white thing : Ergo , here is whiteneffe : Ne- 
 gatiuely from the fubftantiail forme,thus : Here is no foule of a 
 bez(\: Ergo f here is no beaft: of the accidental! forme , thus: 
 Here is no whiteneffe : Ergo, here is no white thing : of the fub- 
 fUntiall thingformed, thus : The beaft is not here : Ergo, his 
 foule is not here : of the accidentall thing formed; thus : Here is 
 no white thing : Erg o t here is no whiteneffe. 
 
 Rehearfe the Maxims whereupon thefe arguments are grounded* 
 The Maxims be thefe , where Forme is either prefent or wan- 
 tingjthe thing formed alfo muft needs be either prefent or wan- 
 ting, and contrariwife. Yet this Maxim fayleth in the forme of 
 man, for the foule intellecliue may be, and yet no man, vnleffe 
 you reafon from theinbeingof the Forme in the Subietfc, as, In 
 the body is a reafonable foule : Srgo , it is a man : for euery Sub- 
 ject hath his name and being in his fhape or forme, as hath been 
 faid before. 
 
 Of the genera// kind. 
 
 \j\7Hat is genera// \ind } 
 
 ' It is that which comprehendeth many things diffe- 
 
 ring 
 
ofLogic{c. p? 
 
 ring in fpeciall kinde, as hath beene faid before. 
 
 How are ^Arguments to bee fetched from the generall kind to 
 the fpeci*llk±nd> 
 
 Both affirmatiuely and negatiuelys affirmatiuely thus,Euery 
 vertue is to be defired : Ergo IufHce is to be defired, Negatiucly 
 thus , No vice is to be pray fed : Ergo drunkenneffe is not to be 
 pray fed. 
 
 ^ehearfe the UMaxims belonging to the gener all kind / 
 To what kinde foeuer agreeth the generall kinde being vni- 
 uerfally taken (that is to fay) pronounced with fome vniuerfall 
 figne, as All, Euery or None, to the fame the fpeciall kind doth 
 alfo agree rand whatfoeucr agreeth not with the generall kind 
 vninerfally taken, agreeth not with the fpeciall kind : for if no 
 vniuerfall figne be added to the generall kind, you cannot rea- 
 fon affirmatiuely^but onely negatiuely,thus:It is no fenfiblebo- 
 " dy : Ergo it is no man : bur you cannot rcafon fo affirm atiucly, 
 as co fay thus , It is a fenfible body : Ergo it is a man : becaufe 
 the vniuerfall figne All, or Euery, is warning. 
 
 How many V laces doth this P lace of generall kjnd comprehend? 
 Foure, (that is to fay) All or euery in quanticie , All or euery 
 in refpefr, All or euery in place, All or euery in time. 
 What is All or euery in quant it ie f 
 
 It is when an vniuerfall figne is added to the generall kinde, 
 as euery plant liucth, therefore euery tree liueth. » 
 
 When is it all or euery in refpetl ? 
 
 When any generall kind is vnderftood in fome rcfpe& , and 
 that the generall fignification thereof is refhayned by fome 
 word added vntoit, or by fome fecret meaning limiting the 
 fame,as a white beaftja good man : for this word white reftray- 
 neththe generall fignification of beaftjand this word good,thc 
 generall fignification of man. 
 due examples of this place, 
 
 God gauc his holy Spirit to all faithfull men : Ergo to his A- 
 poftles. 
 
 What is all or euery inplrce ? 
 
 It is when the generall kinde is an Aduerbe of place , fig. 
 nifying euery where cr no where , as luftice is np where 
 
 tuily 
 
p6 The fourth TZookf 
 
 trucly executed : Ergo , neither in Franc* nor in England. 
 
 What is all or entry in time ? 
 
 It is when the generall kind is an Aducrbe of time , fignify- 
 ing euer or ncuer, as God is alwayes with ys : Ergo t now at this 
 prefent. 
 
 What maxims So* belong to thefe places } 
 
 The fame that doe belong to the generall kind vniuerfally ta- 
 ken before mentioned, by vertue whereof you may reafon both 
 affirmatiuely and negatiuely, as I faid before. 
 
 Of the fpeciall kind, 
 
 HOw are arguments to be fet shed from th* fptciall kind* to the 
 generall kind ? 
 Affirmatiuely, but negatiuely thus; It is a man '.Ergo, it is a 
 fenfible body. But now you cannot fay, it is no man : Ergo, it is 
 no fenfible body : for it may be a horfe , or foroe other fenfible 
 thing. 
 
 What be the maxims belonging to the fpeciall kind > 
 Where the fpeciall kind is , there the generall kind muft alfo 
 needs be : againe , all the fpeciall kinds being taken away , the 
 generall kind is alfo taken away. 
 
 Of the place of Difference. 
 
 THts place is comprehended vnder the place of definition, for dif- 
 ference is a good part of th* definition , and yet for order fake I 
 haue thought good to place it next to th* generall kind and fftciall 
 kind before taught. 
 
 How may a man reafon from this place ? 
 Both affirmatiuely and negatiuely, as an Oyfter hath feeling : 
 Ergo , it is a fenfible body, a horfe hath no reafon : Ergo, hee is 
 no man. 
 
 Vyhat be the maxims in this place ? 
 
 Whatfoeucr agreeth with the fpeciall difference , agreeth 
 with the thing that hath that difference , and whatfoeuer difa- 
 greeth with the fpeciall difference, difagreeth with the thing 
 that hath that difference, for they be conuertible. 
 
of Logic^e. 9 y 
 
 Of the place of Troptnie, 
 
 HO *> may a man r ea fort from t his place ? 
 This place is contained vnder the place of Defcriptiou 
 before fliewed. And from hence you may reafon both affirma- 
 tiuely and negatiucly, as thus; He is apt to fyeake : Ergo hce is a 
 man; He is not apt tofpeake : Ergo he is no man. 
 
 What be the maxims of t displace ? 
 
 Whatfoeuer3grceth with the propertie, agrecth alfo vvith 
 the thing that hath that propertie. And whatfocuer difagreeth 
 with the property., d figreeth alfo with the thing whereto 
 fuch propertie bdongeth, for they be conuertible.. 
 
 Of the fUct of whole Integral!, 
 
 WHat is the whole Integra?!? 
 That which conlifteth of parts hauing quamitie. 
 
 Hew m*y we retfon from the whole to e fiery particular part ? 
 
 Afli. matiue!y,buc not nrgatiuely , thus ; It is a houfc : Ergo 
 it hath foundation, wall* and roofe : but you cannot reafon io 
 negatiuely from the whole to curry particular part, as to fay 
 thus ; Heie is an Houfe : Ergo here is no foundation or walls. 
 
 What he the maxims of this place ? 
 
 If the whole be,euery principall part muft needes bee : but if 
 the whole be wanting, fome principall part muft needs be wan- 
 ting, though not all : for the houfe might bee wanting, and yet 
 the wals and foundation may (till rcmainc. 
 
 Of the place of IntegraU farts,. 
 
 W Hat is an Inte grail fart t and how is it dtuided ? 
 It is that which cer,aine other parts make vp the 
 whole, and fuch Integral! part is cither principall, or not prin- 
 cipally 
 
 Define theft two parts. 
 
 The principall is that without the which the whole cannot 
 be 3 a. the head or belly of a liuing body , or as the foundation, 
 
 O walls, 
 
p8 7 'he fourth < Boo{e 
 
 W3lls,orcoucringof an houfc. The part not principall is that 
 without the which the whole may frand , as a houfe without 
 doores or windowes : or the body may Hue without hands or 
 feet. 
 
 Hoiv m*y we reafonfrom the princtf a/1 part to the whole ? 
 
 Negatiuely thus; Heerc is no foundation or walls : J?r^,here 
 is no houfe: but you cannot reafon fo of the part not principal), 
 butoncly inhauingrefpe&tothe perfection of the whole, as. 
 thus ; Heere is neither doores nor windowes : Ergo t the houfc 
 is not perfect. 
 
 ffhat be the maxims of this place ? 
 
 If any principallpart be wanting, the whole cannot bee. If 
 any part not pnncipall be wanting, the whole is vnperfect. 
 
 Of the places of things accompanying Sttbftance. 
 
 WBat is the place of things accompanying Sub fiance. 
 It is that which con.prehendeth fuch arguments as 
 are not fetched from the fubif ance of the thing it fdfe,but from 
 that which accompanieth the fubftance thereof. 
 Which be thofe places ? 
 
 Thefe: Generation, the thing ingendred : Corruption, the 
 thing corrupted : Vfe,Subicc"t, Adiaccnts,A£rions,Oppofition, 
 common Accidents,and Citcumftances and fuch like. 
 
 Of the place of Generation , and of the thing engendred, 
 
 WHat is (generation ? 
 It is the firft being or fpringing of any thing. 
 
 tioi» are Arguments to bee fetched from Generation to the thing 
 engendred } 
 
 Aflfirmatiuely thus : It was good that Chrift was bornc:£Vg*, 
 Cbrift was good; It was euill for Rome that Cattlwe was borne: 
 E 'go, CatiltM* was euill to Rome, 
 
 What be the maxims of thts place ? 
 
 Tnofe things whofe generation is gcod,muft needs be good, 
 and thofe things whofe generation is euill, muft needs be euill. 
 
o/Logic{e. p? 
 
 How may we reafon from the thing engendred to the Generation ? 
 
 Aflfimatiuely thus: Catiline was cuill to Rome: Ergo 9 the 
 biith of Cati/ine was cuill to Rome. 
 
 What be the maxims of this place ? 
 
 If the thing engendred be either good or euill 4 the generation 
 thereof muft needs bealfo either good or cuill. 
 
 Of Corruption >and the thing Corrupted. 
 
 \7\7^ at ^ Cor r up Hon ? 
 
 V V Corruption is contrary to Generation, -and is the 
 deftru£tion of the thing engendred, and the thing deftroyed is 
 raid to be corrupted. 
 
 How mxy we reafon from Corruption , to the thing Corrupted} 
 Thus : To execute Theeues and Murtherers , is profitable to 
 the Common-wealth : Ergo, Theeues and Murtherers are hurt- 
 full to the Common-wealth. The death of Virgil was a great 
 lofle to learning: £rgo,Vir. was a great furtherance to learning. 
 How may we reafon from the thing Corrupted, to the Corruption} 
 Afvumatiuely thus: Virgil was a great furtherance to lear- 
 ning : Ergo, the death of Virgil was a great lofle to learning. 
 What be the maxims of thefe two places ? 
 Thofe things whereof the end and deftru&ton is laudable, 
 mufl needs of themfclues be pernicious and hurtfull. And con- 
 trari wife, thofe things whofe end and deftruftion is hurtfull, 
 muft needs of thcmfelues bee good and profitable. Againc , of 
 good things, the lofle is euill, and of euill things , the lofle is 
 good : but in rcafoning from thefe places , you muft take heed 
 that as well the Corruption, as the thing corrupted , bee abfo- 
 lutely good,or euill of it fclfe,and not by Accident : for it were 
 no good argument to reafon thus; The death of Chriftwas 
 good : Ergo, Chrift was cuill : for his death was good by acci- 
 dent for our faluation , and not for any crime that was in him, 
 Moreouer^you muft beware that you vfe not one felfc predicate 
 both in your antecedent, and in your confcquent:for if good be 
 the predicate in the antecedcnt,euil muft be the predicate in the 
 confequen^and if cuill be the predicate in the antccedent,good 
 
 O 2 mull 
 
ioo 7 he fourth Boofy 
 
 onift be the predicate in the confccucnt: forthiskindof re*- 
 foningconfiftcthof contraries, 
 
 OfVfe. 
 
 Vfc is the apt applying of cuery thing to his proper 
 end, as the vfe of Wine to comfort the ftomake, and to reioyce 
 the heart of man. 
 
 How may we reafonfrem this place t 
 
 Aflirmatiuely thus: the vie of Wine is good '.Ergo, Wineii 
 good: the vfe of art Magike is euill: Erg*, the art it fclfe is euillt 
 
 What be the maxims of this place ? 
 
 That thing is good or euill, whereof the vfe is good or euill. 
 
 What is to be obferuedin this kind of reafomng f 
 
 Two things ; firft, that the thing whereof wee fpeake , haue 
 feme good or euill vfe of it felfe absolutely , and not by acci- 
 dent :lccondly, that wetakenottheabufe in fttad of the right 
 vfe, as to fay, Wine will make men drunkc: Ergo, W T inc is not 
 good. 
 
 Whereto [erne me ft chiefly the fie three places lajl mentioned ( that 
 is to fay) the place ef G iff era (ten, »/ C*rruptton i tmdef Jfe ? 
 
 They chiefly feme to proue the naturall goodntifc or euil- 
 nelTeof anything. 
 
 Of the SubieEi, 
 
 HOw is thiswdfdSubieElhere taken ? 
 For that whercunto accidents and actions doebelong : 
 and hauing to fpeake here of common accidents , I thought it 
 good to fpeake firft of the Sabiects, becaufe all manner of Ac- 
 cidents muft needs cleaue to one Subiect or other. 
 Hon? may we reafen from this place f 
 
 Affirmaciuely ,and Negaiiuely : ArTirmatiuely IriUsfjIt is fire : 
 Ergo, it is hot and apt to burne. He is a man : Ergo, apt to laugh 
 or to wcepe. Negatiur ly thjia, Dead men haue no being at all : 
 Ergo, dead men are not miserable. He hath no gall iE go, hee 
 
 cannot 
 
cfLogic\e. 1 01 
 
 cannot be angry. There be no Pigmeans : Ergo, they fight not 
 with Cranes. 
 
 Which be thi maxims of this flace ? 
 
 If the Subie<5t be, the naturall accidents and acTtons belong- 
 ing to the Subiei* muft: alfo needes bee : and the Subiec*t being 
 taken away, all the accidents and actions thereof muft alfo bee 
 taken away. 
 
 How may fuch arguments as are fetch td out of this place bee 
 confuted f 
 
 When the Accidents doe not of neceflity belong to the Sub- 
 iec\ as thus, He is a man :2jr/0,heisa good Poet, for this ac- 
 cident belongethnotof neccflitie to eucry man. 
 
 Of Adiacentsand Actions. 
 
 FOrfo much as Adiacents, otherwife called perpetttall Atcidents, 
 and alj o naturall and proper Actions belongtngio any SubteU y bt 
 eyther coutaynedvnder theylacc of Propertte, of Different* , orel/i 
 of common Accidents, and h*uo Ukfkind of : reafoning t I though 'good 
 therefore to referreyou to thofe place s t whereof fome Are tattght be- 
 fore, and feme doefo&ow hereaftor, 
 
 . 
 Of Appoftion^. 
 
 . . 
 
 WHat is Apportion ? 
 Apportion is when a thing fheweth what his ownc 
 quality or operation is , by being put or. added to another 
 thing, as, white Chalke bernjtpait to a wall/will make the wall 
 white, and thereby Chalke ftcweth it felfcto bee -tahke: fo 
 likewife Inke being put to paper,or fach like thing)' wili make 
 it blacke. 
 
 How may a man rtafonfrom this place ? 
 Aflirmatiuely thus : Chalke being put to a wall , will make 
 it white : £rgo, Chalke is white. Fire being put ynder a Caul- 
 dron of water, will make the wat'er hot v£*g*, fftcishof. By 
 this place alfo aman may prooue conuerlatioia or companie 
 With others to be good or cuill in this fort. This young roan 
 
 O 2 kee- 
 
roz The fourth *Boofy 
 
 keeping company with thatolde man is made vcrtuous: Erg o % 
 theoldemanis vcrtuous. Hee is become aThiefe by keeping 
 company with fuc'i a perfon : jEV^that perfon is a Thicfe.And 
 therefore the Scripture W\\\\ t cptm boris bonus cris, O'cumpcruer- 
 Jtsperasrteris (thac is to fay) with the good thou flialt be good, 
 and with the froward thou fhalt lc3rne frcwardnefle. 
 
 What bt the maxims of this f Lice ? 
 
 If one thing being put to another, endurcth the Tame with 
 any cualitic,thj'- thing mufi; necdes rnuc the famcqii3litie it 
 felfe. T doe place this place next to action, becaufe it feemeth to 
 me thatit appertained* to action. 
 
 Of common Accidents. 
 
 "V TT 7 Hat call yee common Occidents ? 
 
 V V I call thofe common Accidents, fuch things as arc 
 cither alwaies, or for the moft part fo knit together, as the one 
 goeth before or after the other, or els accompany each one the 
 other : whereof fome are ncce flary, and fomc probable. 
 
 How may we reafonfrom the Neceffary ? 
 
 Both affirmatiuely and negatiuely, and fivft affirmatiuely, by 
 the latter part thus. This Appletrec hath flowres : Ergo, it hath 
 budded. It hath fruit : Ergo, it hath both budded andflowrcd. 
 This woman is brought to bed of a childe : Ergo y fhc hath con- 
 cerned. Negatiuely by the former part thus. This woman neucr 
 concciucd : Ergo, fhe can bring forth no childe- This man neuer 
 ftudied : Ergo, he is not learned. 
 
 What be the maxims of thit place ? 
 
 If the latter be, the formeE muft needs goe before, aad if the 
 former were not, the latter cannot bee. 
 
 Of Probable Accident /, ConieUures, Pre fumpt ions i Signes t 
 and Ctrcumftances* 
 
 HOw may we rsafon from Prohable Accidents > 
 From Probable Accidents you may reafon Affirma- 
 tiuely thus : The feaft of Bacchus is this day celebrated : Srg», 
 
 there 
 
of Logic f^e. ioj 
 
 there will be many drunken this day. The generall Scffions are 
 holdcn this day : Ergo, there will bee fome hanged. 
 
 What be the maxims »f this place ? 
 
 If the latter be, it is likely that the former went before, and 
 if the former bee , it is like enough the latter may follow : but 
 you muft beware in reafoning from this place, that you fetch 
 not your argument from fuch Accidents as chance but feldome, 
 or bee indifferent, for fuch bee neither neccflary nor probat le, 
 but fophiftkall and fallible, as to reafon thus. Shecisafairc 
 woman : Ergo, (lice is vnchafte. 
 
 Whereto Jerueth the place of comrxea Accidents ? 
 
 In the Iudiciall kind it hclpeth greatly to prooue the fac~t. In 
 the Demonftratiuckind roprayfe or difprayie. In the Dehbe- 
 ratiuekindto perfwade or dnTwade, and to gather rogethcr 
 all Coniedures meete for the purpofe, and therefore this place 
 is much vfed of naturall Philosophers to prooue things by na- 
 tural! (ignesjor byPhyfiognomie : alfo of Aitrologers to proue 
 Dearth,Mortality, and fuch like, by Wonders, and Monfters,as 
 by blazing Stars, and fuch like imprefllons. Alfo it is much v- 
 fed of Chiromancers, Southfaycrs, and fuch as vfc to iudge by 
 Cor.icftures. and therefore this place extendtth very farre, and 
 feructh to many vfes. Ilitherro alfo are referred the places of 
 circumfUnces, and chiefly of timcand place, from whence 
 good argument* may be fetched. 
 
 ' OfTtme. 
 
 HOtv are arguments fetched from time ? 
 Neeatiuely thus : Pythag. was not borne in tfjima Vom- 
 filim time : Ergo^Numa was not Pythagoras Scholler. IhcCc- 
 remoniall Lawes of Mofes were made for a certainc time: Ergo^ 
 after that time they doe not bind. 
 What be the maxims of this place ? 
 
 Nothing cannot be without time, for if time be taken awiy, 
 the thing alio muft needs faile. 
 
 Of 
 
104. The fourth c Boo{e 
 
 Of Place. 
 
 HOw are arguments fetched from place t 
 Negatiuely thus : Cicero was not at Rome, v/hen Julius 
 Cafar was flaine : Ergo, Cictro flew him not. 
 What is the maxim e of this place ? 
 
 No ccrtaine body or thing is without a place, neither is one 
 body at one time in diuers places : and thus much touching in- 
 ward places. 
 
 Of outward pikces, and fir fi of Caufes. 
 
 WHich he outward Places t 
 Outward places bee thofe which appertaine to the 
 thing, and yet doe not cleaue thereunto: of which places the 
 fir ft is of Caufcs and Effects. 
 
 ffhat is a Caufe ? 
 
 A Caufe is chat by vcrtue whereof another thing followcth. 
 
 How many chiefs kinds of Caufe} he th?re ? 
 
 Fourc, (that is to lay) the Caufe Efficient, theend, matter, 
 and fhape, of the two laft whereof we haue fpoken before, be-, 
 caufe they be inward places , and doe belong to the Subftance 
 of the thing , and therefore wee hauc to deale oncly here, with 
 the caufe Efficient and end. 
 
 Ofthc Caufe Efficient. 
 
 WHat is that caufe "Efficient, and how is it deuidtd f 
 Caufe Efficient is that from whence proceedeth the 
 firft beginning of any thing that is made or done, and is the 
 maker thereof. As for example, the Carpenter is the Caufe Ef- 
 ficient of the houfe which he maketh, and Co is euery Artificer 
 of his ownc worke, Caufes Efficient are druided into two 
 kinds (that is to fay) Caufe Abfolure , and Ca;'fc Adiuuanr. 
 Caufe Abfolute worketh by hisowne force and vcrtue , as the 
 fire that burneth. Caufe Ad.uuant worketh not by himfelfe, 
 but is a helper, and fuch caufe is feme time priucipall , as ver- 
 
 tut 
 
of Logic ke, 105 
 
 tueis a Principall Caufe of blcfled life, and femeume not 
 Principall, as the gifts of the body and of fortune be helpers to 
 the happy life: but not Principall Caufes thereof. Againc of 
 Caufes, forae are of NecefTkie, without which thethingcan- 
 notbemade, as thelnftrumentor matter, and fomc are faid 
 r.er to be of Neccfluie, as when we fay, The fpeaking of truth 
 caufeth hatre J, and yet not of Ncceflitie. Alfo of Caufes Effi- 
 cient, fomebe Vniuerfall , and fome Particular, astheEdipfe 
 orcuill Coniunction of certaine Planets is the Vniuerfall caufe 
 of Pefiilence : but the corruption of humours in mans bodie is 
 the particular caufe thereof. Againe, of caufes fome be called 
 of the Latins Proptnqua ( that is to fay ) nigh vnto the Effect, 
 ss the Father and Mother be the nigheft Caufes of Generation 
 of Children. And fome bee called Remott, (thatis tofay) re- 
 moued caufes,which be further of, as the Grandfirs, and Gran- 
 dames of the laid children. Moreouer of Caufes Efficient fome 
 work by a ccrtaine naturall Neceffity, as thofe that lack choice 
 and iudgcment,as fire that burneth>and the Sunne that fliineth, 
 and all other naturall things that doe worke by their own force 
 and vertue. Some againe doe worke by Counfell, Reafon, and 
 Freewill, as Men, Angels, and mo ft chiefly God himfelfe. 
 How may roe reafon from the Efficient Caufe to the Effi 8 > 
 From the neceflarie Efficient Caufe you may reafon both Af- 
 firmatinely andNegatiucly. Affirmatiuely thus : The Sunne is 
 lately gone downe : Ergo, it is twilight. Negatiuely thus : The 
 Sunne was not vp when Troy was dertroye d:Ergo y Troy was not 
 deftroyed in the day time : but from the Efficient not r^eceffj- 
 ry, you can reafon but onely Affirmatiuely thus : Hee is flaine : 
 €rgo,ht is dead : but you cannot fay; he is not flaine : Ergo, hee 
 is not dead. 
 
 What be the Maxims of this fUce ? 
 
 TheNeccflary Caufe Efficient not letted, the Effect muft 
 needs follow : as if he^hath drunken Poyfon,he muft needs dye. 
 But if fuch Caufe failcth, the effect alfo muft needs faile: as the 
 Sunne is not vp : Ergo, it is not day. Hee neucr ftudied : Ergo, 
 he is not learned, to which place may bee referred the places of 
 occafion, Inftrumcnt, Mcane,and Generation. 
 
 P How 
 
io 6 Thefourth^Boo^e 
 
 How may v>e rcafmfrom the Efft c~l> to t he Caufe Efficient ? 
 FrcnnheNccefifaiieEft'etf , both Aftirmatiuely andNega- 
 tiuely thuSjit is day : Ergo s thcSunneis vp it is not day : Ergo, 
 the Sunne is not yp. From the Effeil not Nectary you may 
 only reafon Negatiuely, thus: He is not dead: Ergo, He is not 
 flaine, but you cannot reafon i'o Affirmatiuely, as to fay, Hee is 
 dead : Ergo, He is flaine. 
 * What be the (Jyfaximes of this place ? 
 
 The Effect being put, thcneceflary Caufe mult needesbee, 
 and the Erfe& being taken away, the neceffary Caufe is alfo ta- 
 ken away. 
 
 When doe ^Arguments fetched from this place fit tie ? 
 When the Caufe is not neceffary or proper. 
 
 Of the End, 
 
 WBat is the End, and how is it dimded ? 
 The End is that for whofe fake any thing is done,, 
 and of ends fome be chiefe and laft, and fome not chiefe, but 
 helping : The chiefe is that which is defired for itfelfefake, 
 and fuch is the beft ftate of euery thing in his kinde , as blelTed 
 life to Man : courage and fiercenefle to a Horfe of feruice: 
 heate and dryncfle to Fire : coldnefie and moyftneflfe to Water, 
 &c. The helping end is that whichisdelircdnot for it felfe 
 fake, but for that it helpeth to attaine the chiefefl: end , and of 
 fuch helping ends one may be better then another, as when wc 
 defire money to buy a houfc, and the houfc to dwell in, & c. 
 How may we reafon from this place ? 
 
 Both Affirmatiuely and Negatiuely, Affirmatiuely thus,Vcr- 
 t'ue is good, becaufe blefTed Life is good : Negatiuely thus, If 
 Adulterie be not good to allure another mans wife, To breake 
 Wedlockc is not good. 
 
 What he the CMaximss of this place ? 
 That thing where of the end is good or euill, is alfo of it felfe 
 goodoreuill. 
 
 Tell the vfe of the places of Canfes^ and whereto they [erne ? 
 The vfe thereof is diuers and manifold : for fith that in the 
 Dcliberatiuc kind two principall queftions are to be difcufTed ; 
 
 firfh 
 
of Logic fy. 107 
 
 firft, whether the thing be profitab le ; and fecondly, whether 
 it may bepomb l eand conueniemly done orno t.Arguments to 
 proue the firft, are to be fetched out of the End and Erfeft. And 
 toprouc the fecond out of the Caufe Efficient t Alfo in the kind 
 Demonftratiue to prayfe or difprayfe. Arguments are to bee 
 fetched out of th e End and ErTeft. Thirdly, in the Iudiciall 
 kind, wherein doubt rifeth of the faift, and will of the doer. Ar- 
 guments are to bee fetched from the End, to proue or difprouc 
 the fame. Finally, thefe places, together with the other two 
 Caufes, Matter and Forme before taughc , doe feruetomakc 
 thofe kinds of Definitions which we call Caufall. 
 
 Of Opposes. 
 
 WHhatbe Oppofites} 
 Things contrary one to another. 
 How many kinds of Oppofites be there ? 
 Foure(thatis tofay)Rclatiues, Contraries, Priuatiues, and 
 Contradictories. 
 
 And firft of Relatiuts. 
 
 WHe» are things /aid to be Oppofttts bj %»lation ? 
 When according to their owne fignifications they 
 hauemutuall Relation one to another , as the Father and the 
 Sonne. 
 
 How may we reafon from this place} 
 
 You may reafon from the Affirmation of the one to the de- 
 nyali of the other, thus : Attguftnt was Ottantui his fonne: Er- 
 go, He was not his Father. 
 
 What be the Maximes of this place ? 
 
 Sith Rclatiues bee alwayes together by nature ,if the one be, 
 the other muftneedes bee, and if the one bee taken away , the 
 other is alio taken away. 
 
 What u to be obferuedin fetching Argument s from this place ? 
 
 Yen mutt beware that you haue one felfe refpeit , and not 
 diuers, for to reafon thus is no good Confeqtient,This man is 
 
 P 2 a Ft- 
 
108 *Thc fourthTBookf 
 
 a Father: Ergo, He is no Sonne : cr thus, This man is his Su- 
 perior : Ergo, Not his Inferiory-form diuers refpecVhemayJpc 
 bothaFather andaSonne; aSuperior and Inferior; aSupe- 
 rior irroflt refpeft; andiufeTiof in'arr&iher,""^ 
 
 Of Contraries. 
 
 WHat be Contraries, Ttndhowau they divided ? 
 They be two Extremes Repugnant one to another, 
 whereof fome are callcd~W'e"diatc (that'is to fay) hauing a 
 nieanCj and fome Immediate hauing no meane at all. 
 
 How may rve reafon from thefe two kinds ? 
 
 From thefirftkinde you may conclude negatiuely , thus, 
 Heeisprodigall '.Ergo, Hec is not couetous :from theftcond 
 kind you may reafon both Affirmatiuely and Negatiuely, thus, 
 This man is whole : Ergo, Hce is not fickej This man is not 
 whole : Ergo, He is fickc. 
 
 rVloAt he the Maximes of ihu place ? 
 
 The Maxime of the Affirmatiue totheNegatiueisthe ge- 
 nerall Maxime to all Oppofues, thus : Wha.foeuer agrecth 
 with the one Oppofitc , mult needes difsgree with the other 
 Oppofite : but ihe Maxime of the Immediate is thu. ; : If one of 
 the Contraries Immediate be not, the other muft needs bee, as 
 the former examples doe plainly (hew. 
 
 Of Vriftatines. 
 
 Wliat be Trinatiues ? 
 Priuatiucs are two Contraries, belonging to one 
 felfe Subie£t,apt to recciue the fame,in the which Subie&.when 
 the one is wanting (atfuchtime asNature doth appoint) the 
 other muft needes be. 
 
 How may tve reafon fram this place .' 
 
 Twowayes :firft,from Affirmation of the one to the deny- 
 all of the other, which is common to all Oppofites, as thus, He 
 is blind : Ergo, He fceth not. Secondly , you may reafon from 
 the denyallof the one to the affirmation of the other, thus: 
 He cannot fpcake :£>£<?, He is dumbe. But this kindeof Ar- 
 gument is not flrong,vn!c(Te the thing required bee applyed to 
 
 his 
 
of Logic kf. I op 
 
 his proper Subiedt, and in fuch time as naturehath appointed, 
 for it were no good argument to fay thus : a fucking childe can- 
 not fpcake : Ergo, he is dumbe ; or thus, a whelpe of two dayes 
 old cannot fee : Srgo y he is blinde : for nature commonly fuffe- 
 rcth not the childe to fpeake before it bee two yecres old, nor 
 the whelpe to fee before it be nine dayes old. 
 
 What be the Maxima of thispiice ? 
 
 If the one bee not in theSubie&apttorecciue the fame at 
 fuch time as nature hath appointed, the other rnuft needs be. 
 
 Of ContntdiBories, 
 
 WHat b: Contradittories ? 
 They bee Contraries hauingnomeane, whereof 
 the one denieth theother. 
 
 Hoxv m.ty wereafon from this place } 
 
 Both Affi matiutly and Negatiuely thus : he is wife: Erge^ 
 he is no foole : he is a foMe : Ergo, he is not wife. 
 
 WiAt is the M xime of thu place ? 
 
 If the one be,thc other cannot bee : for two Contradictories 
 cannot be together at one felfe time, in one felfe Subij&, and 
 in one felfe refpe&. 
 
 Of things differing in kind, called of the La- 
 tines Difparata. 
 
 W Hat he they} 
 They are thofe things that doe differ in nature and 
 kind, asaMan,aHorfe, a Stone, a Tree, whereof cucry one 
 diftereth from another in kind and nature. 
 How may we reafonfrom this place ? 
 
 From the Affirmation of the one , to the Deniall of the Ci- 
 ther, as thus : Peter is a Man, Ergo, he is no Horfe. 
 What he the Maximes of thu place ? 
 
 Whatfoeueragreeih with the one, agreeth not with theo- 
 ther. 
 
 What is to bee obferuedin reafoning from all thefe hindes of Of- 
 po files ? 
 
 That the Repugnancy con lift in the Predicat, and not in the 
 
 P 3 Subietf: 
 
 m 
 
no The fourth c Boo{e 
 
 Subiect : for it were no good Confequent to fay thus : what- 
 foeaer Teeth is a fenfible bodie : Srgo t that which is blinde is no 
 fenfible body : for hcere the Contrariety eonfifteth in the Sub - 
 ieel, and not in the Predicate, 
 
 Of CemparifoM. 
 
 HOw may we reafottfrom the place of Comparifetf ? 
 Three manner of wayes, that is, either from the More 
 totheLefle, or from the LeiTe to the More , orfromLiketo 
 Like. 
 
 Of the tMoYe. 
 
 THefe two words , LMore or Lejfe, bow are they to be taken ? 
 We ynderftand here by More, that which hath more pro. 
 babilitie, and by the LetTe , that which hath leflc probabihtie. 
 
 How may we reafon from the More to the Lejfe ? 
 
 Oncly Negatiuely, and that three manner of wayes : flrft, 
 from the Sublet, as thus : Cicero was not able to defend this 
 caufe, much lefle any other common Orator : fecondly, from 
 the Predicate thus : If this man be not able to beare one hun- 
 dred weight, much lefle two hundred weight: thirdly, from 
 the Subiedt, and Predicate both together thus : Aftrongman 
 is not able to beare a hundred weight: Ergo t much lefle a vveakc 
 child is able to beare two hundred weight. 
 
 What is the Maxims of this place ? 
 
 If itpreuailethnotinthe More, it cannot preuaile in the 
 LeiTc. 
 
 Of the Lefe. 
 
 HOw may wereafon from the Leffe to the More ? 
 Amrmatiuely, thtcc manner of wayes , as before from 
 the Subiect thus : A little childe was able to beare tennc pound 
 weight : Ergo , muchmorea ftrong man: From the Predicate 
 thus : If Martyrs were readie to lofc their liucs for Chrifts 
 fake, much more their tcmporall goods: From the Subiect, 
 and the Predicate both together thus : Chrift fuftered moft 
 
 grieuous 
 
R 
 
 o/Logic{e. in 
 
 gricuous torments for our fakes iSrgo, vvce ought to' fuffer a 
 little painc for his fake. 
 
 What is the Maxime of this place f 
 
 If the Leffe preuaile, the More mutt needes auaile. 
 
 What is to be obfertted in reafoning from theje two places ? 
 
 You mutt beware that you take not the More for the Leffe, 
 nor the Leffe for the More/or many times that which feemeth 
 to be the More in number or quantitie, is the Leffe in purpofe, 
 andcontrariwife, as for example: to bcarea hundred weight, 
 ■» more in quantitie,then to beare halfe a hundred weight, and 
 yet in purpofe it is lefTe,for it is leffe probable,and leffe likely to 
 beare a hundred weight, then to beare halfe a hundred weight. 
 
 Of Like and V dike. 
 
 ' Ow m.ij we reafon from Like to Like ? 
 L When the thing which we bring to proue, is like ore- 
 quail to the thing that is to be proued : from which place wee 
 may reafon both Aflfirmatiuely and Negatiuely, thus : Peter is 
 mortall :Srgo t 'Paul ismortall. The day Labourer is worthy 
 of his hyre: Ergo t the Preacher or Teacher : A -man ought to 
 be drowned in the Sea for killing his Father : Ergo y he ought to 
 be executed with the like death Tor killing his Mother. 
 
 What is the Maxime of this plate ? 
 
 Ofthings like, like iudgement is to be made : but note thaE 
 this kinde of reafoning of Like, is more apt to teach and to 
 print in the hearers minde a liuely reprefentation of the thing, 
 then to vrge him by any neceffitie of due proofs to beleeue the 
 fame, becaufeitisvnpofliblc , that the two things which are 
 tobee compared can bee like in all points, and therefore this is 
 the weakeft kind of argument that is, and yet neceffarie to fuck 
 end as is before declared, and fpecially for Lawyers , to proue 
 one ruled cafe, or for iudgement by another Like. To this place 
 alfo is referred the place of Example. 
 
 Of Example* 
 
 How may we reafon from this flace ? 
 
 Affirms* 
 
i rz The fourth *Boo{e 
 
 Affirmatiuely thns : Piter flew Ananias for lying t Ergo, with- 
 out all doubt God will punifh thofc that vfe to lye: theMaxi. 
 me whereof is all one, with that of like before fct down?. 
 
 Of Vnlike. 
 
 HOw may wereafonfrom this place ? 
 Negatiuely thus : God is not as man is/or man is a Iyer: 
 Ergo, God is true and no Iyer. 
 What is the Maxme of this place ? 
 Of things Vnlike, vnlike iudgement is to be made. 
 
 Of the degrees of Compart fort, 
 
 TO the place ofComparifen , mee thinkfs it were not amijfe t§ re- 
 ferre all thofe places which Ariftotle reciteth, and are taken out 
 of the three degres of Compart fon , which chtldren learne tn their 
 Accidents, (that is to fay) the Pofuiue , the Comparative , and the 
 Superlative. 
 
 From the Comparative to the 'Pefitives. 
 
 HOw may wereafon from the Comparative to the Pofitiue ? 
 Aflirmatiuely thus : Vtrgtl was a more learned Poet 
 then Horace. Ergo, Virgil was a learned Poet: Honey is Twee- 
 ter then Milke : Ergo t Honey is fwect. 
 
 What U the Aiaxime of this place } 
 
 If the Comparatiue degree be truly and properly applyed to 
 any thing : the Pofitiue mufl ncedes be alfo rightly applyed to 
 the fame. I fay, heere properly toauoid Ambiguitie,for it were 
 no good Confequent to fay thus : the Sea of Cafpia is more 
 fwect then any other Sea : Ergojt. is fwcet and not fait : for this 
 word fweet hath not in this fpeechhis proper fignification,but 
 is rather taken, for that which is kite bitter or fait. 
 
 From the Pofitiue to the Comparatiue. 
 
 HOw may we reafon from the Pofitiue to the Comparatiue > 
 Onely Negatiuely thus : Zoilm was no learned Poet : 
 £rgo t he was not better learned then Homer. 
 What it the Maxme of this place ? 
 
 If 
 
o/Logic{e. ii 3 
 
 If the Pofitiuc be denyed, the Comparatiue alfo muft needs 
 be denyed. 
 
 From two Pofitiptesto two Comparatives and 
 twoSuperlatiues. 
 
 T_I Ovt may tve reafon from trvo P of tines, to tree Comparatives, and 
 to two Superlatives at orce, and contrarih ? 
 
 In this manner : that which is good, deferueth luftly to bee 
 beloucd: Srge, that which is better, ought more iuftly to bee 
 beloued , and that which ts beft, ought moft iuilly tobebe- 
 loued. And much after this manner you may reafon from a 
 double Comparatiue, to a double Pofitiue thus: that which is 
 moiehonctf; is more laudable: Srgo , that which is honeft is 
 laudable. 
 
 What is to be obferuedtn reafonmgfrom thefe degrees of Compa-, 
 rifon } 
 
 You mull take heed that the Predicate beefpoken of the 
 Subieil: naturally and neaflarily, and not by Accident, for 
 it were no good Con.'equent to reafon thus : he that is learned, 
 is honeft, therefore he that is more learned, is more honefr ; for 
 a man may haue much learning, and yet fmall honefty. 
 
 Of Proportion, 
 
 \J\rTJenare wefaid to reafon from the place of Proportion ? 
 
 When two like Proportions being compared toge- 
 ther, we conclude in this or fuch like manner : looke what pro- 
 portion is betwixt 6. and 4. the fame proportion is betwixt 
 1 2. and 8. but betwixt 6. and 4. is Proportio Stfcjutaltera : Ergo t 
 betwixt 1 2. and 8. the like proportion is : for when one num- 
 ber or mcafurc doth comprehend another once , and one halfe 
 thereof, that is called proportio fefquialter a t as 12. and 8. andif 
 it conrayne it once, and one third part thereof, then it is called 
 proportio jefetuitertia, as 8. and 6. for 8. contayneth 6. once and 
 two ouer, which is the third part of 6, 
 
 W bat is the Maxims of thisphce ? 
 
 Of things hauing like proportion, like Judgement is to bee 
 made. 
 
 Q^ When- 
 
Ii^ The fourth "Beefy 
 
 Whereto ferueth thufftic. ? 
 
 Thii place is necrtT.iry for Iudgcsnnd Maoiftrates that haue 
 to conf.dcr of cquitie in cafes of luftice, and in rewarding 
 Vertue,orinpunifhing Vice, in which the Gcometricall pro- 
 portion would be alwayes v.'ed. Some doe giue fuch exam- 
 ple* of this place, as in rr.y opinion doc rather belong to the 
 place of Like then to this pi. ice, for the arguments of this place 
 ought properly to be fetched out of the Predicament of quan- 
 tise, and not out of qualitie, or out of any other Predicament. 
 
 Of Changed Proportion. 
 
 WHat is changed Proportion ? 
 Changed Proportion is when the Foundations,and 
 Tcrmes of two like Proportions are anfwerablc in proportion 
 •fwell amongft themfelues, as one to another. 
 
 What meanejou hy thefe two words , Foundation And Termes f 
 
 The Foundation is that from whence the Companfon firft 
 proceedcth, as the Father,and the Terme, Bound or end is that 
 whereunto the faid Coniparifon is applyed, and endeth inthe 
 fame,as the Sonne,and therefore the Sonne is called theTerme, 
 Bound or end : whereof we haue fpoken before in the Predica- 
 ment of Relation. 
 
 Cine Examples cf re* fining from this place. 
 
 Lookc as 8. is 104. fo is 12. to 6. ( that is to fay ) in double 
 proportion one tothcoth^r : Ergo , as 11. is to S. fo is 6. to 4* 
 for each other containeth the other once andahalfe, which is 
 CiWcdprcpirtiofefquia/tera.The manifest Demonstration wher- 
 ©f you may fee in this Figure hecie following. 
 
 Funda- 
 
ofLogicke, 
 
 "5 
 
 Fmda- 
 mcntum 
 
 Funda- 
 
 mcntum 
 
 Terminus. 
 
 Terminus, 
 
 Wh is this Proportion/aid to be changed or tfMttfrofed ? 
 
 Bccaufe the order of numbers that arc compared, is altered 
 in the conclufron : for in the Anrecedent the firft is compared 
 to the fecond, and the third to the fourth: but in the Conclufi- 
 on the third is compared to the firii,©* the fourth to the fecond. 
 
 Of Di (proportion. 
 
 HO to may we reafon from t kii place f 
 Negauuely thus: 12. is nottn&as 8.ro6\but ii.toct.is 
 double in proportion: Ergo 9>.to6 i> not double in proportion. 
 IV) at u> ihe tJMaxim of this place t 
 
 Of things hauing vnlike proportion, nihkc Judgement is ta 
 be made. 
 
 FrcmDifyroportfan changed or tranjpofed, 
 
 HO to may vae reafon from this place ? 
 N- gaiiuely thus : 1 2. is iiot to <5. as 4. to 3. frr betwixt 
 the two fii H is a double proportion , and betwixt the two iaft 
 S fcj-.titeitia: Fr*o, 12. is not 104. as 6. to 3. for the one is a tri- 
 pla t and the other double. 
 
1 1 5 *The fourth ^Bovfy 
 
 what be the UM^xmes eftjpii pLce t 
 
 If thefirftbenotto thefecond, as the third to the fourth, 
 then the fuftfhall not be to the third { a* the fccond is to the 
 fourth. 
 
 To whom are thefeflacesmofi familiar ? 
 
 To thofe that are exercifedin the Mathcmatirall Sciences. 
 
 Of Tranjlation. 
 \7\7 H*t & Tranflation f 
 
 \ V Tranflation,otherwife called a Mctaphor/is a figure 
 of fpeech, whereby the proper fignifkation of a word is chan- 
 ged into another vnpropcr, for fome likenefle that is betwixt 
 the thing fignified, and being generally taken, it is rather a 
 Trope, or Figure of Rhetorick , more meete to adornefpeech, 
 then to proue any thing thereby : notwithstanding being ta- 
 ken heere as a place of Logick, you may reafon both Aflfirma- 
 tiuely and Negatiuely, in this fort : A roring Lion that fceketh 
 to deuoure, is to be feared : Ergo , the Deuill is to be feared : 
 Loue is bIinde:5Vg0, they thatbeinloue, arc not able rightly 
 toiudgc. 
 
 py hat he the t_Maximes of thlt place. 
 
 Whatfoeuer agrceth with the Metaphoricall name, agreeth 
 alfo with the proper name, and contrariwife. 
 
 Of Mean e places. 
 \7\THatie meane ? I aces ? 
 
 V V Meane Places are thofe from whence fuch Argu- 
 ments are to be fetched , as doe partly agree with the nature of 
 the things tobeproued, and doe partly differ from the fame* 
 Harvnre t he Meane Places dmided ? 
 Into Coniugates, Cafes, and Diuifion, 
 
 And fir ji of Coniugates and Cafes. 
 1 M 7 Hat be (fonlugates or Cafes ? 
 
 V V Coniugates or Cafes, be like words deriued all o{ 
 onefelfe word, differing onely in termination or end, as wif- 
 dome,wife, and wifely : notwithftanding fome vfe Coniugates 
 and Cafes asfcuerall places. 
 
 Why 
 
of Logic ke. uy 
 
 "H4}jf y whertin doe they differ ? 
 
 Their Difference is veryfmall, fauing that in Arguments 
 fetched from Conjugates, the Abftradt is mentioned,but not in 
 thofe that are fetched from Cafes. 
 
 Hew may we rea fort from thefe two places ? 
 
 Both Aftirmatiuely and Negatiuely, frcm the Coniugatcs 
 thus : A iuft man is to be praifed, Ergo Iuftice is to bee prayfed : 
 a vicious man is not to be prayfed^r^jvlcioufneflc is not to be 
 prayfed. From cafes thus : He doth all things wifely, Ergo he is 
 wife: He doth nothing w\Ce\y jErge he is not wife: for in thefe 
 two laft examples the abftrait which is wifedome, is not once 
 mentioned : what abftraft is , looke before in the Chapter of 
 predicarion Lib.\<cap^, but you muft beware in reafoning 
 from this place, that your phrafe of fpeech be naturall and pro- 
 per , and not vnproper : for it were no good argument to fay 
 thus : white isTwect : Erro whiteneiTe is fweetnefle. 
 
 fVvat is the Maxime of thefe two fhces t 
 
 Whatfoelicr agreeth with one of the Coniugatcs or Cafes, 
 muft needs alfo agree with the other. 
 
 Of DiHtfiott* 
 
 WHM it Dimfton > 
 What Diuifion is, and how many kindes there be, 
 and what is to bcobferuedineuery kind hath beene declared 
 before, Lib.z.cap.q. when we fhewed thcorder of defining and 
 diuiding. 
 
 How may we reafonfrcm Diuifion ? 
 
 Two manner of wayes : firft , from thedenyingof oneparc 
 or more of the diuifion,. to affirme another part therof, as thus : 
 Euery fenfible body is whole or ficke, but Peter is a fenfible 
 body and not ficke: Ergo , hecis whole: or thus. Of fenfible 
 bodies there bee fome' whole, fome ficke. Peter isaienfible 
 body and not ficke : Ergo, he is whloe. In thefe two kindes of 
 examples the diuifion confifteth onely of two parts, wherein 
 it fuhSceth to deny the one for affirming the other.But if the di- 
 uifion confift of many parts , then you muft denie all the parts 
 fauingthac wl.ich you would affiime , as in this example fol- 
 
 Q^j lowing:: 
 
ii 8 The fourth 'Booty 
 
 lowing :P/<*ffldifputcth,is a proportion, but it is neither vni- 
 uertall, particular, nor indefinite: Ergo, it is a lingular propor- 
 tion : in which kiiu' of reafoning if you leaucout or omit any 
 part that is to be denied, then the conclusion is naught, for it is 
 ik> good consequent to lay tbjis : this propofitton Plat* difpu- 
 tcth, is neither vniuerfall nor particular : Ergo s ji is indefinite. 
 NotwitMlanding, if you ioyne the part omitted in your Ante- 
 cedent wjth a conjunction dihuncliuc , the Argument may bee 
 made good ; as to fay thus : this proposition PUto difputeth, 
 is neither vniucrfall nor particular : Ergo % it is cither indefinite 
 or lingular. 
 
 What it the (JWtxim of tbitfirft way of reafomng ? 
 
 The Maxim is thus : whatfoeucr agreeth with the thing di- 
 uided, mult needs agree with fome one of the parts thereof. 
 
 Wioat is thefecotd way of reafomng from 'Dim/ion ? 
 
 The fecond way is to proceed from the afruming of one of 
 the parts to the denying of the other, if it conflti but of two,or 
 to the denying of all the relt , if it confift or many. Of two 
 parrs let this be your example: Of i'cnfiblc bodies fome bee 
 whole, fome fieke, but this fenfiblebodic is whole: Ergo, he is 
 notllcke. Of many parts thus : of proportions one is vniuer- 
 fall, another particular; oae indefinite , another lingular :buc 
 this proportion P/ato difputeth, ii lingular: Ergo t itis neicher 
 vniucrfall, particular, nor indefinite. 
 
 What it tk e (JMaxtm of this waj of reafoning ? 
 
 Whatfoeucr agreeth with one of the parts, muft needs dif- 
 agrce with all the relt, for cucry good diuifion would be made 
 of parts meere repugnant , or at the le3(t diucrs inkindcone 
 from another : lor it is a principal! condition requine to diui- 
 fion, whereupon the. fecond way of reafoning is grounded 
 cuen as chcfirlt way is grounded vpon another good conditi- 
 on belonging alfo to diwfion , which is t ; at the thing diuided 
 may notcontainc more oilcflc then his proper parts. 
 
 H 
 
 Of imrtif: tall places. 
 Aulng fufiiciently fpoken of places, inward, outward, 
 and tucane, which as Ifaid before are places artificially it 
 
 is 
 
of Logic -%e. 119 
 
 is meetnow that we fpeake of the places inartificiall, which ac- 
 cording to Quititi'ian be the fixe 5 Foreiudgcments, Rumours, 
 Torru e, Writings or Euidences, Oath, and Witneifes : All 
 which arc briefly and plaincly fct forth in the Table of Autho- 
 rise here follow ing , becaulc they arc all contained viider the 
 place of Authorise. 
 
 Of Authentic. 
 
 # 
 
 HOw is Atthoritie here to he taken f 
 Authorise is here to be taken for any tcftimonie wor- 
 thy of credit. 
 
 How may vee reafon front thisfhee ? 
 
 Aflfirmatiuely thus : the learned Philofophers fay that there 
 bee fourc elements, whereof all other things are mixt and 
 compounded : Ergo t it is true. Chrift faith that whofoeucria 
 baptized, and bclceueth in him, fhall be faued : Ergo^i is true. 
 
 What be the LMaximr ef this place f 
 
 Whatfoeucr is allowed by the.moft part of tke wife and 
 learned, is to bee belecucd as a thing probable , neither ought 
 we rafhly to difcent from their opinion and iudgement. Againe, 
 cucty man is to be beleeued in his owne Art : but for fo much 
 as Authoritie is two-fold (that is to fay) Diuine and Humane, 
 and chat all Arguments fetched from this place bee not of like 
 value, for fome be true and infallible, fome probable,and fomc 
 Sophilticall : this Table therefore here following fhall plainely 
 fet forrh euery kind by it fclfc,whercby you fhall cafily difectne 
 the one from the other. 
 
 THE 
 
no The fourth 'Boofy 
 
 The Table of Authoritiehere Following. 
 
 f Of the written which we call holy Scripture:, found 
 
 Arguments are madt,folongas the wards are truly 
 
 expounded according to the meaning of the Holy 
 
 Ghoji. But t'oeybeweal{e and caption* if the au- 
 
 "iVtitten, < thontie be corrupted either by addition, fubtracli- 
 
 \ $n,or alteration of any -wordy fiUable,or letter ', or 
 
 j bywrejlingthe fenfe otberwife then the Holy Ghofl 
 
 \jncantit. 
 
 Vitiint 
 which is 
 twofold x 
 
 or vnwnt- 
 ten tradi- 
 ^titn: 
 
 or Humane 
 which is 
 three-fold: 
 
 CAs for tradition or vnmitten verity of what value 
 it is and what credit it hath 1 1 teauetotheiudge- 
 tnent of the learned Diuines , amongft whom is no 
 
 [mall jlr fe and contention inthefe dayesfor the 
 fame. ThePamims were wont toreferre toDiuine 
 Authoritie the Oracles and Anfweres of their falfe 
 Gods ,Triefts, Prophets, and South fayers, which 
 true chriftiam ought vtterlyto reieel, andtoab- 
 horre : notwitflanding Laftantius letteth not to 
 prone the Birth, Death and? affion of chrift againsl 
 the Va'mim\ by Sybds Propkefies, becaufehe lyitw 
 they would giue more credit to them then to the 
 
 l_Holy Scriptures. 
 
 ■HifloritStLaws, Statutes, Decrees, Iudgemtnts, 
 ruled Cafes, Maxims, Preuerbs , generaH Rules, 
 'Tate-its , Warrants , Ucenfes,Commiffions from 
 ithe Prince , Charters , Deedcs , Releafes , Court-. 
 Rolles,Extents,Accounis,ObHgations, Indentures, 
 . mils and Tefiaments, andfuch like, 
 
 'If it be by mouth, it is either free and voluntary, as 
 \voluntary confcjfion, or Teftimony, Rumor, Opini- 
 on, and thejpeecb of the wife, 
 
 .Or elfe forced by Oath or Torture. 
 
 And the third find of Humane Authoritie,iitbat rrbick U allow- 
 jedby vfe andiujhme of the people. 
 
 (writings,* 
 as 
 
 Things vt- 
 < teredby 
 
 mouth. 
 
 As 
 
o/Logic{e. nt 
 
 As For fuch Arguments as arc fetched from humane Autho- 
 ritie the Lawcs doe teach at large, which bee found, and which 
 bceweake: notwithstanding , for fo much as jghtixtilian afiir- 
 meth, that the inartificiall places, are the fix places aboue-men- 
 tioned, I haue thought good to fet downe according toVale- 
 ritu, the definition of curry place,and briefly to (hew howeuc- 
 ric fuch place may be confirmed or impugned. 
 
 ^And jirji of Fore-ittdgcmerus or Ruled C a f €i > 
 
 WHat call y oh Foce-indgements or Rule A Cafes ? 
 They be Iudgeraents or fentences heretofore pro- 
 nounced, whereby Iudges take example to giue like iudge- 
 ment in like Cafes. 
 
 Hove may a man cenfirme or impagtte Fore»indgements i 
 You fhall confirme them by aggrauating the authoritie of 
 thofe that firft pronounced them, and by the likeneflc of the 
 Cafes : but you frnll impugne or confute them by extenuating 
 or dimimfhing the authoritie of thefuftpronouncers, and by 
 the vnlikcnefle of the Cafes. 
 
 Of Rumor and Fame, 
 
 WHat d fference is betwixt Rumor and Fame ? 
 Rumor is a particular aflertion or affirmation- pro- 
 ceeding of fomt fufpirion,without any certainc Authour. But 
 Fame is a common affirmation, hauingfome certaine Authour : 
 cither of wh ch whofoeucr will impugne,mu{tcallit anvnecr- 
 tainebrute or clamour, taking his beginning firft ofmalice,and 
 his increafc through crcdulitie and lightnefle of belicfe, and 
 that the fame may chance to the moH innocent man that is, 
 through the Fraud of his Enemies, publifhing abroad falfc fur- 
 mifes agatnft him. Contrarily, he that will defend Fame or Ru- 
 mor , mult fay that it rifeth not of nought, nor is fprcd abroad 
 without fome iuft caufe , and that it is accounted as a publikc 
 Teftimome, according to the old Prouerbe, which faith; vox 
 fopkb, vox Dei, the voice of the people, is the voice of God. 
 
 r *r 
 
m The fourth c Boo{e 
 
 Of Torture. 
 
 W Hat is Torture? 
 Torture is a painfull kinde of punifliment,inucnte«t 
 for the inquifition of truth, and violently to vvrcft or wring the 
 fame out of fuch as would not otherwise confeffc it. 
 
 How is this flace to be confirmed er impugned? 
 
 It is to be confirmed by aggrauating the neceflfarie vfc of tor- 
 turejbr the finding out of the truth ; but whofo will impugne 
 it, mud fay, that fuch Torture caufcth many times more lyes 
 then true tales to be told : for thofe that bee ftrong and able to 
 endure paine, and of a refolute minde, will neueryceld for any 
 torment to fay otherwifc then they lift themfelucs. Againe, if 
 they be weake and not able to fuffer paine , it maketh them to 
 fay whatfoeucr you willhaue them, be it ncucr fo falfe. 
 
 Of Writings and Suidcmes. 
 
 WH*t is meant bj Writings) 
 Deeds, Indentures, Releafes, Obligations, and fuch 
 like other Euidences before rchearfed. 
 Htw is this place to be impugned f 
 
 You may impugne Euidences or writings, if ye can prooue 
 them to be vnperfec't any manner of way,as to be forged, to be 
 made by feme collufion or fraude , or to bee*xtorted by fopce 
 from fome that was put in feare, and fuch like. 
 
 OfOathes. 
 
 WHat is an Oath? 
 It is a religious affirming or denying fome thing, 
 by calling God to witneffe, which is the ftrongeft bond that 
 may be, to bind mans faith and confeience. 
 Hove is this flace to be confirmed or impugned ? 
 He that will prooue by this place , muft aggvauatc the inte- 
 gritie, honeftic and holineiTe of the parties that arc fworne, fay- 
 ing, that the Oath of an honeft , "holy, and religious man is of 
 great importance : And he that will impugne it,muft doe clcane 
 sontraric, faying, That they are aaughtic men that are fworne, 
 
 and 
 
of Logic {e. 125 
 
 and common Iurors , which by reafon of wicked cuftomcof 
 fwcaring, will eafily be forfwornc : or he muft fay that the par- 
 tie fweareth for feare, lone, hatred, for hope of gaiae, reward, 
 
 and iuchlike. 
 
 Of Witnejfet. 
 
 WHatbeWtnejfes? 
 Witnefles be proofes of things done or not done, 
 whofe office istofpeake what rheyhaue heard or knowne: the 
 confirmation or confutation of which proofc dependeth vport 
 the goodneflc or euilnefTe of the perfons. 
 To what end ferueth the knowledge of places f 
 He that will write or fpeake of any matter probably, wifely, 
 orcopioufly : or will vndeiftand the effect, tenor, arguments, 
 and proofes of other mens fpeeches , and writings, hath as 
 much need to be prac-tifed in thefe places , as a Huntfman is in 
 knowing the haunts of his Game which hechunteth,for with- 
 out that, he fhall wander long time in vaine, and hardly findc 
 that which he feeketh:ncither is i: enough to know the places, 
 vnleflcyou can aptly apply them and vie them when occafion 
 fhall fcruc, in difputacions made either by mouth or pen, which 
 requiretha continuallexevcifeof fuchas will be perfect therein. 
 And therefore to the intent you might the better icarnc how to 
 exercifeyour fclfe in the fore- faid places, I haue thought good 
 here to giue you ar the leafl; one example fet downe by Runxens 
 in his Logicke: theTheame of which example is thus: Man 
 ought, to imbrace venue: which Theame hce doth not oncly 
 handle after die Logicall manner with fhort fpeech, but alio 
 after the Rhetoticall manner with copious fpeech, vfing there- 
 in this threefold order : For firft, he bringeth in fuch proofes as 
 are to be gathered inrefpe&of the fubieel of theTheame. Se- 
 condly, thofe that are to be gathered in refpeel of the Predicate 
 of the fame : and thirdly , thofe that are to be had in refpec-t of 
 both. 
 
 M 
 
 The Theame or Prof oft ion. . F«« the defini- 
 
 , . , tionoftbefsb* 
 
 An ought to embrace vertue. Ufa 
 
 R 2 fPhat 
 
a:)- The fourth TZcofy 
 
 H'hat Arguments are to bee gathered on the behalf e of the fub- 
 icB of this Proportion f 
 
 Thefc that follow, and firft,from the definition thus : Sithof 
 all fenfible creatures man is the moft noble and moft worthy 
 creature, for that he is endued with reafon and counfell, and 
 was created like to the Image ci God : it is moft mccte tbcre- 
 fsre that fuch a creature fhould be like his Creator, in life ador- 
 ned with fuch vertue and goodnefle as is anivverablc to true 
 iudgement, which the Logicians would briefly exprefle in this 
 manner : it becommeth euery fenfible body endued with rea- 
 fon, to loue vertue : Ergo, euery man ought to loue yertuc. 
 
 From the Etymologie. 
 
 IT becommeth euery creature that is made of the flime of the 
 earth , to bee void of all arrogancie and pride, to bee lowly, 
 humble, and obedienvio his Creator, and to imbracc vertue m 
 obferumg the Law of God dcuoutlyandreligioufly^herefo'e 
 man called in Latine homo, of this word humo , (that is to fay) 
 earth, or rather flime of rhe earth , iaking his originall from lb 
 bafe and vile a thing, ought to be humble and void of all pride 
 and arrogancie, and to loue vertue aboue all things , beingal- 
 wayes obedient to God his Creator, and readie to doe his moft 
 holy Precepts and Commandemcnts. 
 
 Logically thus: 
 Euery fenfible creature that is created of the flime of earth, 
 ought tobeeobedientto hts Creator, and to imbrace vertue, 
 the; efore man ought to be obedient to his Creator , and to im- 
 brace vertue. 
 
 From the UWatter, 
 
 MAn is made of the fehe-fame Matter of which all other 
 vnliu'mg dumbeand vnfenfible creatures are made, (that 
 is to fay) of the fourc Elements, whereby he is fubiccl to altera- 
 tionand corruption : wherefore man ought not to bee proud 
 or arrogant, but modeft, humble, lowly , and obedient, fhew- 
 fng in all the actions of his life, that he is not vnmindfull or his 
 
 bafe 
 
of Logic{e. 125 
 
 bafe cftate and condition, nor ignorant From whence hee came, 
 and what he is, eucn no better then earth and dufr. 
 Logically , thus : 
 Man is made of a bafe matter, as all other things are, there- 
 fore Man ought not to be proud, but to loue the ycrtuc of hu- 
 nulitie and obedience. 
 
 Frew the forme erjhttfe of Man. 
 
 IT hath beene alwayes moft firmely,and with one whole con- 
 fern agreed and beleeued , euen from the beginning of the 
 World , that the true {hapc of Man is a rcafonable Soule , im- 
 rmrtall, and capable of euerlatting bleiTedncflc, which Soule 
 God of his goodnelTe did breathe into man, to the intent that 
 he fliould continually ferue, honour, and obey him, during this 
 mortall life, and after death enioy eternail life : what great mad- 
 neiTe were it then to thinke, that Man hauing obcayncdat 
 Gods hands fo noble a (Lape, ought not to embrace all noble 
 Ycrtucs, and to gouerne all hts actions in fuch godly and vertu- 
 ous manner, as he may at length attaync to the euerlaftingioy, 
 whercunto he vvas firft created and formed } 
 
 Legicai/j, thus : 
 
 Man confiftcthofa Soule, capable of eternail felicitie: Ergt, 
 Man ought to loue vertue, whereby hee may attaync to that 
 felicitie. 
 
 From the gtnerall kjnde. 
 
 SIthitisgiucnbynaturetoeuery fenfibleBodie, tofceke his 
 owne fafetie, and to be beft affected (that is) to haue his full 
 perfection according to his kinde : the U»ue of vertue therefore, 
 whereby Man is made not only perfect in (his life, but Ai > at~ 
 tayneth thereby euerlafting ioy in the life to come , rnuft needs 
 be to him moft natural). 
 
 LegtCAlly, thtu ; 
 Euery fcnfiblc body willingly deiisesh that which is agree- 
 able to his nature and kinde ; therefore , Man mult needs, leue 
 venue, as a thing moft fit for his kinde. 
 
 R 3 From 
 
J2 6 The fourth *Boofy 
 
 From the (peciaR Kinde, 
 
 BOth Men and Women , Rich and Poore , Yong and Old, 
 of what thte or calling focuer they bee , if they intend to 
 leade a good and godly life, haue need of venue : wherefore,all 
 Men that will liue well, ought to embrace vertue. 
 . Logically, thm: 
 Both Rich and Poorc, Yong and Old, ought to loue vertue : 
 &£>% Euery Man ought to loue vertue. 
 
 From the common Accidents, 
 
 E Very Man, after that hee hath ended this fliortcourfeof 
 life , mutt appeare at the laft day before the terrible judge- 
 ment fcate of God, there to render account of all his deeds and 
 words, both good and bad, whereas euery man that hath done 
 well , fhall receiue for his good deeds a molt glorious reward, 
 cuenlifccuerlafhng: but the wicked for his cuill deeds fhall be 
 condemned to hell fire, that neuer fhall be quenched , a iuft re- 
 ward for his deferts : wherefore, all men ought in this life to 
 flie vice, and to embrace vertue , from whence all good actions 
 doe fpring. 
 
 Logically, thm: 
 Euery man fhall render account at thelaftday, of all his 
 deeds both good and bad, and fhall receiue a iutt reward ac- 
 cording to the fame : Ergo, Euery man whilcft hee liucth in this 
 world, ought to flie vice, and to embrace vertue. 
 
 Trent the cam/c Efficient, 
 
 SIth Man was created by God, the Creator of all things, and 
 Author of all goodneffe, exccllencic , and vertue , and was 
 formed according to the very Image and likencfle of God : it 
 bchoueth man therefore to imitate his Creator, and by leading 
 agodlyandvertuous life, to (hew that hee it fomewhat like 
 him , though not able in all things toattayne to the perfection 
 -of fo perfec-t a patternc. 
 
 Logically , thm : 
 God, the caufe efficient, is good 5 therefore, Ma» being the 
 effect, ought to be good. From 
 
o/Logicfy. 127 
 
 From the End. 
 
 T He Prophets and Apoftlcs, infpired with the Holy Ghoft, 
 Author of all Truth , by many their writings doe teftifie, 
 that the greatneffc and excellence of that bleflcdnefle , where- 
 unto Man is created , is fuch as no man is able to exprefle with 
 tongue, nor in his heart or minde to concciuc the fame : where- 
 fore fith Man is created to fuch exceeding great bleflfednefTe, 
 itbehoucthhim to imbrace rertue, which is the very meane 
 and way to bring hira to that bleffedncifc. 
 Logically , thm : 
 
 Sith rooft glorious bleffednes is the end of Man, Man there- 
 fore ought to embrace vertue , that he may attaiHc to that end. 
 
 What arguments are to he gathered on the behalfe of the Predi- 
 cate, and from what f laces f 
 
 Thefe that follow , and fuch like, and firft from the dcfiniti- 
 cn,thus: 
 
 From the Definition of the Predicate, 
 
 Sith Vertue is a morall habite, whereby Mans will and all his 
 actions are alwayes directed to God , and gouerned accor- 
 ding te true Judgement, and thereby are made moft acceptable 
 both to God and Man: Man therefore ought to embrace Ver- 
 tue, frooa whence fuch noble fruits doe fpring. 
 Logicallj^thm ; 
 Man ought to loue that habite from whence all honeft acti- 
 ons doe fpring : therefore man ought to loue Vertue. 
 
 From the Defcriptiort. 
 
 MAn ought with all endeuour to follow that thing where- 
 by he may attaync not a vaine and tranfitorie glorie, but 
 a true and euerlafting glorie , and thereby to be made accepta- 
 ble both to God and Man: Wherefore Man ought to embrace 
 Vertue, from whence fuch glorie fpringeth. 
 Logically, thus : 
 That thing is worthy to be beloued of Man , which getteth 
 himeuerlafting glorie : Therefore Vertue is worthy to bee be- 
 loued. from 
 
12 8 The fourth TZoofy 
 
 From the Etj/moUgie. 
 
 STth Vertue, if you diligently confider and weigh thrfigni- 
 ficanon of the word , is none other thing but a Noble affe- 
 ction of theminde, of great excellcncie, and moft mccte for 
 Man : it is not to be doubted, but that thufe (which leaning; (o 
 precious a thing , doe fet their whole delight in feeking after 
 worldly riches and bodily plealure) are much dccciued, and 
 doc greatly offend. 
 
 Logically , thus • 
 Such excellencie as is m*>ft meet for Man , bccommeth Man 
 belt : therefore Vertue becommcth him be ft. 
 
 From the getter all Kinde. 
 
 STth it is well knowne , that Man ought with all diligence to 
 fcekc after thofc habits , whereby humane nature isbeft 
 adorned, and made moft perfect : And that Vertue , amonglt 
 fuch habits, is the chicfe : becaufc , that thereby the mindeof 
 Man is taught to know what Truth is, and his Will thereby is 
 alwayes inclined to honcft and laudable actions : Man there- 
 fore ought with al his power and endeuour to embrace Vertue. 
 Logically , thtu : 
 Man ought chiefly to loue thofc habits , whereby his nature 
 is made perfect : Therefore Man ought to louc Vertue. 
 
 From the JpeciaS Kinde, 
 
 IT is moft meete , yea moft neccflfarie for all men to'loue For- 
 titude and Temperance : for, by Temperance, Mans will is 
 bridled and kept from all euill lufts and arfe£tionsjand by For- 
 tirude,he is made free from feare of death: and as without Tem- 
 perance, mans life cannot be honclt; fo without Fortitude, his 
 death cannot be commendable:wherefore it plainly appearetb, 
 how necefTarie a thing it is for a man to embrace Vertuc,as that 
 which chiefly maketh his life honcft and laudable,aod his death 
 glorious and honorable. 
 
 Logically , thus : 
 A man ought to loue Fortitude and Temperance : Erg* , He 
 ought to louc Vertue. " From 
 
of Logicke. Up 
 
 From the corruption of the Sukieft, 
 
 T He definition of Vertuc is the caufe of moft grieuouse- 
 uils, for the light of Vcrtue being extinct, the minde is 
 immediately wrapped in fuch darknefle, as it cannot fee nor 
 difcernc what is honcft, what is profitable, or what is hurtfull : 
 by mcancs whereof man falleth into moft filthy vices, which 
 doe fo infect and corrupt the life of man as it becommeth moft 
 dcteltablc both to God and Manrwhereby it plainly appeareth 
 how noble a thing Vertue is, and with what loue and diligence 
 it ought to be embraced of all men. 
 
 Logically thus. 
 The deftruction of Vertue is euill : therefore Vertue is good 
 and worthy to be beloued. 
 
 From the vfe of the Sttbictl, 
 
 T 
 
 He vfe of Vertue maketh mans life commendable, holy, 
 , glorious, and acceptable both to God and Man: then 
 which nothing can be in this World more to be defired of man: 
 wherefore it manifeftly appeareth, that Vertue is fo noble a 
 thing, as all men ought to beftow all their ftudie, labour and 
 care in obtayning the fame. 
 
 Logically thus. 
 The vfe of Vertuc is good : Therefore Vertue is good. , 
 
 From common Accidents, 
 
 SIth all men doe greatly dehre to haue their confidences quie- 
 ted, and their minds free from all euill lurts, affects, and paf- 
 fions, which with continuall ftrife doe moleft the fame :and 
 thereby doe caufe Man to lead amiferable life : Man therefore 
 ought to refufe no p3ine nor labour , (o as hee may atrayneto-. 
 Vertue, which is a! wayes accompanyed with that cranquillitic 
 of minde and confcicnce that is fo much defired. 
 Logically thns. 
 The tranquiilitie of the minde and confeience is to bee defi- 
 red :Ergo, Vertue which is alwayes accompanyed with that 
 tranquiilitie is to be defired. 
 
 S From 
 
i^o The. fourth TSoofy 
 
 From the caufe Efficient. 
 
 SIth true Vcrtue is not to be gotten by any mans labour , ex- 
 ercife, orinduftric, without the great grace of God, who 
 is chiefe Authour and Giuer of al! good gifts ; it well appeareth 
 that Vertue is a moft excellent thing, and moft worthy'to bee 
 had in admiration , and therefore with fcruent loue and dili- 
 gence to be embraced of all men. 
 
 Logically thtet: 
 God the chiefe Author of all good, is the caufe Efficient of 
 Vertue: therefore Vcrtue proceeding of fo worthy a caufe, 
 muft needes be an excellent thing, and worthy of all men to be 
 embraced. 
 
 from the EffeU. 
 
 TRue honour 3nd glory hath beene alwaies had amongft all 
 men in great admiration : becaufe it feemeth not only by 
 mans judgement, but alio by the diuine iudgement of God, to 
 be alwayes attributed to Vertue : wherefore fith Vertue doth 
 yeeld luch noble fruits and eflfccls, Veitue muft needs bee a no- 
 ble thing it felfe, and worthy of all men to be embraced. 
 Logic ally thm: 
 The Effect of Vertue , which is true honour and glory , is 
 good, and to be defired. 
 
 from the End. 
 
 SIth cucrlafting blcfledneffe is of fuch excellency , as neither 
 tongue is able to expreue the ioyes thereof, nor mindeto 
 concciuethe fame, and therefore ought to be defired aboue all 
 things, as the iuft reward of all goodnefic , and finall end of all 
 euill, and that V«rtueisthe.oncly meane to bring man to that 
 bleffedEnd: who then will once thinkc that Vcrtue is not to be 
 eftcctned aboue all things , and worthy of all men to bee em- 
 braced ? 
 
 Logically thtu: 
 The end of Vertue, which is euerlaftingfelicitie, is to be de- 
 fired : 8rg<>y Vertue is to be defired. 
 
 Hitherto 
 
ofLogicke. 151 
 
 Hitherto yen haue/hereed how the afore/aid Theme it f beproued 
 tgith Arguments fetched afwell from the SubieU as the Predicate : 
 now flew what arguments are to be fetched from both ioined together. 
 
 Thefe that follow and fuch like, and firft by Comparifon, 
 from the Lcflc to the More. 
 
 FromtheLeffetoiheUlUre. |( 
 
 IF men will not let tobeftowanypainc, labour or coft topre- 
 ferue their bodies from death, fickneile, or any other hurt: 
 how much more then ought they to endeuour thcmfelues to 
 obtayne Vertue, which willpreferue their foules from all cor- 
 rupt affections and euill vices , and thereby deliuer them from 
 death euerlafting ? 
 
 Logically thus: 
 
 Man ought to be carefu.Il of .his bodily health : Ergo , Much, 
 more of his foules health, which is chiefly prefcrued by Vertue. 
 
 From Similitude or Likeneffe, 
 
 AS the besuty of the bodie is pleafant to mans eyes :eucn fo 
 the beautic of the minde or foulc is as acceptable to God: 
 and therefore as man will bee diligent and carefull in decking 
 and adorning his body to pleafe the eyes of men : cuen fo hee 
 ought to be tnoft carefull to decke his foule and mind,with fuch 
 Vertucs,as doe make the fame in Gods fight moft acceptable 
 Logically thus: 
 
 As the decking of the body is plefant to mens eyes fo the 
 decking of the Soulc is pleafing to God. 
 
 From Authorities 
 
 DAaid the Prophet in the thirty foure Pfalme faith thus : 
 Turre from euill, and do that which is good.The Prophet 
 tJWtcheM alfo agreeth hereunto in faying thus: Dealciutfly 
 with all men, loue mercy , and walke diligently in the way of 
 God.By which words thefe two godly Prophets doe teach no 
 
 S 2 other 
 
i^z The fourth TSooke 
 
 other thing, theft that man forfaking all kindeof Vice, fhould 
 with all diligence embrace Vertue. 
 
 Logically thus: 
 God teachcth by his Prophet 7) autel, and alfoby Micheas t 
 that Man fhould flye Vice, and loue Vertue : Ergo, Man ought 
 to loue Vertue. By daily exercifmg your felfe in fuch exam- 
 ples as this is , you (hall in fhort time learne the 
 right yfe of the places ,and be able there- 
 by readily to apply them to 
 eucry good pur- 
 pofe. 
 
 Here endeth the fourth Booke of Logicke. 
 
 
 THE 
 
THE FIFTBOOKE 
 
 OF LOGICKE. 
 
 \ 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Of Argumentation, and of the fowe hinds thereof fa genera/?, 
 anda/fc of the fir si Principles of a Syiio-gifmc. 
 
 ; lAu'wg hitherto fuffciently ?Jo J ^en of words 
 both fimpie and compound^herecf all que- 
 filers doecofiftfi , alfo of definition anddt- 
 uif\Q,i,of (JAletliod y of propofitions and of 
 the pi xl es : It r.jlct h novo that 1 declare vn» 
 U yo: j . the formes and kjr.de s cf'reafonirg 
 tailed Argumentation jwhich be the memet 
 veiiYc'.y m all compound que ft ion: the 
 truteh may bee difcerned from falfljood, 
 therein con f.fieth the chiefefl fruit of Loguke ; an J therefore yots 
 Jballvnderjiand th*t there bee pure principal! kjndes or formes of 
 Agumentation, (that is) a Sjllogifme, an Induction, an Etljmeme, 
 And Example, I fay here principal} , bteaufe there bee diners other 
 formes,wbich though th t y bee not fo nectffary , yet 1 inHbricfiy treat 
 of them hereafter: 'But for fo mnchas the Sjllogifme is the ciiefefl, 
 ivhertuntoall others are referred as things vnperfttt , vnto a thing 
 perfeftt I veillfirft fp:ake of a Syllogifme y andof all the parts thereof: 
 but yet before I define or diu'tde a Syllogifme , / think/ *t very necef 
 fary to declare vnto you the fir fl Principles afrcllCMateriall , as 
 %{guUr t ofafimplc Syllogifme conf fling of [lmple Propofitions. 
 
 S 3 Which- 
 
134- 7 be fifi Tootle 
 
 Which callyou ^Material Principles) 
 
 Matcriall Principles are three fimple Propofitions,and three 
 terraes,(tha: is to fay) the Subie.St,the Predicatc,and thenieane 
 tcrrr^h«eafterdefir«^d J wherfoftheSubiei"tand the Predicate 
 are faid to bee the outermoft limits or bounds of any fimple 
 Propofition. 
 
 Why turet hey called tertnes or limits ? 
 
 Becaufe they limit a Propofition, euen as Dole-ftones or 
 Meares doe limit a piece of ground In the field, and bee the vt. 
 termoft parts or bounds whereunto any Proportion is to bee 
 rcfolued, as for example in this Propofition, euery man is a fen- 
 fible body: thefe two words, man, and fenfiblc body, are the 
 termes, limits , or bounds, whereof as the faid Propofition 
 is compounded, fo into the fame it is to bee rcfolued , as into 
 his vttcrmoft parts that haue any fignification : for letters and 
 fillables of themfelues be without fignification , and therefore 
 can limit no fpeech, fo that the termes of Propositions muft be 
 ey ther Nounes, or Verbes, which bee only voices fignificatiue, 
 as haue beene faid before. 
 
 Which be the Principles irregnlatirte ? 
 
 The Principles regulatiue of a Syllogifme be thefe two phra- 
 (e$ of fpeech, to be fpoken of all, and to be fpoken of none. 
 
 What is to be[pe\en of all > 
 
 That is, when the predicate being trucly fpoken of the Sub- 
 ie£t, muft needs be alfo fpoken of all that is comprehended vn- 
 der the faid fubie$ : as when I fay euery man is a fenfiblc body: 
 here this word fenfible body, is hot only fpoken of man in ge- 
 nerall , but alfo of Peter and John, and of euery other man in 
 particular, comprehended vndcr the forefaid Subiect, man, 
 
 What is tobefpkenofnone ? 
 
 It is when the Predicate being denyed to bee fpoken 'of the 
 Subie6t,is denied alfo to bee fpoken of any thing contay'ned ifi 
 the Subiec.1 : as when I fay no man is a ftone , here like as this 
 word fionc is denied to bee fpoken of man , foit is alfo denied 
 to be fpoken of Peter and lohn y and of euery other fingular man: 
 out of which Definitions are gathered two necciTary rules. 
 
 Which 
 
o/Logicfy. 13 ? 
 
 tvbtchbcthe)} 
 
 The rule is, whatfoeueris triicly affirmed of bis natural! and 
 propar Subject, isalfio affirmed of all thofe things which arc 
 contayned vnder the laid Subject : the fecond rule is thus, 
 whatfoeuerissdenyedtobefpokenof any Subieit, isalfode- 
 nyed to bee fpoken of euery thing contayned ynder the faid 
 Subiec.1. 
 
 whertto ftrUtthsferulis ? 
 
 The firft rule confirmeth all Syllogifmes affirrriatiuc, and the 
 fecond confirmeth all Syllogifmes ncgatiue. 
 
 . CHAP. II. 
 O'fa Syhgifme, what it is\ hew it is dittided\ and of what 
 p$rts it confifteth* 
 
 Halt u a Sylfogifme ? 
 
 ASyllogiimeisakinde of argment contay- 
 ning three Propofitions, whereof the two firft, 
 commonly called the prcmiiYes , being difpo- 
 ftd according to mood,and figwre a and granted 
 the third Propoiiuon,ocherwife called the condufion, differing 
 from rhe other two, followeth of necefiuy, by -y.crtuc of the 
 prcmilfes:how thefe three Propositions arc called, and what 
 moodeand figuiciSjfhall be declared hereafter; In themeane 
 time marke well the two other points touching this Definition: 
 firft, that the Conclufionmuft,no: be .all onc,but differing from 
 the premiffes : fecondly, that the faid Conclusion 'pee ncce£fs- 
 rily inferred of thcpremiffes ? as in this example : eyei,y fcnfible 
 body is afubfUnce: euery man is a fcnfible bedy: £Yg<*, euery 
 man is a fubflancc : for if the Conclusion were thus : Erg o t eue- 
 ry fenfible bodie is a fubflance , cr euery . man, is a fcnfible bo- 
 dy, the argument fhouldnotbec geed , bccaufeihe Conclu- 
 sion fiiould bee all one with one or the prenfifles^ : the reafoft 
 why the Condufion mull needes bee inferred of the premiffes, 
 and foconfequently follow the fame, fhall bee declared vine 
 you hereafter. 
 
 How us 4 SjBogifme divided According to the Schpolemen 
 
 Firft, 
 
i]6 The fift TSooke 
 
 Firft, they diuide it according to the diucrfiry of the Propo- 
 fitions whereof it confiftcth, into t wo kinds,!;/'*. Categoricall, 
 andHypothcticall, (that is to fay) fimple and compound, caU 
 lingthatfimple, which is made of fimple Propofitions , and 
 that compound, which is made of compound Propofitions * 
 ■what fimple and compound Propofitions are, hath bcene be- 
 fore defined. Againc, they diuide the'fimplc Syllogifme three 
 manner of wayesjSrft, according to the diuerfity of the termes 
 into a common and into a lingular Syllogifme, for if the termes 
 whereof the Syllogifme confiftcth , bee common, or general!, 
 and fpecially themeane terme, orproofe , then that Syllogifme 
 is called a common Syllogifme : but if the meane terme or 
 proofe be Indiuiduum, then that Syllogifmeis faid tobcafin- 
 gular Syllogifme, called of them, Syllcgtfmm expofitorhu, where- 
 of wee (hall fpeake hereafter : Secondly, they diuide a fimple 
 Syllogifme, according to the diuerfity of the figure, into a per- 
 fect, and vnperfedi Syllogifme. 
 
 V/henis it faid tt beytrfett ? 
 
 When it needet'n not to be altered any manncf of w ay,other- 
 wife then it is, that the confequent may manifeftly appeare. 
 
 When it it faitj te be.vnperfctt ? 
 
 When the Confequent doth mot manifeftly appeare, vnleffe 
 the Syllogifme be alrered either by conuerfion , ortranfpofing 
 of the 'ptcmiflcs , whereof w ec fhall fpcake hereafter : Thirdly, 
 they druidea fimple Syllogifme, according to the matter of 
 the Propofitions whereof it is made, into three kindes, that is, 
 into a Syllogifme Defnonftratiuc ; £)iale£Hcall, andSophifti- 
 callrof which three kindes wee (hall fpcake hereafter, and in 
 their proper places; fo as in all, the Schoolemen make foure 
 feuerall diuifions ofa Syllogifme, the firft according to the di- 
 uerfity of the Propofitions, the fecond according to the di- 
 uerfity of the Termes, the third according to the diuerfity of 
 the figure, and the fourth according to the diuerfity of the 
 matter of the Propofitions whereof wee haue fpoken before, 
 and (hewed how manifold fuch matter is: but in themeane 
 time wee will fhew you of what parts a fimple common Syllo- 
 gifme confifteth. 
 
 of 
 
ofLogicke. 137 
 
 Of how many parts doth a fmple SyUogifmt con/jfl ? 
 Of tw«j that is, Matter, and Forme. 
 
 C H A P. III. 
 
 Of the Matter and Fermeefajimple conu 
 mon Syllogifme. 
 
 Hat things Are ftid to he the CMatter of a Syfto- 
 gifmef 
 
 The Matter whereof a Syllogifme is made, 
 are three termes,and three Proportions, which 
 wee called before Materiall principles, and the 
 Forme conftfteth of figure aud Mood, whereof we (hall fpeake 
 in the next Chapter. 
 
 Define what thefe three Terries be. 
 
 The one is called the Maior terme , or Maior extremitie, 
 which is the Predicate of the queftion that is to be proouedrthe 
 other is called the Minor terme , or Minor extrernitie, which is 
 the fubie& of the queftion: and thefc twoTermcs are knit to- 
 gether in the Condufion, and made to agree by helpe of a third 
 Terme, called the Meane terme or proofc. 
 
 What is the Meane terme ? 
 
 It is the proofe of the queftion which is twice repeated be- 
 fore the Condufion, and not once mentioned in the fame. 
 
 Ho w // fuch proofe 1 be found out ? 
 
 Foure manner of way es, (that is to fay) by experience, by 
 quickneffc of wit, by erudition, and by fearching the common 
 places.- 
 
 due examples of all thefe foure wajes. 
 
 x. By experience, as when wee affirme that intemperance is 
 to be fled, becaufe wee know by experience , that it confumeth 
 both body and goods in vaine pleafurcs. 2. By wit, as to proue 
 that the couetoufnefle of wicked men is inhnite: becaufe wit 
 and reafon teacheth vs, that if couetous men did either care for 
 the Law ofGod, or for reafon , they would not exceed fo farrc 
 the bounds thereof. 5. By erudition , as to prooue that riches 
 are not to be defued ouer-greedily , but to ferue nccefluie : be- 
 
 T caufe 
 
i$8 The fift 'Boot? 
 
 caufe it appeareth by the Do&rine of Saint PW, that fuch as 
 greedily fceke to be rich, doe fall into temptation,and into the 
 mares of the Deuill. 4. Byfcarching the common places: as 
 when the proofe of anyqueftion is fetched from any of the 
 common places before taught, as from the gcnerali kind, from 
 the fpeciall kind/rom the difference, or propertie,and fuch like' 
 whereof you haue had examples before. 
 
 Which bee the three Propofittons whereof 4 Syllogifme doth con- 
 
 Pft? 
 
 Thefe three : The Maior,the Minor, and the Conclufion. 
 Which call y oh the Maior t 
 
 That which confifteth of the Predicate of the queftion,other~ 
 wife called the Maior terme, and of the Meane, or Proofe, be- 
 ing both ioyned together in one felfe Propofuion ; which Pro- 
 portion is the whole ftrength of the Syllogifme , for it is the 
 caufe and proofe of the Conclufion. 
 Which c ally on the Minor ? 
 
 That which confifteth of the Subieft of the qucftion called 
 the Minor terme, and of the Mean* or proofe ioyned together, 
 which two Proportions are called by one gencrall name, Pre- 
 mises, becaufe they goe before the Conclufion. 
 What u the Conclnfion ? 
 
 It is that which confifteth of the Predicate , and of the Sub- 
 ject, and is the queftion it felfe concluded. 
 Cjitteextrnple. 
 
 For example, let this bee your queftion : whether man bee a 
 fubftance or not, here you haue two extremes or termes,wher- 
 of fubftance being the Predicate, is the Maior terme , and man 
 being here the fubiedtys the Minor terme : now to prooue that 
 this word Subftance, is properly and naturally fpoken of man, 
 as of his Subie&, and that you may truely knit thefe two ex- 
 tremes , or termes together , you muft feeke out fome caufe 
 or proofe, othcrwife called the Meane terme, which being 
 once found out , the Syllogifme is foone made : let the Meane 
 terme therefore be this word, Senfible body, for euery fenfible 
 bodie is a fubftance, which proofe is fetched from the ge- 
 nerall kinde , then forme your Syllogifme thus : euery fen- 
 fible 
 
o/Logic^e. 139 
 
 fiblebody is a fubftance : but man is a fenfible body : Br go, man 
 is a fubftance. Here you fee that the Meane terme or preofe is 
 twice repeated before the Condufion:(that is to fay)in the Ma- 
 ior Propofition, together with the Predicate of the queftion, 
 called the Maiorterme; andalfointhe Minor Propofi»ion to- 
 gether with the fubiect of the queftion called the Minor terme, 
 and not once mentioned in the Conclusion. Thus much tou- 
 ching the Matter whereof a Syllogifme confiftcth : now of the 
 Forme thereof. 
 
 CHAP. IIII. 
 Of the Forme of a Syllogifme. 
 
 S£fj&3£0ufaid before , that the Forme of a SyUogifme compre- 
 hended Figure, and Aioode ,now therefore tell what 
 Figure and Moode is , and hove many of them there 
 bee. 
 Figure is no other thing, but the diuers placing 
 or difpofing of the meane terme in the premiffes : which figure 
 is three-fold j that is, Firft, Second, and Third : for if the 
 meane terme bee thcSubie£t in the Maior Propofition, and 
 Predicate in the Minor, as in the example aboue,thenitrna- 
 keth a Syllogifme of thefirft figure, and if it chance to bee Pre- 
 dicate in both Propositions, then it maketh a Syllogifme of 
 the fecond figure, as thus : no (tone is a fenfible body : but roan 
 is a fenfible body : Ergo, no man is a (tone : for here the meane 
 terme, Senfiblc body, is Predicate in both Propositions : but if 
 the meane bee fubie6t in both Propositions, then it maketh a 
 Syllogifme of the third figure,as thus : euery man is a fubftance: 
 euery man'is a fenfible body : Frgo, fomc fenfible body is a fub- 
 ftance: for here the meane terme , that is, Man, is fubiect in 
 both the firft Propositions , and to thefe three figures doe be- 
 long certaine Moods. 
 What it a Moods ? 
 
 A Mood, called inLatine modus, amongft the Logicians, is 
 none other but the true ordering afwell of the premifTes, as of 
 the condufion in a Syllogifme , according to due quantitie, 
 
 T a and 
 
J40 The f/t *Boofy 
 
 and quality : what the quantity and quality of a Propofition if, 
 hath beene taught before, Lib. 3 .C*/. I. 
 
 How many Moods doe belong to the firfl figure t 
 To the firft figure doe belong nine Moods, thus named: 
 Barbara : CcUrcnt : Dart) : Ferio : Baraltpton : 
 Celantet : Dab it is : Fapefmo : Frifefomorum. 
 Whereof the firft foure , becaufe they conclude dire&ly, are 
 called perfeft Moods, making perfect Syllogifmes : and the o. 
 ther fiuc , becaufe they conclude vndireC\ly, arc called yn- 
 ■ perfed Moods, making vnperfcdt Syllogifmes. 
 What is to conclude directly or indirectly ? 
 That Mood is faid to conclude dire&ly , when the Maior: 
 terme is made the Predicate, and the Minor terme the fubic& 
 in the conclufion. But if in the conclufion the Minor terme bee 
 the Predicate,and the Maior terme the fubiecl:,then that Mood 
 is faid to conclude directly : as for example : Euery fenfible bo- 
 dy is a fubitance : Man is a fenfible body : Ergo , man is a fub- 
 itance. This Syllogifrae con cludeth dircclly , becaufe the Ma- 
 ior terme, fubftancc, is the Predicate in the conclufion : but if 
 the conclufion were thus ; Ergo, Come fubftancc is a man , then 
 it (hould conclude indirectly : becaufe this word man which 
 was the fubieCt of the qucftion in this conclufion , is made the 
 Predicate. 
 
 How many Moods doe belong to the fecond figure f 
 Thefe foure : C<t(are, ^amejfres, Fefimo, Baroco, 
 How many Moods doe belong to the third Figure ? 
 
 Thefe fixe : Darapti, Felapton, r Difamis, Datifi, Bocardo , and 
 Ferifon: which words being other wife called Terraes of Art, 
 and euery one confifting of three fillablcs, were pujrpofely in- 
 uented by the Schoolemen , to fignific the quantitie and quali- 
 tie of euery Propofition contayned in a Syllogifme, and are 
 briefly fet downe in thefe foure Verfcs following. 
 
 Barbara, Celarent, Darij , Ferio, Baralipton : 
 Celantes t Dabitis, Fapefmo, Frifefomornm : 
 C&fare, (^ameJires,FeJlino i Baroco, Darapti : 
 Felajptort } Difamis, Datip l r Boeardo l Ferijbn. 
 
 It 
 
o/Logicfa 141 
 
 It feemeth to me that thefe names doe not eauenly coujlft each one 
 of three Syllables : for in the two fir ft Verfes there bee two Moods or 
 names , whereof the one called ftzral'ipton , contajneth foure Syllam 
 bles,and the other called Frifefomorum, contaynethfiue Syftables. 
 
 You fay true , but thefc Syllables are no part of thefc two 
 Moods,but ferue only to fill vp the Vcrfe : for this Syllable ton, 
 is no part of the Mood Baraltp: nor the two Syllables morum l 
 .are any p3rt of the Mood Frtfefo. 
 
 What is to be confideredin thefe words of Aft or Moods f 
 
 Two things, (that is to fay) the Vowels and the Confonants 
 contayned in euery Mood, and what they fignifie. 
 
 Which are thofe Vowels, and who/ doe they fignifie ? 
 
 The Vowels bee thefe foure , a, e. i. 0. whereof a.fignifieth an 
 vniuerfall AfHrmatiue, e. an vniuerfall Negatiue , i. a particular 
 Affirmatiue , 0, a particular Negatiue : of all which you 
 (hall hauc examples in the fixt Chapter of this Booke here fol- 
 lowing. 
 
 Which be the Confonants, and what doe they fignifie f 
 
 Wee ftiall hauc caufe to fpeake of them hereafter in a fitter 
 place. 
 
 In themeane time then,gine examples of the Moods belonging to 
 all the Figures. 
 
 Before we giue examples, it fhall not be amifle to fct do wne 
 certaine rules requifite to all the three Figures, as well in gene- 
 rall, as in particular. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of certaine Rules, as well Generally as Special/, belonging 
 to the three Figures. 
 
 r?L«K#"K?^ Ow many General! Rules be there, which are common 
 " t toaH the, three Figures? 
 
 Foure : two of quantitie, and two of quality. 
 Which is the fir ft of thofe that belong to quan- 
 J, titie. 
 In euery Syllogifme it bchooucth eyther one or both of the 
 prcmiffes to be vniuerfall. 
 
 T 3 Whp 
 
iqz Thefift c Boo{e 
 
 frtyfi? 
 
 Becaufe that of two mccre particular Propofitions , nothing 
 by order of Logiek can confequently follow : As for example, 
 This Syliogifmc is not good : Some fcnfible body is a Man, 
 but fome Horfe isa fenfible body : Ergo, a Horfe is a Man. The 
 like reafen is alfo to be vnderftood , when the premifles are in- 
 definite Propoiitions,yea or lingular Propofitions,if the meane 
 tcrme be not likewife lingular, for then it maketh a Syliogifmc 
 expofitorie, whereof we (hall fpeake hereafter. 
 Which U thefeeond Rule that belongeth to quMtttitie 1 
 If any of the premifles be particular, then the conclufion alfo 
 rauft be particular. 
 Why fii 
 
 Becaufe the conclufion being implyed of the premifles, 
 ought alwayes to follow the weaker pfcrt of the fame premif- 
 fes, but the particular is alwayes accounted weaker then the V- 
 niuerfall, and the Negatiue weaker then the Affirmatiue. 
 What is the firfi Rule belonging to qualitie ? 
 Ineuery Syllogifmeitbehoueth eyther one or both of the 
 premifles to be affirmatiue. 
 Why fa? 
 
 Becaufe that of two pure Negatiue Propofitions nothing can 
 be orderly concluded, as in this example : No man is a tree,but 
 noPeare-treeisaman : %», No Peare-treeisatree: which 
 Syllogifme cannot be good, for the premifles are both true,and 
 the conclufion is falfe. 
 
 Whieh is thefecond %ule belonging to qualitie ? 
 If any of the premifles be Negatiue,chen the conclufion muft 
 alfo be Negatiue. 
 Why fo ? 
 
 Bec/ufe (as it hathbeene faid before) the conclufion muft 
 follow the weaker part. 
 
 Which be the fpeciall Rules belonging to the three Figures ? 
 In thefirft foure Moods of the firft Figure dire&ly conclu- 
 ding the Minor, may not be a Negatiue, nor thtMaior parti- 
 cular, but vniuerfail. 
 
 In the fecond Figure, the Maior muft not bee particular, 
 
 and 
 
ofLogicty. 143 
 
 and one of the premifles muft bee a Negatiue. 
 
 In the third Figure , the Minor muft not bee aNegatiue, nor 
 theconclufionvniuerfall: but as for the quantitie andqualitie 
 of euery Proposition In cuery kindc of Syllogifme, of what Fi- 
 gure foeuer it bee, it ftiall plainely appeare by the Vowels , or 
 rather Syllables of the Moods, otherwife called words of Art, 
 annexed to the examples hercafterfollowing. 
 
 Firft, giue examples of SyUogifmes of the firft Figure , and of bit 
 fottreptrfefi Moods dire&ly concluding* 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Examples of the four ef erf eti Moods belonging to 
 
 the firfi Figure, 
 
 'H e firft Mood of the firft Figure, is when three 
 termes being giuen , a Syllogifme is made of 
 two vniuerfall Affirmatiucs directly conclu- 
 ding an vniuerfall Affirmariue , as this Syllo- 
 gifme hecre following : the termes whereof 
 beethefe, Scnfible body , Subftance, and Man 
 placed in this fort. 
 
 Bar- Euery fenfible body is a fubjfance, ~} 
 
 ba- But euery man is a fenfible body : > 
 
 ra. Ergo, Euery man is afubftance* jj 
 
 The name of this Mood is called Barbara, diuided into three 
 Syllables,placedinthemargent right againft the Syllogifme, 
 to fhew the quantity and quality of euery Proposition , accor- 
 ding to tbe Significations of the Vowels contayned in euery 
 Syllable : and fo are all other names of the Moods hcreafcer 
 following. 
 
 The fecondMood is, when three termes being giuen, a Syl- 
 logifme is made of an vniuerfall Negatiue Maior, and of an 
 vniuerfall Affirmatiue Minor, directly concluding an vniuerfall 
 Negatiue : As for example , let the termes bee thefc : Senfiblc 
 Body, a Man, a Stone, and the Syllogifme thus : 
 
 Ce- 
 
144. 7befift < Booke 
 
 Ce- J^o fen fib le body is aflame, ^ 
 
 la- But entry man is a fenfible body : S. 
 
 rent. Ergo t Nomanu aflone, \ 
 The name of this Mood is Celarent, 
 
 The third Mood is, when three termes being giucn, aSyllo- 
 gifmeis made of an vniuerfall AfiirmatiueMaior,andof a par- 
 ticular Aflfirmatiue Minor, directly concluding a particular Af- 
 firmatiue : As for example,lct thefc be the termes : Scnfible Bo- 
 dy, Subftance, and Man, and the Syllogifmc thus ; 
 
 Da- Entry fenpble body isafubflance 9 2 
 
 ri- Butfome man is a fenftblo body : v 
 
 3 . Ergo, Some man is afnbflanee, ^ 
 The name of this Mood is Darij, 
 
 The fourth Mood is, when three termes being giuen , a Syl- 
 legifme is made of an vniuerfall Negatiue Maior, and a particu- 
 lar Affirmatiue Minor , dire&ly concluding a particular Nega- 
 tiue : As for example, let thefe bee the termes : Senfiblc Body, 
 Man, and Stone : and the Syllogifme thus : 
 
 Fe- No fenfible body is a (tone, ^ 
 
 ri- But feme man is a fenfible body : ^ 
 
 o. Ergo, Some man is aftone. ^ 
 The name of this Mood is Ferie. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 Examples ef the fine vnperfe8 Moods of the 
 firfi Figure, 
 
 Me examples of the fine CMoodes of the firfl Figure 
 dircftly concluding. 
 
 The firfl: Imperfect Moode of the firft Fi- 
 gure indirectly concluding, is when the Ma- 
 ior and Minor, being both vniuerfall Affir- 
 -/matiucs,doe conclude indirectly a particular Af- 
 firmatiue, as thus : 
 
 Ba- 
 
ofLogicke. 14-5 
 
 Ba- Entry fenfible body is a fubflance, p- 
 
 ra- Ettery man is a, fenfible body : > 
 
 lip. Ergo, Seme fubflance is a man, , ^ 
 
 The name of this Mood is Baraliptcn, whereof the laft fyl- 
 Iable 3 r^«,is only to fill vp the Vcrfe,as hath beene faid before. 
 
 The fecond Imperfect Mood,is when a Syliogifmc is made 
 of an vniuerfall Negatiue Maior,and an vniuerfal Aflftrmatiue 
 Minor, indirectly concluding an vniuerfall Negatiue,as thus: 
 
 Ce- No fenfible b§dy is a tree, ~p 
 
 Ian- Ettery man is tt fenfible body: > 
 
 tis. Ergo, No tree is a man, ^ 
 
 The name of this Mood is (felantis. 
 The third Imperfect Mood , is when a Syliogifmc is made 
 of an vniuerfall AfTirmatiue Maior, and of 3 particular Affir- 
 matiue Minor,indirectly concluding a particular AfTirmatiue, 
 as thus: 
 
 Da - Enery fenfible bodie is a fubflance, . 2 
 
 bi- S om« man is a fenfible body : > 
 
 tis. Ergo,5W<? fubflance is a man. ^j 
 
 The name of this Mood is Dabnis. 
 The fourth Imperfect Mood, is when a Syliogifmc is made 
 ©fan vniuerfall AfTirmatiue Maior, and of an vniuerfall Ne- 
 gatiue Minor, indirectly concluding a particular Negatiue,, 
 as thus: 
 
 Fa- Euery fenfible body is a fubflance , "^ 
 
 pef- No tree is a fenfible body: V 
 
 mo. Ergo, Some fubflance is not a tree, ^ 
 
 The name of this Mood is Fapefmo. 
 The fift Imperfect Mood , is when a Syllogifme is made of 
 a particular AfTirmatiue Maior, and of an vniuerfall Negatiue 
 Minor, indirecTly concluding a particular Negatiue. as thus:. 
 
 Fri- Some fenfible bodie is a fttbflance; ^ 
 
 fe - "But no tree is a fenfible body : V 
 
 fo. Ergo ; Some fubflance is not a tree, \ 
 
 ¥ The 
 
\^6 Tbefift < Boo{e 
 
 The name of this Mood is Frifefomorum, whereof the two 
 laft fyllables (a« hath bcene faid before) are only put to make 
 vp the Verfe, 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 Of the fottre t_Moods belonging to the fe- 
 cond Figure. 
 
 > lite examples of the faure UMoods belonging to the 
 fecond Figure. 
 
 The firft Mood of the fecond Figure , is 
 when a Syllogifme is made of an vniuerfall 
 Negatiue Maior, and of an vniuerfall Aflfir- 
 matiue Minor, directly concluding an vniuer- 
 fall Negatiue c hus : 
 
 Ce- No flone is afenfible body, ~1 
 
 fa- Eue ry man is afenfible body \ > 
 
 re. Ergo, No wants a flone. j 
 
 The name of this Mood is Cefare. t 
 
 The fecond Mood, is when a Syllogifme is made of an v- 
 niuerfall Aflirmatiuc Maior, and of an vniuerfall Affirmatiue 
 Minor; directly concluding an vniuerfall Negatiue, as thus: 
 
 Ca- Euery man is afenfible body, p 
 
 mef- But no flone is afenfible body : V 
 
 tres. Ergo, No flone is a man. 3 
 The name of this Mood is Cameflres. 
 
 Tne third Mood is when a Syllogifme is made of an vni- 
 ueFfall Negatiue Maior, and of a particular Aflirmatiue Mi- 
 nor, directly concluding a particular Negatiue, as thus : 
 
 Fef- 'Ho flone is afenfible body *, y* 
 
 ti- But fame man is a fenfible body \ V 
 
 no. Ergo, Some man is not a flone. j 
 Thenamc of this Mood is Feftino. 
 
 The fourth Mood, is when a Syllogifme is made of a n v "!" 
 
ofLogic{e. ' 147 
 
 uerfafl Arfirmatiue Maior, and of a particular Minor, dire£Iy 
 concluding a particular Negatiuc, as thus : 
 
 Ba- Everyman is a fenfible body , f. 
 
 ro- Butfome fioneh not a Jen fib le body 1 y- 
 
 co. Ergo, Some ft one is not a man, \ 
 The name of this Mood is Baroco. 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Of the fix Moods belonging to the third Figure. 
 
 ^&$£&^jj&f fte examples of the fix Moods belonging to the third 
 ** Figure. 
 
 The firft is when a Syllogifme is made of an 
 vniuerfall Aftirmatiue Maior,and of an vniuer- 
 WdKSA&Sl^l fall Aftirmatiue Minor , directly concluding a 
 particular Aftirmatiue, as thus : 
 
 Da- Euery man is a fubftance, 11 
 
 rap- But euery man is a (enfible body : > 
 
 ti. Ergo, Some (enfible body is afubftance, jj 
 The name of this Mood is Darapti. 
 
 The fecond Mood, is when a Syllogifme is made of an v- 
 niuerfallNegatiue Maior, andoi an vniuerfall Aftirmatiue 
 Minor, directly concluding a particular Negatrae, as thus : 
 
 Fe- No man is a ftcne, ~7- 
 
 1 ap- But cnery man is a fub fiance : V 
 
 ton. Ergo, Some fubftanceis not aflone* j> 
 The name of this Mood is Felapton. 
 
 The third Mood, is when a Syllogifme is made of a parti- 
 cular Aftirmatiue Maior, and of an vniuerfall Aftirmatiue Mi. 
 nor, diredtly concluding a particular Aftirmatiue, as thus : 
 
 Di. Somemmn'ts afubftance y *2 
 
 fa- But euery man is a f enfible body : \- 
 
 mis . Ergo, Some fenfible body is afubftance. 3 
 
 V 2 The 
 
148 The fi/t ■$oo{e 
 
 The name of this Mood is Difamu. 
 The fourth Mood, is when a Syllogifme is made of an vni- 
 uerfall Aflirmatiue Maior, and of a particular Affhmatiuc 
 Minor, concluding a particular Affirmatiue > as thus : 
 
 • D3- EnerymAnUa fubfttnce, 'p. 
 
 ti r Bf4t fome wants a fenfible body: > 
 
 ii. Ergo, Some fenfible body is a fubftance. Sj 
 
 The name of this Mood is Datift. 
 The fift Mood, is when a Syllogifme is made of a particu- 
 lar Negatiue Maior, and of an vniuerfall Aifirnlatiue Minor, 
 dire&ly concluding a particular Negatiue, as thus : 
 
 Bo- Some wants not a ft one, ~7- 
 
 car- 'But entry man is a fenfible body. > 
 
 do. Ergo, Some fenfible bo&y is not a ft one, ^ 
 
 The name of this Mood is Bocardo. 
 The fixt Mood, is when a Syllogifme is made of an vniuer- 
 fall Negatiue Maior, and of a particular Afm matiue Minor, 
 directly concluding a particular Negatiue, as thus : 
 
 Fe- No man is aftone, *?> 
 
 ri- But fome man is a fenfible body : > 
 
 Ion . E rgo, Some fenfible body is not aftone, \ 
 
 The name of this Mood is Ferifon, 
 Thus you haue all the three Figures, together with their 
 Moodes plainly fet forth with examples, 
 
 C H A P. X. 
 
 Of a Syllogifme expo ft or ie, 
 
 N d now becaufe a Syllogifme expository is 
 faid to bee a Syllogifme of the third figure : I 
 thinkc it moft meete togiueyouan example 
 thereof eucn here: for I haue already defined 
 the fame before. 
 
 Te a, 1 remember y 8 faidit was exfofurie.vuhen 
 theproofe or mcane terme is an IndiuLduum: but if yegiut exam- 
 pls % 1 /ball the better vnderftnudit. 
 
 Let 
 
ofLogickg. 14.9 
 
 Let this then be your example, to proouc ibme men to bee 
 both Orators and Philosophers, by a Syllogifme expofitorie 
 thus •. Cicero was an Orator: but Cicero wasaPhilofopher : 
 Ergofovxe men are both Orators and Philofophers:againc,to 
 ptooue that Tome rich men are not wife , thus : (fraffu* was 
 not wife , but Craffus was rich : Ergo , fome rich men are not 
 wife. Thus you lee that this kind of Syllogifroeferueth to 
 proue both affirmatiuely and negatiuely,as ic were by way of 
 example. 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 
 t/fnObleftien concerning the three figures, and 
 
 CMoodes belonging to the fume, 
 
 O what purpofe ferue fo manj figures audmoodtj, 
 fob the first figure % And the foure firfi moodes be- 
 longing to the fame Are onely perfett , yes ; and fie 
 lerfett indeed, as the LMathemAtietAns in feekwg 
 out the truth of any probleme, willvfe none other, 
 becAufe the firfi figure alone doth Juffice to conclude all kinds of 
 froblemes whatfoeuer they be, whereby i\fhouldfe erne, that the We 
 other figures, with their moodes, be fuperfiuoiu ? 
 
 They be not altogether Superfluous; for as the firft figure 
 ferueth chiefly and onely to conclude an vniuerfall affirma- 
 tive, fo the fecond figure ferueth to conclude an vniuerfall nc- 
 gatiue , and the third figure to conclude both a particular af- 
 firmatiue, and alio a particular negatiuej as you may pcrceiue 
 very well by the examples before rehearfed ; neither bee the 
 fifreene vnperfect. moodes fo vnperfcel: , but that they may 
 eafily bee reduced vnto the foure perfect, by one of thele 
 wayes heere following , (that is to fay) cither by conuerfion, 
 or by tranfpofing of the premifles : or clfe by a Syllogifme 
 leading to impoltibilitie, of which three wayes of Reducti- 
 on we 'come now to fpeake: by which things it doth plainly 
 appearc what difference there is betwixt a perfect and vnper- 
 fe£t Syllogifme ; for the perfect Syllogifme hath no need of 
 thefc helpes to make the Conclufion mamfeft , as hath beene* 
 fa id before. 
 
 V 3 Of 
 
15© 7hefift c Booke 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 OfReduBion, and of the kinds thereof, and alfo of the Jig- 
 
 nif cation ofcertaine confonants in the words of 
 
 Art fermng to ReduBUn. 
 
 '<®&® m Hat is Redtittion ? 
 
 Reduction here is none other thing , but a 
 declaration, proouin" or fhewing the good- 
 neflfe of an vnperfeel: SylJogifme, by a Syllo- 
 gifmc of a perfect Mood. 
 
 How manifold is fitch Reduction ? 
 
 Twofold; for it is cither ofTcnfiue, or elfe by impoflibility. 
 
 What is Reduction offenfitte ? 
 
 Reduction orYentiue is, when aSyllogifme is reduced to his 
 perfection, eyther by conuerfion or by tranfpofingthepre- 
 miffes, or elfe by both at once. 
 
 What meane yee by tranfpofing of thepremiffes} for at touching 
 confer fion ye hauefpoken thereof before, Lib. ^.cap. 6. 
 
 ThepremilTes arefaidtobe tranfpofed, whenthcMaioris 
 put in the Minors place; or contrarivvife the Minor into the 
 Maiors place. 
 
 What is Reduction by impoffibility ? 
 
 Reduction by impoflibilitie, is, when the goodneffe ofthe 
 Syllogifme is fo prooued , as the aduerfary denying the fame, 
 mu ft needs be brought r-o fome abfurditie, as to confefle two 
 Contradictories to be both true at once,or fome proposition 
 tobcfalfcjwhich he hath confefled before to be true,orisma- 
 nifcftlytrueof itfelfe. But firft we will fpeake of Reduction 
 ofFenfiue,and then of Reduction by impoffibility; and becaufe 
 that Reduction oftenfiue is done fometime by conuerfion.and 
 fometime by tranfpofition, & fometime by both at oncetand 
 againe, that fometime one ofthe premifles,fometime both,& 
 fometime no more but the conclusion onely is conuerted, and 
 that fometime by fimple conucrfion, & fometime by conuer- 
 fionperaccidens : the Schoolemen for eafement of the memo* 
 Ty,haue made eight ofthe Confonants,befides the Vowels in 
 the words of Art before mentioncd,to be (ignificatiue,and to 
 
 declare 
 
ofLogicfy. .-iji 
 
 declare how euery propofition ought to bee reduced. 
 
 For firft, thcfe foure Confonants, b.c.d.f. ( with one of the 
 which euery vnperfect Mood doth begin) doe (hew trm fuch 
 vnperfect Moodes ought to bee reduced into thofe perfect 
 Moodes, which doe begin with the like letter, as, 
 
 Baralipton, Baroco, Bocardo, into Btrbar , 
 Celantes,(fcfare, Camejlres, into Celareut, 
 Dabitis, Darapti, Difamis, Datiji fmto Darij, 
 Fapefmo^Trifejomorum^elapton ^Venfon^F efiino into Darij ( 
 
 Which be the other f our e Confonants, and what do they fgnifie ? 
 
 The other foure Confonants put betwixt the Vowels, bee 
 thefe,/./> m.c. whereof/, (ignifieth fimple conueriion, (that is 
 to fay) that the Vowell, which next before this Confonant is 
 to be (imply conuerted,/>.fignifieth conuertion per accidens t m. 
 bctokeneth tranfpofition of the premifles,c. in the latter end 
 or midft of the Mood, bctokeneth Reduction by impoflibili- 
 tie, as in Baroco and Bocardo. 
 
 due examples ^andjherv hove fuch Redntlion is to be wade. 
 • Fir^,as touching redudtton by conuerfion, Cefare is reduced 
 into Ceigrent by fimple conuerfion of the Maior : as this Syl- 
 logifmcis Cefare. 
 
 Ce- T^o tree is a fenfible body, "7- 
 
 fa- But entry man is afenfible body : K» htch is reduced 
 
 re. Er go, No man is a tree. ^ *? CeUrm > th * s * 
 
 Ce- No fenfible body is a tree, ~2- 
 
 la- But euery man is a fenfible body : S* 
 
 rent. Er go, No man is a tree. ^ 
 
 And Camefires is reduced into Ce/arent t by fimple conucr- 
 ting the Conclufion, and alfo by tranfpofing the premifies,as 
 this Syllogilme in Camefires. 
 
 Ca- Euery man is afenfible body, /*,.,. j ? 
 mcf- But no tree is a fenfible body : K^tchts reduced mt- 
 tres. Ergo, No tree fs 4 man. \ t0 Ctl*r«t, tbm : 
 
 Ce- 
 
ija The fift Boo{e 
 
 Ce- *H_9 [enable body is a tree, ^ 
 
 la- *Bu$ euery man is a fenftble body : > 
 
 rent. Ergo, No msn is a tree, Jj 
 
 Tefltne is reduced into Ferio,by (imply conuerting the Ma- 
 lor, as in this Sy llogifme in Fefimo. 
 
 Fef- No fl one is a fenftble body y 7 
 
 ti- But feme man is a fenftble bodyh » hich ""*""* '»'» 
 
 no. Ergo, Somemanisnot a floncS$ Fertotbus, 
 
 Fe- J 1 ^ fenftble body is aflone, "7- 
 
 ri- But fome man is a fenftble body : > 
 
 o. Ergo, Some man is not aflone. jr 
 
 < Darapti\s reduced from Dari) , by conuerting the minor 
 per accidens ,as this Syllogifmc in Darapti. 
 
 Da- Euerymanisafubflanee, "? , . , , 
 
 rap- But euery man is a fenftble body. K^ichts reduce A 
 
 ti. Evgojomefenfiblebedyisafubftace.y"' Dar V tbH,m 
 
 Da- Euerymanisafubflanee, "7- 
 
 ri- But fome fenftble body is a man : V 
 
 j. Ergo, Some fenftble body is afubfiance. jr 
 
 Ferifon is reduced into Ferio, by fimple conuerfion of the 
 minor, as this Syllogifme in Ferifen, 
 
 Fe- Neman is aflone, ~7 ■ . . . , 
 
 ri- 'But feme man u a fenfible body ■ C"*** " "<*»«* 
 fon. Etgo,Smtfi»JMe body is net aflone !^ lHt0 Fem tbH4 ' 
 
 Fe- iV* w*» rr a fiene y "7 
 
 ri- But fome fenfible body is a man : > 
 
 fon. Ergo,«5V*w* fenftble body is not aflone. ^5 
 
 And fo forth in all the reft, according as the fignificatitie 
 Confonants doe direct you, 
 
 Of 
 
of Logicke. ijj 
 
 CH AP.'XIIL 
 Of Redntiisn by Imfoflibilitie, 
 
 Owu Reduction by imp ffibility made ? 
 
 By ioyning the Contradiftorie of the conclu- 
 fion to one of the prcmiffes , and to difpofe the 
 fame according to fome one of the perfect 
 Moodesof thefirft figure, in fuchfort as you 
 iniy thereby make your Conclufion contradictory to the pre-^ 
 mivTe which you left out , and was granted by your aduerfary, 
 whereby your aduerfary is brought into an abfurditie, to con- 
 feffe two contradictories, to be true both at once. 
 (jitte examples. 
 
 As for example , if your Aduerfary would deny this Syllo- 
 gifme in Bareco, euery man is a fcnfible body : but fome tree is 
 not a fenfible body : Erg§ , fome tree is not a man : then you 
 may reduce it to the firft Moode of the firft figure, which is 
 Barbara, by making the contradictory of your Conclufion to 
 be the Minor of your Syllogifmc in this fort, Euery man is a 
 fcnfiblc body : but euery tree is a man: Ergo , euery tree is a 
 fenfible body : which argument hee cannot denie, becaufe hee 
 hath granted the Minor to be true : for if this Propofitron/ome 
 tree is not a man, bee falfe, then this propofition,euery tree is a 
 man, muft needs bee true, for two Contradictories cannot bee 
 both true at once , and two true premiflfes muftneedesinferre 
 a true Conclufion; and note that according to the diuerfitic 
 of the figures, the Contradictory of the Conclufion is diuerfiy 
 difpofed (that is to fay ) made eyther Maior or Minor accor- 
 dingly ; for in all the Moodesof the fecond figure it mult bee 
 made the Minor, the former Maior being ilill referued; and in 
 the third figure it muft bee the Maior , the former Minor being- 
 ftill referued. 
 
 To which of the perfett Mood.es is euery vnf erf eH Meeds to bee 
 reduced by impeJfibiUtie? - 
 
 To know this, it fhall bee needfull to learne , firft, the vfe oi 
 certainc words compounded of diuers fillables, and inucnted 
 by theSchooiemen for this purpofe. 
 
 X Wljuh 
 
154 Thefifi Booty 
 
 JVhtchbethofemrds? 
 
 The words bee thefe contayned in this Verfe following, wr- 
 fciebatis: o die bam : let are Romania : whereof the fttfttiefciebatM, 
 contayning fiue fillables,reprefenteth the flue vnperfe& Moods 
 of the firlt figure : odiebam hauing foure fillables, betokeneth 
 thefourc vnperfeilMoodesof the fecond figure: letareRoma- 
 nk t contayning fixe fillables, fignifieth the fixe vnperfect Moods 
 of the third figure : in all which words the foure Vowels, a. c. i. 
 o. doe (till retaine their old fignifications before taught, fcruing 
 here chiefly to fhew the quantitie and qualitie of euery Con- 
 clusion, for euery vnperfecl: Moodc muft bee reduced to that 
 perfedt Moode of the firft figure , which hath fuch Conclufion 
 as that vowell of the fillable reprefenting that vnpcrfec-1 Mood 
 doth fignifie : as for example in this word nefciebatis , here you 
 fee , that in the fillable nef. reprefenting the firft vn perfect 
 Moode called before Baralipton, the vowell e. fignifying an vni- 
 uerfall negatiue , doth fhew that this Moode is to bee reduced 
 into £V/4r*»f,whofe coclufion is an yniuerfall negatiue,fo as by 
 the order of the fillables in the word nefciebatis , together with 
 the fignification of the vowels contained in the fa id fillables, 
 you may plainly perceiue that Baralipton y is to bee reduced into 
 Celarer.t: Celantes into Dart] , Dabitis into Celarent , Fapefmo 
 mto r Barbar'a , FrtJ'elon into T^arij. The like obferuation and 
 consideration is to be had in the other words , reprefenting the 
 reft of the imperfect Moodesof the fecond and third figure:for 
 odiebam appoint eth Cefve to be reduced into Ferio t Camejlresto 
 X>arjj t Fejlino to Celarent t Biraco to 'Barbara : againe, letare Rt- 
 manis appointeth Darapti to Celirent, Fclayton to Barbara, Dtf- 
 amis to Celarent^ Datfjl to Ftrto, Bocardo to Barbara , and Feri- 
 fon to Dari), whereof I giue you no examples , becaufe I would 
 haueyoutoexercife your felfe in examining the former exam- 
 ples of the three figures, and to fee how you can reduce each vn- 
 perfedl; Moode, to his perfect Moode by impoffibilitic , accor- 
 ding to thefe fhort Rules here fet downe. 
 
 The Schoolemen , after they haue taught the vfe of the 
 Moodes, and of reduction, doe immediately treate of a Syllo- 
 gifmejinade in oblique cafes, and alfoof the fixe habilities, 
 
 and 
 
o/Logic{e, i# 
 
 and three defers of a Syllogifme : all which I willingly patfe 
 ouerwithfilence, as things more curious then profitable , for 
 truly I know not whereto the Syllogifme made in oblique Ca- 
 fes, doth ferue more then for varietie fake. 
 
 CHAP. XIIII. 
 Of Syltogifmes made in oblique Cafes , an d of the fixe Habili- 
 ties, and three defetts of a Syllogifme. 
 
 Hat mcAns you by eblique.Cafes ? 
 
 You learned in your Accidents, that euerie 
 Nounc hath fixe Cafes, (that is to fay) the No- 
 minatiue, the Genitiue, the Datiue, the Accufa- 
 tiue,the Vocatiue, and the Ablatiue, whereof the 
 Nominatiueisonely right, and all the reft are called oblique: 
 as this is a Syllogifme made in oblique Cafes: euery drawing 
 beaft belonged-) to man, or is the beaft of man : but an Oxe is a 
 drawing beaft : Ergo, an Oxc belongeth to man, or is the beaft 
 ofman:and as for the fixe liabilities called fexpotejijtes Sytlo- 
 gifmi, they are but meanes to prooue the goodnefle of one Syl- 
 logifme by another, ortofhew which is more vniuerfall, or 
 comprehendethmore then another," or to conclude a truth of 
 falfe premises, which God wot is a filly kind of condufion,the 
 beft parts of which habilities are more eafily learned by the 
 rules and examples before giuen , then by thofe that they fet 
 downe in their Treatifes touching the fame. Likewife the three ' 
 defecls, are none other but Elencbes or Fallaxes , whereof there 
 bee thirteene kinds fet downe by Ariftotle himfelfe, whereof 
 we (hal fpeake hereafter,in their place,fo as they might fay that 
 there are thirteene defects as well as three,and therefore leauing 
 to trouble you with thefc things, I mind here to treat of a com- 
 pound Syllogifme. 
 
 X z CHAP. 
 
i5<5 Tbefift c Boo\e 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 
 Of a compound Syllogifme , and of the diners kinds 
 thereof, 
 
 Hat k a compound Syllogifme , and bow many kinds 
 ) thereof be theft ? 
 
 A compound SylJogifmc is that which is made 
 of compound Proportions, whereof there bee 
 three forts , fo they make three kinds of com- 
 pound Syllogifmcs,(that is to fay)conditionall, difiunctiue,and 
 copulatiuc. 
 
 Of how many farts doth a compound Sj/Hogtfme conjifi ? 
 
 Of three, as well as a fimple Syllogifme, that is, of the Ma- 
 ior, contayning two fimple Propositions , and of the Minor, re- 
 peating the one part of the Maior,and of the Conclusion, con- 
 cluding the other part of the Maior , as in this example : if this 
 woman hath had a childe, fhee hath layne with a man : but fhee 
 hath had a childe : Ergo, (he hath layne with a man. 
 
 How is the truth of a compound Syllogifme to be found out f 
 
 By reducing the fame into a fimple Syllogifme thus ; euery 
 woman that hath had a childe, hath layne with a man: but this 
 woman hath had a child* 1 : Ergo, {he hath layne with a man. 
 
 o/4re there no other kinds of compound Syllogifmes ? 
 
 No, if you confider the order of concluding^ therebeebut 
 three kinds or wayes, (that is to fay) conditionall, difiunftiue 
 and copulatiuc • but ifyou confider the yarietie in vttering fuch 
 Sy Ilogifmes, you may make fcucn forts or wayes, whereof three 
 appertaine to the conditional! , two to the difiun&iue, and two 
 co the copulatiuc 
 
 .Which is thefirft way> 
 
 The firft way is of the Antecedent, which being granted, 
 the conicquent mufl: needes follow, both affirmatively, and ne- 
 gatiucly : Amrmatiuely thus:ifhebe godly,heisblefTed: hee is 
 godly, therefore bleflcd : negatiuely thus , if he bee not godly 3 
 hee fhalhiot bee bleiTed , but hee is not godly : Ergo } hee is not 
 blciTed. 
 
 Which is thefecondwaj? 
 
 The 
 
of Logicfy. iyy 
 
 The fecond way is of the Confequent, which failing, the An- 
 tecedent rnuft alfo needs faile,as thus :If hebe wifc,he is free; but 
 he is not free: Srgo, not wife. 
 
 Which is the third way > 
 
 The third way , is when by granting the Antecedent, the 
 Confcquent faileth, as thus : If he be not wife, hce is wretched; 
 but he is wife : £ rgo y not wretched. 
 
 Which is the fourth way ? 
 
 The fourth way, is when the former part of the Maior Pro- 
 portion di/iundiue being put, the latter part is cleane taken a- 
 way, as thus : He is ey ther good or euill ; but hceis good : £r- 
 £», not euill. . 
 
 Which is thefft way ? 
 
 The fift way, is when the former part of the Difiun&iue be- 
 ing taken away,the latter part muft needes ftand, as thus:Hec is 
 ey ther good or euill ; but he is not good : Ergo , he is euill ; for 
 all Syllogifmes Difiun&iue, are made for the moft part of patts 
 repugnant,whereof there can be no more, but one true part. 
 
 Which is thefixt way} ■ 
 
 Thefixt way, is by putting a Negatiue before the Coniunc- 
 tion copulatiue, fo as it maketh the Antecedent to ftand,and ta- 
 keth away the Confequent, as thus: Heeisnot both wife and 
 wretched; but he is-wife : Ergo, not wretched. 
 
 Which is thtfenenth way ? 
 
 The feuenth way,is when the Negatiue is placed in like man- 
 ner before theConiundt'ton copulatiue, but yet fo as the Ante- 
 cedent being taken away, the Confequent doth ftand, as thus : 
 Heeisnot both wife and wretched; but hee is not wife : Ergo, 
 wretched. 
 
 X 3 CHAP. 
 
ij8 Tbefift c Boo{e 
 
 CHAP. XVI. 
 
 Of a Confequent i and by xehatmeanes and rules the good- 
 tteffe thereof is to be knovrnc, 
 
 Vt fith the goodnelTe of an Hypothetical! Syllo- 
 gtfme dependeth vpon the goodnefle of the Con- 
 , fequent : it fliall not be amiffe to treat heere of a 
 ) Confequent, and firft to define what it is , and to 
 ' fhevv how it is diuided. * 
 What is & (fonfequent } 
 
 AConfequent, is a fpsech confifting of fuch parts as doc 
 follow one another, and are ioyned together with fome ratio- 
 nail, (that is to fay) an inferring or imploying Coniunction, as 
 Erjro t then, therefore, and fuch like. 
 
 How many farts are ree^uifte in a Confequent ? 
 Three, that is, the Antecedent , the Confequent, and the in- 
 ferring Signe or Note,for of thefe three parts euery Confequent 
 confifteth. 
 
 Hon? is it diuided > 
 
 Into two, that is, Good and Euill : againe, the good is diui- 
 ded into two, that is formall and Materiall. 
 When is it [aid to be Formall} 
 
 When the Antecedent being true, the Confequent dothne- 
 ccflarily follow thereof, as when I fay : This woman hath had a 
 child, Ergo t fhc hath layne with a man. 
 When ts it J aid to be Mat er tali ? 
 
 When the Confequent doth not of neceflitic, but cafually 
 follow, the Antecedent being true :asS<w<#«walketh abroad: 
 £rgo,\t isfaire weather. 
 
 Whereupon doth the goodneffe of a Confequent chief ely defend} 
 It dependeth not fo much of the truth of the Antccedent,and 
 of the Confequent, as of the neceflary conncxion,or knitting of 
 them together : and if the fame be in forme of a Syllogifme , ic 
 requireth alfo the precepts of Mood and Figure before taught 
 tobeobferued. 
 
 Ho* 
 
ofLogic^e. 159 
 
 Mow elfeJbaU 4 ftfM* know whether a Cenfequent be good or not f 
 
 By examining the fame with the Maximes or gcncrall Rules 
 of the places : whereof fome doe yceld proofes or caufes neccf- 
 fary.fome probable, and fome only conie&urall. 
 
 Iffy at rules doe the Schoolemenfet dswne to know a goood Confe- 
 quent ? 
 
 They fet downe fome more, fome leiTe, but Cefarins only re- 
 citeth two, which are thefe: The firftis, ifa Confequent doth 
 neceflarily follow of his Antecedent , then the contrary of the 
 Antecedent muft necdes neceflarily follow the contrarie of the 
 Confequent: As for example, becaufe this is a good Confequenc 
 to fay,it is a man : Ergo,\t is a fenfible body : it is a good Confe- 
 quent to fay, it is no fenfible body: Ergo, it is no man :the rca- 
 fon thereof is, becaufe the contrary of the Confequent and the 
 Antecedent cannot bee both true together, but one of them 
 muft needs be falfe.Thc fecond rule is, that whatfoeuer follow- 
 eth vpon a good Confequent,muft needes alfo follow vpon the 
 Antecedent thereof: As for example/if it be a good Confequent 
 to fay,it is a man:£ rgo,\t is a fenfire body :ye may afwell fay,if 
 it be a fenfible body : Ergo, it is a fubftance : and fith that a fenfi- 
 ble body is a fubftance.you may therefore as well conclude that 
 a man is a fubftance.To thefe rules you may adde alfo the third, 
 which is,that of true things, nothing can follow but truth: but 
 ©f falfe thingSjfometime that which is falfe, and fometime that 
 which is true, as hath beene faid before : and yet fuch truth fol- 
 loweth not by vertue of the falfe premifcs,but becaufe the con- 
 clufion or Confequent is a true Propofition of it felfe: As in this 
 this example. .Euery fenfible body is a tree, but euery Pcare- 
 tree is a fenfible body :Ergo t euery Pearc-trec is a tree. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
itfo The f/t ( Boo{e 
 
 CHAP. XVII. 
 Of 4 Sjllogifmi Demonf ratine. 
 
 | Ttherto wee haue treated of a Syllogifme, accor- 
 ding to the firft three of the foure diuifiont 
 thereof, before mentioned : for if yce remember 
 well, wee faid that according to the firft diluti- 
 on , a Syllogifme is either Categoricall or Hy- 
 pothetical!, according to the fecond diuifion , eyther commom 
 or expository, according to the third diuifion , either perfect or 
 vnperfedt and according to the fourth diuifion, cither Demon- 
 firatiue > Dialec^icall, or Sophifticall, whereof we come now to 
 fpeake, and firft of a Syllogifme Demonftratiue. 
 
 What u a Syllogifme Demonftratiue ? 
 
 A Syllogifme Demonftratiue is that which is made of nc- 
 cefiary , immediate , true , certainc, and infallible Propofi- 
 tions , being firft and fo knovvne , as they neede none other 
 proofc. 
 
 fVhat meane yen by necejfary and immediate Prepojttietts ? 
 
 Ncceffary Propofitious be thofe which cannot beotherwife, 
 as thofe which doe confift of the gencrall kinde, of the fpcciall 
 kinde , of the difference , or of the propertie , as hath beene 
 faid before : and therefore 9s4riflotle makcth a difference be- 
 twixt a Demonftratiue and a Diale£ticall Proportion : for a 
 Demonftratiue Proportion confifting of matter naturall, is ne- 
 ceffarily true, and cannot be otherwife, but a Diale&icallPro. 
 pofition , confifting of matter contingent, or cafuall , is oncly 
 probable, and may beotherwife. 
 
 What be immediate Propofitiot/s ? 
 
 Immediate Proportions are thofe which are firft, and haue 
 none before them, whereby they can bee prooued : aseuery 
 fenfible body endued with reafon, isaptto learne. lAnftotlc 
 alfo fetteth downe three properties or conditions belonging 
 to the Subie6r and Predicate of a Demonftratiue Propofition. 
 
 Winch be thofe'Properties > 
 
 J - Thcfe, 
 
of Logic ke* 161 
 
 Thefetobefpoken of all, by it felfe, and vniuerfally. 
 
 What id to be fpokjrt of all ? 
 
 Ic is when the Predicate isknowne to bee altogether and aJ- 
 waics in the Subject , either as a part of the fubftance thereof, 
 as when it is a generall kinde, the fpeciallkinde, the difference, 
 or the propcrtie, as fome infeparablc accident alwaies incident 
 to the faid fubictt,as when I fay : Euery man is a fenfible body: 
 oreuery mm is endued with reafon -: or euery man is apt to 
 fpeake : or euery Swanne is white: or euery fire is hot. 
 
 What u to be jpoken kj it felfe ? 
 
 That is, when the Predicate is eyther the definition of the 
 Subicit, as a man is a fenfible bodie endued with reafon: or 
 elfe fome part of the Definition, as a man is afenfiblc bodie, or 
 man is endued with reafon. 
 
 What is to bcJpoktM vnitter faUy ? 
 
 It is when the Predicate is in the Subic£t, and in euery fuch 
 SubiccSt. by it felfe; and firft , as when I fay , a man is a fenfiblc 
 body endued with reafon: heercthis Predicate fenfible body 
 endued with reafon, is not onely fpoken of man, but of euery 
 man in generall by it felfe : and firft : for if yee fhould fay, Pe- 
 ter ox Socrates is a fenfible body endued with reafon: heercthe 
 Predicate is not fpoken of any of thefe, as firft, but in the fe- 
 cond place, becaufe they are comprehended vnder the word 
 man. For generall kindes are faid to be before fpeciall kindes, 
 and fpeciall kindes before Indiuiduums,as hath bin faid before* 
 
 Hon? doth Ariftotlc define Demonflratton} 
 
 In this fort : Demonstration is a Syllogifme made of fuch 
 Propositions as are true:firft immediate, & manifeftly knowne, 
 and be thecaufes of theconclufion : firft and immediate here 
 is all one, Signifying fuch Propositions as nce-d notcobeepro- 
 ued or made more cuident by any other former Propoiitions. 
 Againc , thepremifes muft bee more kaowne then theconclu- 
 fion, for otherwifeit fhnuld neither be Demonftration, nor ycc 
 good Syllogifme. Finally, the Premifes muft render the very 
 caufeof the conclufion: and therefore Arijieth in another place 
 faith, that Demonftration is*a Syllogifme caufing knowledge 
 and feience. 
 
 Y WaAt 
 
\6l ^he fift ^Eooke 
 
 What is Science ? 
 
 It is a firme and affurcd knowledge of any thing. 
 W.iatistoknoxv'* 
 
 We are laid to know a thing , when wee know the true cau- 
 fes thereof, and that it cannot beoiherwife : f r to make a per- 
 fect Demonftration, wee mult not only flit w that there is futh 
 a tning as we g©c about toprooue,but alfo wee inuft fliew the 
 cauFe why it is fo : for (as Anfiotle \%\i\\ ) euery difcipline and 
 doctrine intcllccliue dependeth vpon a former knowledge, 
 which is two. fold, whereof the one is to know thacthe prin- 
 ciples (that is to lay) the premiles of the Demonitration bee 
 true, and the other is to know the true fignification of the Sub- 
 ject and Predicate of the qucftion : for vnleffe a man know 
 what the name of the Subiecl: fignifieth, whereof the queftion 
 rifeth,andall*3 the proper qualhies of the fame, how (Tiall hee 
 - bee able to judge, whether the proofe which is b ought in to 
 proue the queltion withall be to the purpofe or not ? Againe, 
 vnkflfe hee know the premifes to bee true, the Demon ftration 
 fhall breed no certaine knowledge in him. 
 Gins example of a SjUogifme Dem-wftratiue,- 
 Let this be your example : euery fenfible body endued with 
 reafon, is apt tole*rne : but euery man is a fenfible body en- 
 dued with leafon : Erg** f uery man is apt to learne. Heere you 
 fee that in this Syllogifme the premifes being true and firO, 
 doe render the caufe of the concluiion : and thereby doe 
 imply a moft true Confequent : for whofo would goe about to 
 demonltrate anv of the prtmifes by fome other former, or 
 more knowne Proportions, lliould lofe his labour, fith there 
 is none before them more certaine, nor more knowne to proue 
 this eonclufion wtthail then they : for tovnderltand the truth 
 of theie prcmifes,it fufficeth onely to know the fignification of 
 thetcrmes, and to haue fome experience of the thing called 
 Man : and therefore this kind of Demonstration is called of the 
 Schoo!e-mcn , Sjiiogi[mm Seiinuficttt , becaufc it yeeldeththe 
 perfect knowledge and Science of the thing in queltion. 
 
 CHAP* 
 
of Logic ke. 143 
 
 CHAP. XVIIT. 
 Of the cert aim te of mans knowledge. 
 
 Hereof dcpendeth the ceruintit of CM am k»oiv- 
 let. ct ? 
 
 Of three things, that is, of vniuerfall expe- 
 rience, of principles, and of naturall knowledge 
 rhat a man haih in iudging or Confequents: 
 forthefe bee three infallible rules of certitude or truth in all 
 kindes of Doctrine. 
 < L . What is vmuerjali experience ? 
 
 Vniuerfall experience is the common iudgementof men, in 
 fuch things as are to be perceiued and known c by the outward 
 fences : as Fire to bee hor , the Heauens to rurne round about, 
 Wine and Pepper to bee hottc in operation , Women to bring 
 forth Children, and noc Men : which things all men (vnlciTe 
 they bee madde, and cut of their wits)muft needes confelTeto 
 be true. 
 
 What be P rineiples . ? • 
 
 Principles bee certaine generall conceptions and naturall 
 knowledges grafted in mansmindcof God , to the intent that 
 by the helpe thereof, he might ; nuent fuch Arts asarenecelfary 
 in this life tor mans behootc ; for by thenaturallknowledge of 
 the mind we vnderftand Number, Order, Proportion, and ail 
 other neccflary Arts and Sciences. 
 
 How doth Ariftotle dfine 'Principles ? 
 
 In this manner : Principles be true Propofitions, hauing cre- 
 dit of themfclues, and need no other proofe. 
 
 How many Diui/ions doe the SchooU-tnen make Principles ? 
 
 Diuers. 
 
 Rehearfe thofe r Dim(jons. 
 
 Thefirrtis, of Principles , fome be called Speculatiue, and 
 fomc Pra&iue :The fpcculatiucbee thole naturall knowledges 
 or Propofitions, whereof Naturall Philofophie or the Mathe- 
 matical! Sciences be grounded, as. thefe:The whole is more 
 then his part: Thofe things which are cqua'l to a third, are 
 
 Y 2 equall 
 
\6\ c Ihefift c Booke 
 
 cquall among themfelues : of one fimple body, there is but one 
 naturall moouing, and fuel) like. The Principles Practiue, bee 
 thofe naturall knowledges, whereby mens manners are gouer- 
 ned : tor by this naturall light we know the difference betwixc 
 good and euill : As for example : thefe be Principles Pr3Ctiue : 
 God is to be honoured and obeyed : Iulrice is to be embraced:. 
 cjuill focietie is to bee maintained , and the difiurbcrs thereof 
 to bee punifhed : thefe and fuch likePropofitions are naturally 
 receiued of all men as infallible verities. Againe, of Principles, 
 fome bee called Generall, and feme Proper. The Generall, bee 
 shofc that may be applycd to many Seiences,as thcfe:the whole 
 is more then any of his parts, if equall be taken from equally- 
 quail doe remaine and fuch like. The proper Principles bee 
 ihofe, that are properly belonging to fome one certainc Sci- 
 ence , as a Line to bee a length without breath, is a principle of 
 Geometric : Againe, this proportion, euery thing is, or is not, 
 is a principle of Logick: and to bee fhort, euery Science hath 
 his proper principles : of which 4 fome bee called Dignities or 
 Maximcs, and fome Pofitions. 
 
 Wherefore *rc they calfai Dignities or Max'mcs } 
 For that they are worthy to bee credited for their fclfe fake, 
 for fo foone as we heare them in fuch fpcech as we vndcrftand, 
 we naturally know them to be true without any further proofe 
 as thefe. Take equall from equall, and cquall will remaine : the 
 -whole is more then any of his parts, &c» 
 wbAt be Pfijithtti ? 
 
 Pofitions be thofe principles, which although they need no 
 other pi©ofe,yet they be not Co eafily vnderftood of all menac 
 the firft vttering, as Maximes bee: for in thefe, befidesthe 
 knowledge of the termes, itisneedfull to hauealfo fome ex- 
 perience, as in thefe Principles. Euery thing that is compoun- 
 ded of matter and forme is moucable: whatfocuer is heauie, 
 tendeth naturally downward, and whatfoeuer is light, tendeth 
 vpwards. Againe, of Pofitions, fome arc called Definitions, 
 and fome Suppositions , and of Suppofltions , fome are called 
 Petitions, called in L atinc PtfitUta, and fome Suppositions af« 
 fumptcd. . 
 
 Define 
 
of Logicfy. 1^5 
 
 Define the fe kinds 1 
 
 i Definition fheweth whst the thing is. 
 
 2 Suppofition is that which fuppofeth a thing to be, or not 
 to be,as the Geometricians doe fuppofc that there is Vunttum^ 
 (that is to fay) apricke, or athingindiuifible, hauing neither 
 length, bredth, nor depth. 
 
 3 Petition is a Proposition asked and granted to be true: as 
 this is a petition in Geometry, that a man may draw a right 
 Line from one point to another. 
 
 4 Suppofition aftumptcd is, when amanifeft fuppefition is 
 afftimpted to proue another thing withali, as to proue that Dc- 
 monftration confificth of true Propofitions , the Difputer will 
 aflumpt this aflcrtion, which faith, that of falfc things there is 
 no certaine knowledge :and tructhis notknowncbut of true 
 things. 
 
 WkM U the third thing whereof the eertetintie of mans hnvwhdgs 
 dependeth ? 
 
 It is the knowledge that man hath in iudging of Confe- 
 quencs , which is not altogether artificial!, but partly natural!, 
 for God thought it not fumYicnt for mans behoofc to know 
 fimp!c Propofitions , as Principles or common Conceptions 
 gotten by experience, vnleflfe hce could alfo compare them 
 together, and ioyne things like , and agreeable together, 
 and feuer things vnlike , and difagreeing one from ano- 
 ther, and by fuch comparifon and compofitionto finde out 
 things before not knowne: and to the intent wee lliould not 
 tire or wander out of the right way , God hath fhewed vs an 
 order, and prefcribt'd certaine bounds and limits of ncceflitie 
 to bee obferued in fuch compofition, which bounds arc Syllo- 
 gifmes rightly made: for \o doe the Confequcnts plainly ap- 
 peare:And becaufc that proportions are knowne by nature, 
 it fhall not be amiflc to giue you an example in numbers :for 
 three knowne numbers being placed in true order of aSyllo- 
 gifme, a fourth number Ynknowne,ofnecciTitie doth follow, as 
 in this quertion : If one pound of W3xc be worth a groat, what 
 is tenne pound of waxe worth? Marrytcnnegroar.es, which 
 isproouedby aSyllogifmc in this manner : Euery pound of 
 
 Y>3 waxe 
 
104 The fift c Boo{e 
 
 waxe is worth a groat,but here is ten pound of waxe :£Vg#,they 
 are worth ten groats : and like as in thefe kinds of SiLIog fires 
 Arithmetical!, the proportion which i» to bee Judged by mans 
 naturall knowledge, doth fhew the Consequent tobeeintalli- 
 ble,eucn fo the Confequcnts in other Syllogifmes arc fbewed 
 to be infallible, by fucb demonftrations as arc not farrc fetched, 
 or doubcfull, but are manifeft, plaine and euident. 
 
 CHAP. XIX. 
 
 Of the two kjfidj of DernsKfiratton, 
 
 Ore doe the SchaeLmen dittide Vtmorftration ? 
 
 Inro two; thatis, perfect and vnperfeel: and 
 they call the perfect , dttnexftratio propter quid: 
 and the vnperfecH, dtmo?,flratio qui* (ft. 
 
 It is perfect, when it proccedeth from the 
 proper caufe to the effect, called or the Schoolcn en , aprtcre : 
 for in that dcmonilration the Antecedent contained) tie pro- 
 per and true caufe of the confequentj as when we fay,thc Sunnc 
 is vp-.Ergo, it is day. 
 
 What is to be obfsYued in aperfett D em en fir at ion? 
 That the Predicate of {he Conclusion, which is alfo Predi- 
 cate in the Maior, bee flrft, properly, alwayes, and that really 
 and accidentally, incident to the fubied of the Maior, and to 
 euery thing contained vnder the facie; which fubieftmuft bee 
 fome gcnerall kind, and the very meane or prcofe of your con- 
 clusion : As for example, if you would prooue a Cocke to be a 
 feathered fowle , it were not a fuflficientdemonftration to fay, 
 that euery flying bcaft is a feathered fowle; for fome beaftcs 
 fiye.thathaue no feathcrs<as Backs,thatfiiein the night feafon. 
 But if you fay, that eucry Bird is a feathered fowle , and euery 
 G?eke is aBird: Ergo 3 eucry Cocke is a feathered fowle : you 
 fhall make a perfect demonflration , becaufc theSubiecl' , and 
 Predicate of the Maior, haue fuch conditions as are before re- 
 quiredjfor this Maior flic weth the thing to be,andalfo where- 
 fore it isjwhich is done fc often as the Predicate is the true de- 
 finition 
 
of Logic %e. j6j 
 
 jfinition of the Subiecl : as when I fay , Euery man is a fenfible . 
 body endued with reafon , or elie fome chiefe part of the defi- 
 nition, as when I fay, Euery man is endued with reifon, as hath 
 beenefaid before: for euery good demonstration is either made 
 of a true definition ,or taken from the gent ralkind,fpecial kind, 
 or clfe from the ipeciall difference, orprop'rtie, yea,and fome- 
 time they may bee taken out of the whole and of the parts , of 
 the proper caufes and effects, of perpetual! adiacents,o:hervvife 
 called common accidents,of proper a£ts,of comrarieties,and of 
 diu:ne authoritie,whereof you haue had examples before in the 
 Treatifc of places, and fratesof arguments. 
 When u it t atd to bt an vnptrfeH Demon fir at ion ? 
 When the prem ffes are true, implying a true Confequent, 
 but yet arc notfirlt, neither doe they fhew the originall caufe 
 of the Conclusion ; as in this example: Eufry fenhblebo"dyis 
 rii urifhable ; but euery man is a fenfib'.ebody : £^o/urrvir i n 
 is nourifhab!e:here though the premifles be true 1 ropofitions, 
 yet they be not firl-f , neither doc they fhew the originall caufe 
 of the Conclufion: for the Maiorof this Syllogilme may bee 
 ptooued by a former and more knownc, Proportion; for than 
 which is more gcncrall,is more knowne then that which is leffc 
 general!, as thus : Euery lining body is nourifhable; but euery 
 fenfible body is a liuing body : Ergo 3 euery fenfible body is 
 nourifhable. Againe, it is faid lobe vnperfeCr, when we pro- 
 ceed from the effect to the caufe; as when we fay, it is day : Er~ 
 go t the Sunne is vp. But that demonftration which proceedeth 
 from the cau : 'c to the effect, is the more worthier, becaufe wee 
 yfe therein difcourfe of reafon and vnderftanding : and in the o- 
 thcr we only iudge by the outward fences, whereof fpring two 
 principall kinds of Method , (that is to fay) compendious or 
 fhort orders or wayes of teaching in all manner of Sciences, 
 wherof the one is called compofition,proceeding forward from 
 thcfirftrothelalt, and the other is called refolution, procee- 
 ding backward from the laft to thcfirlt , ashathbec'nefaid be- 
 fore in the Chapter of Mcthode, Ltb.i,cap.$. 
 
 CHAP- 
 
16$ Tbefift'Booke 
 
 CHAP. XX. 
 
 Of Science, Opinion, Ignorance ,W>t, and of the 
 fourc Sciential! ijue/ions. 
 
 Hat other things are wont to bee treated »f by the 
 Schoolemenin 'Demon fir at ion } 
 
 Diuers things ; as what difference is betwixt 
 Science and Opinion : alfo they trc3t of the di- 
 licrs kinds of Ignorance, of prompt Wit : and 
 of the foure Scicnciall queftions. 
 
 What difference is betwixt Science And Opinion ? 
 
 Science, as hath been faid before, is that which confifteth of 
 neceflary, certaine, and infallible Propofitions , and of fuch 
 things as cannot bee otherwife. Opinion is the knowledge of 
 things cafuall, which may bee forr.ctime falfe, and iometime 
 true. 
 
 How many \i$tds of Ignorance doe the Schoolemcn make ? 
 
 Two: that is to fay, abfolure, which of the Schoolemeni« 
 called Igvorantia negations, and ignorance by fajfc conception, 
 which they call Ignorantia affelltoms. Thefirft is, when we vt- 
 terly deny to haue any knowledge of a thing at all :Thc other 
 is, when we thinke to know that which we know not.being de- 
 cciued by fomc falfe perfwafion, whereunto wee are affected, 
 whereof it is called Ignorantia affcttienis. 
 
 How doth Ari/iotle define prompt mt , called of the LttincsSo- 
 lertia} 
 
 Hee.defineth it to be a promptnefie or readineffe, in quickly 
 finding out the proofe or caufe of any thing that is in queftion, 
 without any ftudie. 
 
 tl hich be the foure Scient tall ejueft ions ? 
 
 Thcfe : whether the thing be, what it is,how it is,and wher- 
 fcre it is : whereof the firft enquireth of the fubieft, whether 
 it be : the fecond of the Predicate, as what it is : the third, how 
 it is, (that is to fay) how the Predicate is fpoken of the fubic#: 
 and the fourth asketh the caufe why it is fpoken of the fubieft? 
 And thu j much of a Syllogifme Demonftratiue : now of a Syl- 
 logifrncDialeclicark or probable* 
 
 CHAP. 
 
of Logic fy. 169 
 
 CHAP. XXI. 
 
 Of a SjHogifmc DialeUicall. 
 
 Hat is a DialctitcaliSjlhgifwe > 
 
 A Dialeclicall Syllogifme is that which is 
 wade of probable and credible Propofitions. 
 What things are fat d to be probable ? 
 Things probable, according to Ariftotle^xc 
 thefe that feeme true to all men, or to the moft part of men, or 
 to all wife men, or to the moft part of wife men, orelletothc 
 moft approued wife men : whereby it appeareth that things 
 probable may be faid fine manner of way es. 
 
 Shew how, 
 
 Firft, thofe things are probable, which vnto all men afwell 
 learned as ynlearncd being in their right wits, doe feeme to be 
 true, as thefe : Euery mother loueth her childe : welouethem 
 that louers: we muft doe good to them that doe good to vs. 
 Secondly, thofe things that feeme true to moft men, as thefe: 
 It is better for acommunalty to be ruled by one Prince, then 
 by many : It is not good to feruc many mafters at once. Third- 
 ly, thofe things that feeme true to all wife men, as thefe : what 
 thing focucr is honeft, the fame is alfo profitable : Vertuc is 
 better then riches. Fourthly, thofe that feeme true to the moft 
 part of the wife and learned, as thus; the foule of man is im- 
 mortall : the Sunne is greater then the earth. Fiftly, thoff 
 things that feeme true to the moft approued wife men, as thefe: 
 The world had a beginning : it is better for a Prince to be lo- 
 ued, then feared of his Subiecls. And generally rnder things 
 probable are contained all true Propositions that be cafuall, 
 and not implying any neceifitic. I fay here, true Proportions, 
 to exclude falfc Proportions, whereof Sophifticall Syllo- 
 gifmes arc made* and not thofe which we call probable or Lo- 
 gical! Syllogifmes ; and yet fuch Proportions be not fo true in 
 deede, as thofe that be required in a Syllogifme demonftra- 
 tiue, but onely doe feeme true, ingendring a certainc opinion 
 inmansminde, doubting notwithftaading the contrary : for 
 
 Z to 
 
170 7hefft < Booke 
 
 it brcedeth not a pcrfciSt knowledge as Science doth, whereby 
 the mindc is of all doubrs throughly rcfolued. And note here, 
 that the Schoolcmen doc make the matter (whereof a Diale- 
 cticall Syllogifrae doth confift ) to be twofold, that is, UWatc- 
 riaremota, inEnglifh, farre off-; and A<fMeriapropinqUA } (i}\it. 
 is tofay ) nigh, omeere at hand. 
 
 What doth Materia remota contain? ? 
 
 Thefe foureDialc£\icall Predicates, (that is) Definition^ 
 called of the Schoolemen Terminus, property, generail kinde, 
 and Accident : All which Predicates are before defined, and 
 are called Predicates, becaufe they are common words fpoken 
 of others. But truely I fee no caufe why thefe foure Predicates 
 fliould be attributed to a Diale&icall Syllogifme,rnore then to 
 aSillogifmedemonftratiue : for furcl am, that as good de- 
 monstrations may be made of thefe as of any other Predicates. 
 
 What is contained vnder Jldtteriaprnpingjua ? 
 
 Thefe: aDialecYicallPropofition.Problerae, and Pofition. 
 
 What difference is betwixt thefe three words, Dtalefttcall Prove- 
 fition, ^Probletne, and Pofition ? 
 
 A DialecTicall Proposition is a probable queftion vttered 
 with a fimplc Interrogatory; as whether the mother loueth. 
 her childe? which is no queftion in deede, but to him that 
 asketh. 
 
 AProblemeisa doubtfull queftion vttered with a double 
 Interrogatory, as whether the leaft fixed ftarre in the firma- 
 ment be greater then the Moone or not? or whether that the 
 Sunne be bigger then the earth or not ? Pofition is a wonder- 
 full opinion maintained by fome excellent Clerke, as to fay, 
 that all things are but one effence or being, as Melifftts affir- 
 med, or that all things doe continually floweand change, as 
 Heraclttusheld, or that the earth moueth, and not the heauens, 
 as Copernicus fuppofed, onely to finde out thereby the true 
 motions of the P!anets,and not for that he thought fo in deed. 
 
 CHAP., 
 
of Logicke. lyi 
 
 CHAP. XXII. 
 Of a fophflicall Sjllogtfme* 
 
 Hat is a Sophifticalior falfe Syllogifme ? 
 
 A falfe Syllogifme is that which is cither 
 made of falfe Propositions, or elfe of fuch as 
 feerae probable, and be not indeede, or elfe of 
 probable premilTes not rightly concluding : and 
 of fuch Syllogifmes there be three fortes, the one failing in 
 matter, the other in forme, the third in both. 
 when if it fa id to fai/e i» matter ? 
 
 It faileth in matter,whcn the Syllogifme hauing true forme, 
 is made of fuch Proportions as fecme probable, and bee not 
 probable indeede, as thus ; no oppofites are both true atoncc, 
 but fubcontraries are oppofites: Ergo, they are not true* Here 
 though this Maior fecroeth probable, becaufe many oppo- 
 fites, as contraries, and contradictories, be neuerboch true at 
 once, yet it is not probable in decde : for thofe oppofites 
 which be called fubcontrarie and fubakernate, may bee both 
 true at once as hath bcene before. 
 When is it [aid to fai/e in forme ? 
 
 It faileth in forme, when it is made of probable premifles, 
 not rightly concluding : becaufe they be not orderly difpofed 
 according to Moodc and Figure, as thus ; Some oppofites are 
 both true at once, but contradictories are oppofites: Ergo, 
 Contradictories are both true at once. Here the premifles be 
 probable, but the Syllogifme halteth in forme, becaufe that cf 
 mcere particulars no good conclufion can follow. 
 When is it find to fatle b#th tn matter and forme ? 
 It faileth both in matter and forme, vhen the premifles are 
 neither probable, nor yet doe conclude rightly according to 
 the rules of Logicke , as thus : No oppofites are both true at 
 once, butfubcontraries are oppofites : Ergo } no fubcontraries 
 are both true at once. Here firft it faileth in matter, becaufe the 
 Maior ; (as hath been faid before) is not probable in deed. A- 
 gaine,it faileth in formc } becaufe that contrary to the rules of a 
 
 Z 2 Syllo- 
 
172 The fiftTZooke 
 
 Syllogifme, an rniaerfall conclufion is implied, one of the pre- 
 mifes being particular, which fhould not be. 
 
 Is there no other kindes of fdlfe Syllogifme s ? 
 
 Yes, there is another kinde of falle Syllogifme, called of A* 
 rtftoilcSyllogifmus falfigraphus, which proccedeth of the pro- 
 per principles of fomediicipline mifconftrucd, or not rightly 
 Ynderftood.as thus : All lines drawne from one felfe-poiat to 
 another felfe-point, be equall: a right line and a crooked line 
 be drawne from one felfe-point to another felfe-point :£>•£», 
 a right line and a crooked line, be equall ,as you fee in the figure 
 a. h. intheMargent : Here the Mai or being a principle in Ge- 
 ometric, is not rightly vnderftood; for the right meaning of 
 the principle is, that the lines fhould be alfo drawn in one fclfe 
 fpace, and then they muftnecdes be equall, ( that is to fay) all 
 of one length : but as touching falfeSyllogifmes, wee fhall 
 treateofthem hereafter more at large in the Elenchcs : in the 
 meane time weminde to fpcake of the other kindes of argu- 
 ments before mentioned ; and firft of Induction. 
 
 CHAP. XXIII. 
 Of Induction. 
 
 Hm is Induction ? 
 
 Induction is a kinde ofargument,wherein we 
 proceede from many particulars,to a vniuerfall 
 conclusion, comprehending all the faid particu- 
 ^■*$5)L%&rt$@S lars :and by the particulars hire I mean not only 
 fingularities, called in Latine Indtnidn*, but alfo fuch things as 
 be lefle common then that vniuerfall which is concluded; as 
 when we proceed from many fpeciall kindes, tofomegenerall 
 kinde comprehending the fame, or from things lefle common 
 10 more common. 
 
 What it to be ob erasd in this kinde of reafoning ? 
 That the particulars be all of hke nature ; for if there be any 
 one contrary or vnlikc to the reft, then the Induction is not 
 good. 
 
 How manifold itlndn&wn ? 
 
 Twofold % 
 
o/Logic{e. , ?5 
 
 Twofold i Perfect, and Vnperfect : it is called perfect, when 
 all the fiagularitics are rchearfed : and vnperfecl, when but 
 fomc ccrtaine parts are only recited. 
 Cjtpte example of Induction* 
 Of an Induction, proceeding from meere fingularities ynto 
 vniuerfall, let this be your example : Malmefieis hot, Ggfcoin 
 wine is hot, Romney wine is hot, Sackeishot, Renifh wincis 
 hot, French wine is hot, & fie de jingHlis : Ergo t euery wine is 
 hot; which may bee brought inco 3 Syllogifme thus : Euay 
 thing that is wine, be it cither of Greece, Spaine, Italy % Ger- 
 many prance, or of any other countrey is hot, buceucry wine 
 is one of thefe : Ergo, euery wine is hot. 
 
 Gine example of an InduRion proceeding frsm the fpecUll kinds 
 to their generall kjndes. 
 
 Ofan Induction proceeding from the fpeciall kindes to the 
 generallkinde,let this be your example: Euery Man hath mo- 
 iling, euery Horfe hath mouing, euery Oxc hath mouing, & 
 Jicde fugults : Ergo, euery fenfiblc body hath mouing. ]« which 
 example you fee, that to eutry fpeciall kinde is added an vni- 
 uerfall fignc to make your Induction good, which would not 
 be fo, if you fhould vfe a particular figne, in faying,fome Man, 
 fome Horfe, fomeOxe, and fo forth. 
 
 Which of the/etwol^ndes of reafoning, oyther anlnduttion or 4 
 Syllogifme jsmoft familiar and eafie to man} 
 
 Induction is more familiar toman then a Syllogifme, for the 
 Syllogifme proceedcth from vniuerfalities vnto particulari- 
 ties, which vniuerfalities be more knowne to nature ( that is to 
 fay) tothedifcourfeof reafon, and leflc knowne to our out- 
 ward fences. Biitl.iduftion proceedcth frora particularities 
 vnto vniuerfalities, which particularities are more knowne vn- 
 to vs, ( that is to fay ) to our outward fences, and lefle knowne 
 to nature. Againe, by Induction wee are able to proue the 
 principles of D'-monltration, which are not othcrwife to bee 
 proued, as this principle: Euery whole is more then his part, 
 may be proued by Induction in this fort : This whole is more 
 then his part, and that whole is more then his part, neyther is 
 there to be found any whole, but that is more then his part ? : 
 
 £ I . ' Er g e > \ 
 
74- Tbef/t c Boo{e 
 
 Ergo, Euery whole is more then his part. Alfo this principle, 
 Euery fenfiblc body endued withreafon, is apt to learne, may 
 be proued thus : This man is apt to learne ; and that man is apt 
 tolcarne, and Co of the reft: £>£<?, Euery fen fible body endued 
 with reafon,is apt to learne. 
 
 CHAP. XXIIII. 
 Of an Enthimeme* 
 
 Hat is an Enthimeme} 
 
 AnEnthimemeis an vrvperfc& Syllcgifmc, 
 madeforhaflcor fpeedc, of two Propofitions 
 only, (thatis)ofoneof the Premifles, called in 
 this kinde of argument the Antecedent, and of 
 the conclufion, called hcere the Confcqucnt : for the other of 
 the PremiiTes being fuppofed to be true and well knowne, is 
 left out of purpofe, as a thing fuperfluous, and notneedfull to 
 be recited, and fometime the Maior is left out, as thus : Vo- 
 luptuoufneiTe is not perpetuall nor proper, it is not therefore 
 the chiefe felicitie : and fometime theMinor is left out, as 
 heere : Euery good thing maketh his poffeflbr thebettcr, ther» 
 fore voluptuoufnefie is not good. 
 
 Howjball Aman know when the Maior or Minor » left out ? 
 It is cafie to know which of the PremifTes is left out by this 
 meanes: for if theSubie&of the Antecedent and of the Con- 
 sequent be all one, then the Maior is left out, but if they bee 
 not all one, but diuers, then the Minor is left out, as you may 
 fee in.the two laft examples, and the part lacking, being redu- 
 ced together with the reft into a Syllogifme, will quickly (hew 
 the truth or falfehood of the Argument. 
 
 From whence are fuch kinoes of Arguments gathered"? 
 They are gathered for the moft part from fignes , which if 
 they be neceiTarie, then the Enthimcme alfo is neceflarie , as 
 thus: The woman giuethmilke: Ergo, fhee hath had a childe, 
 or is with childe ; if the figncs be probable , then the Enthi- 
 memeis alfo probable, as dun: This man is a night-gadder: 
 Er<ro } \\z isathiefc. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
of Logicfy. ijf 
 
 CHAP. XXV, 
 Of an Example. 
 
 flat is an "Example ? 
 
 An Example is a kindeof Argument, where- 
 'in wee procecde from one particular, to proue 
 another particular, by reafon of fome likenes 
 that is betwixt them, as thus : God did not pu- 
 nifh the Niniuites becaufe they repented ; Ergo ) Heewill not 
 punifhvs if we repent. God did not let to plague King Dauid 
 foradulterie : €rg», He will not let to plague any other King 
 for committing the fame offence. 
 
 Wherein differ eth this kin At of ^Argument from the refi ? 
 Thiskindeof Argument differeth in forme from all the reft 
 before taught, for a Syllogifme proceedeth from the generall 
 kindcto the fpeciallkindc, or other wife. AnEnthimeme imi- 
 tating a Syllogifme, rcciteth in his Antecedent the caufe of the 
 Conclufion. Againe, an Induction out of many particularities 
 gathcrcth an vniuerfalitie, none of which things is to be found 
 in an Exampkj proceeding onely from one particular to ano- 
 ther like particular. Notwithftanding *AriftotU faith, that it 
 may be reduced partly to an induction, and partly to a Syllo- 
 gifme : for in taking the firft particular, you may by an vnper- 
 feet induction imply an vniuerfall Propofition. And fo from 
 thatvniuetfall Prop, fition to proceed by order of Syllogifme, 
 vnto the other particular implyed in the concluGon of the Ex- 
 ample's in this Example : luda-sdled euill : Er£o i c I'tUte alio 
 died euill : it may be firft reduced into an vnperreel Induction 
 thus : ludas dyed euill , becaufe hee was the author of Chrifts 
 death, and did not repent : Ergo, Euery man that was author 
 of Chrifts death, and did not repent, died euill. Into a Syllo- 
 gifme thus: Euery man that was author of Chrifts death, and 
 did not rcpent,diedeuill;butP*/*i^was author of Chrifts death, 
 and did not repent : Er cordate died euill. 
 
 Whereto femes this kindc of reafomng by Example ? 
 
 Exam- 
 
ij6 7 he fifttBookf 
 
 Examples arc, very good in all morall matters, to perfwade, 
 or dtfTwade. 
 
 tfk at u to be obferuedin reafoning by way ofExdmtfe} 
 
 You muft in any wife be Aire that the Gmilitude ot likenefle 
 of the particulars doe make to the purpofe which you intend, 
 and that it be the very caufe why the Predicate of the Antece- 
 dent properly belongcth to the Subie&, for othcrwife the ar- 
 gument is not good ; for if you (hould reafon thus ; ludas died 
 euill : Ergo, Peter died euill : becaufe they were both finners: 
 for their likenes in this bchalfe is not the caufe that ludas died 
 euill, but the caufe before alledgcd. 
 
 From whence is this kjude of argument fetched ? 
 
 From the places of Companion , as from the like, from the 
 wore , and from the lcfle , of all which the generall rule or 
 Maximeisthus: In things like, is like iudgement or reafon, 
 as hath bcenc faid before in the Treatife of places. Thus farre 
 ©f the foure principall kinds of reafoning : now of the reft.and 
 firft. 
 
 CHAP. XXVI. 
 
 Of the Argument called Sorites. 
 
 Hat is Sorites f 
 
 Sorites is a kinde of Argument proceeding 
 as it were by ccrtaine degrees vnto the Con- 
 clusion, which is gathered of many Proporti- 
 ons neceflarily following one another, and arc 
 knit together, fo as the Predicate of the firft Proportion is the 
 Subicciof the fecond, and the Predicate of the fecond the 
 Subied of the third, and fo forth euen to the laft Propofition, 
 whofe Predicate being ioyncd to the Subie& of thefirft Pro- 
 pofition, doth make the Conclufion as thus : The Soule ofraan 
 doth moue it felfc : whatfoeucrmoucth it felfc, is the begin, 
 ningof mouing : the beginning of mouinghach no end, what* 
 focuer hath no end, is immortal! : Ergo t the Soule of man is 
 immortal!. 
 
 When 
 
 
of Logic J^. 177 
 
 rfhen is this hjnde of Argument faid to be of fine f 
 When it is made of Affirmatiuc Propofuions , wherein 
 •words of affinitie are neceffarily ioyned together , as when 
 kindes general], differences, or properties , are ioyned with 
 thofe fpeciall kindes, of whom they are fpoken,or when pro- 
 per effects are ioyned with their proper caufes : for if the Pro- 
 portions be either Ncgatiue, or doe notnccefiarily hang to- 
 gether, then it is no good Argument, as in Negatiucs let this 
 be your example : A Man is not a Lion , a Lion is a fenfible 
 beaft : £Vg*,Man is not a fenfible beaft. Now of Propositions 
 not hanging neceffarily together, becaufe that proper etTc&s 
 are not ioyned with their proper caufes, let this common ieft 
 be your example : 
 
 fVhofo dritikrth n>efl,fleepetb well, 
 Whofo jleepeth well,Jinnetb not, 
 WhofoJinnetbnot 3 jb*li be bleffed : 
 Ergo, Wkofo drmkttb rvellJhaR be bleffed. 
 
 Which is no good Conclufion , for much drinke is not 
 alwayes the caufe of fleepe, n©r fleeping the caufe of not (in- 
 ning. 
 
 The Rhetoricians vfc another kinde of Argument, called 
 Gradatto, which is much like to Sorites, fauing that the fub- 
 ie& of thefirft Propofitionis not rehearfed in the Con- 
 clufion , for they vfc it rather as an ornament of 
 fpeech , then as a proofe : as the vertue of 
 Scipio wan him Fame , Fame got him 
 Enemies, and his Enemies 
 procured his 
 death. 
 
 A a CHAP. 
 
178 Thefift'Booke 
 
 CHAP. XXVII. 
 
 Of diners other kmds of Arguments , *nd frft^f a Di- 
 lemma, and jvbtt ktttds it compre- 
 htndeth< 
 
 s^fM/^W Here be alfo other formes of Argument^ whereof 
 I fome be Faliaxes, and fome are good Conclujions, 
 andthejbethefe i Dilemma, Enumeratio, Sim- 
 plex Conclufio, Subiedtio , Oppofitio, Vio- 
 latio. 
 
 What is Dilemma ? 
 Dilemma is an Argument made of two members, repug- 
 nant one to another , whereof which foeuer thou granted, 
 thou art by and by taken , as thus : It is not good to marry a 
 wife, for if fhee be faire, fhee will be common ; if foule,then 
 lothfome : notwithftanding, this is but a flipperie kind of ar- 
 gument, vnleffe both the repugnant parts be fuch, as neither 
 of them can be turned againevpon the maker of the Argu- 
 ment/or then by conuerfion, the Dilemma is foone confuted, 
 as for example, you may conuert both parts of the argument 
 laft recited,thus : It is good to marry a wife,for if flie be faire, 
 fhee fhall not be lothfome, if foule,then not common : much 
 like to this is that captious Argument, which Protagorat the 
 Lawyer made againft his Scholer Euathlm , whohadcoue- 
 nantecl to.pay his Matter a certayne fumme of money at the 
 firftSuteor Action that heefhould winne by pleading at the 
 Law: whereupon his Matter did afterwards commence an A- 
 &ion againtt him , and in reafoning with him of the matter, 
 made him this c Dilemma: Either (faith he) iudgement fhall be 
 giuen againft thee, or with thee : if againft thee , then thou 
 mutt pay me by vertue of the iudgement; if iudgement be gi- 
 uen with thee,then thou muft alfo pay me by couenant; which 
 the Scholer immediately confuted by conuerfion in this fort : 
 Either(falthhe)iudgement fhall be giuen with me^or againft 
 me ; if with me, then I fhall be quit by Law; if againft me, 
 then I ought to pay nothing by couenant. 
 
 What 
 
of Logicke. 179 
 
 What other intricate kinds ef reafoning are faid to be cempre- 
 hendedvnder Dilemma ? 
 
 Diucrs, whereof fome be called Ccratins or horned Argu- 
 ments, fomcCrocodolites, fomeAfli(tatojis, fomePfcudo- 
 menons. 
 
 Define all thefe kjxds, and giue examples. 
 
 1 The horned Argument is,when by fome fubtile and craf- 
 tie manner of queftioning , we fceke to haue fuch an anfwere, 
 as we may take vantage thereof, asthePhanfesdid , when 
 they queftioned with Chrift, touching the payment of Tri- 
 bute to Ctfar. 
 
 z The Crocodolite is, when being deceiued by fome craf- 
 tie manner of queftioning,we doe admit that which our Ad- 
 uerfarie turncth againe vpon vs, to our owne hindrance, as in 
 the fable of the Crocodile, whereof this name Crocodolite 
 proceedeth : for ir is faid^That the Crocodile hauing taken a • 
 way a child from his motber,rcafoned with her in this fort ; I 
 wil deliuer thee thy child igaine,if ihou wilt fay a troth:whe- 
 ther therfore fhal I dehucr him ornot?The mother anfwered, 
 Thou (halt not deliuer him, and therefore of right thou ough- 
 teft to deliuer him. No,faith he,I will not deliuer him, to the 
 intent it may fecme that thou haft faid troth;and though thou 
 haddeftfaid that I fliould deliuer him, yet I would not deli- 
 uer him indeed, for making thee a lyar. 
 
 3 A(Ti{raton,is akindeof cauclling, notconfifting of any 
 fure ground, as if a man did fay, that hee doth hold his peace, 
 or lyeth,or knoweth nothing;another by and by might cauill 
 thereof in this {on:Ergo,Hc that holdeth his peace,fpcaketb, 
 He that lyeth,faith truth,He that knoweth nothing,knoweth 
 fomething. 
 
 4 Pfeudomenon, isafalfe or lying kinde of candling, as 
 thus:The heauen couereth alt things : Ergo , it couereth it 
 felfe. Epimemdes, being a Candiot himfelfe, faid, That the 
 Candiotes were lyers; the queftion is, whether he laid true or 
 not; for though hee faid true, and that the Candiotes were 
 lyers, yet it is falfe, becaufe a Candiot faid it : Againe, if the 
 Candiotes be no lyers, nor Spimenides is a Iyer, then he is to 
 bebeleeued. A a 2 Hew 
 
igo 7befift < Booke 
 
 Hcvr Are the Tdtlaxts of tbefe captions Arguments to he found 
 cut? 
 
 TheFallaxes of all thefe kinds of captious Argumc mare 
 foone found out, if we confider well the Rules before taught, 
 touching the repugnances of Propofitions, as whether there 
 be any ambiguitie in the Termcs, and whether the felfe-frme 
 Termes in the repugnat parts haue refpect to one felfe-thing, 
 timc,or place,or not:it is good alio to confider the fubtfance, 
 quantitie,and qualitie of the Propofitions : for inthelaftex- 
 ample,this faying,Candiotes be lyers,is a Propofition indefi- 
 nite.and therefore is not of fuch force,as to fay,all Candiotes 
 be lyers, which Is an vniucrfall Propofition, for of particular 
 Premifles nothing rightly followeth. In the other examples 
 you fhal find that there is feme doubtfulnes in thcTermes,ha- 
 uing refpecvt either to diuers things, to diners times, or diuers 
 places,asto fay,Heholdeth his peace; when he fpcakethrHere 
 is doubtfulnefTe in theTermes,hauing refpect eith( r ro diuers 
 things, that is to fay, as well to thofe things, which he mea- 
 neth to keepe in filence,as to thofe words which hec vtteicth 
 by mouth : fo in this word, Suite, in the example of Protago* 
 *v#,was doubtfulnelTe,for that Protagoras meant fomc other 
 Suite, and not that which he hirafelfe commenced. 
 
 CHAP. XXVIII.. 
 Of Eaton tratim, 
 
 . ffat is Enumeration ? 
 
 Enumeration is a kind of Argumenr,whcre- 
 in many things being reckoned vp and denied, 
 one thing onely of BecefTitieremayneth to be 
 aflfirmed,.as thus : Sith thou haft this Horfe,ei- 
 ther thou didft buy him,or he came to thee by inheritance, or 
 hee was giucn thee, or bred at home with thee , or clfc thou 
 didll cake him from thine enemy in time of warre ; or if none 
 of thefe were, then thou muft needs fleale him : but thou nei- 
 ther boughteft him, ner he fell not ynto thee by inhericance, 
 
 MSI 
 
 
o/Logicfa 
 
 181 
 
 nor was giucn thee , nor bred vp at home with thee, nor yet 
 take . by thee from the enemy : it followeth therefore of ne« 
 ceffirie that thou haft (tolne hinv 
 
 When ts this ktni §f Argument to be confute A ? 
 
 When your Aduerfarie can prouc any neceffarie part to be 
 left out. 
 
 CHAP. XXIX. 
 Of afimfte Cottclufon. 
 
 Hat is ajimple Conclufon t 
 
 A flmpleConclufion is no other thing,but a 
 neceflary Enthymeme,in the which the Con- 
 fcqucntdoth ncceflarily follow the Antece- 
 dent , as thus : Shee hath had a childc : Erge^ 
 fhee hath layne with a man. 
 
 CHAP. XXX. 
 
 Of Subietlio*. 
 
 B*t id Subicftun ? 
 
 Subie&ion is a questioning kinde of Argu* 
 ment, in the which we confute eachqueftion 
 with a reafon immediatly following the fame, 
 as thus : How is this fellow become fowell 
 moneyed ? Had he any great Patrimonie left him ? No,for all 
 his Fathers lands were fold. Came there any inheritance to 
 him by difcent any othcrwife ? No/or he was disinherited of 
 al men.Came there any goods vnto him by Executorfliip^&c? 
 If then hee hath not beene enriched by any of thefehoneft 
 wayes, either he hatha golden Myne at home, orelfeheeis 
 come to thefe riches by fomevnlawfull meanes. Thisargu» 
 ment fayleth when any principall part is left out , a,nd there- 
 fore differeth not much from Enumeration before recited. 
 
 Aa 3 
 
 CHAP* 
 
i8z 
 
 Thefift < Book{ > &c. 
 
 CHAP. XXXI. 
 
 Of Oppofition, 
 
 Hat is Oppofition ? 
 
 Oppofition is a kind of Argumcnt,madc of 
 Repugnant parts, wherein wereuert from the 
 Oppofite of the firft Propofition, vntothe 
 fame Propofition againe , as thus : If I were 
 in the Citie at fuch time as this man was flaine in the Coun- 
 try, then I flue him not; this Propofition is nowafimplc 
 Conclufion, and may be made an Oppofition in this manner : 
 If I had beene in the Country at fuch time , as you fay , this 
 man was flaine, then you might well fufpeel me to haue flaine 
 him:butfith I was not there at that time, there is no caufe 
 therefore why youfhouldfufpe&me. 
 
 CHAP. XXXII. 
 Of Violation. 
 
 \ Hat is Violation ? 
 
 Violation is a kinde of Concluding , more 
 mecte to confute then to proue, whereby wee 
 fhew the reafon of our aduerfarie, to make for 
 vs, and not for him, as thus : it is not good to 
 marry a wife, becaufe that of marriage many times commcth 
 the lofle of children to our great forrow,yea,rather it is good 
 therefore to marry a wife , to get other children for our 
 comfort. Thus much touching the diuers kinds 
 of reafoning : now wee will treate of 
 Fallaxcs, or falfe Conclufions, 
 and fhew how to con - 
 fute them. 
 
 Here endetb the fift Booke of Legtcke. 
 
 THE 
 
i8$ 
 
 THE 
 
 S I X T BOOKE 
 
 OF LOGICKE. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Of Confutation. 
 
 Here be feme that make two kinds of Con- 
 futation , the one belonging to Per/on , the 
 other U Matter. Confutation of? erf on is 
 done either by taunting, rayltng,renAring 
 checke for cheekier by fcoming,andthat 
 either by words , or elfe by countenance, 
 gefiure and aU ion: which kinde of Confu- 
 tation, bee av.fe it belongeth rather to fcof- 
 fi»g,then to true order ofreafoning, I will leaue to jpeake thereof, 
 dealing only with that Confutation that belongeth to Matter, which 
 is two-fold, the one general!, the other Jpeciall: it isgentrall, when 
 wee affirme that the Argument faileth either in forme, in matter, 
 or in both. Againe , the generall Confutation is done three man- 
 ner of wayes, that is, either by denying the ConJecjuent,by making 
 diflinllton, or by inflame [that is to fay) by bringing in a contrarie 
 Example. 
 
 Shew when thefe three w ayes are to be vfed. 
 If the Argument faile in forme , then wee muft denic the 
 Confequent. 
 Cine Examples, 
 
 Discipline 
 
184- Tkefixt Boo\e 
 
 Difciplinc is nece(Tarie,but the Ceremonies of UW^/are 
 Discipline, therefore the Ceremonies of M»fes areneceflary: 
 here you muft denie the Confequent , becaufe that of mccre 
 particulars nothing followeth : and tobefhort, when any 
 Argument is made contrary to the rules of Figure and Mood 
 before taught, the Confequent is not 'good, and therefore to 
 be denyed, as here : Euery couetous man doth violate the 
 Lawes of liberalitie ; but cuery prodigall man doth violate 
 the Lawes of liberalitie ; therefore euery prodigall man is a 
 couetous man : This Syllogifme, being of the fecond Figure, 
 is made in Barbara f which Moode belongeth not to that Fi- 
 gure : But if the Argument faile in matter, that rs.when cither 
 one of the premises, or both are falfe , then it may be confu- 
 ted afwell by denying the falfe part, be it Maior or Minor, as 
 by vfing diftindtion : and to find out the falfeneffeof the mat- 
 ter, it is neceflary alwayes to hauerefpedt to the Maxims of 
 the places , from whence the proofe is fetched ; for they doe 
 {hew which Proportions arc true, and which are not ; as for 
 example in this Argument : No painted fpeech becommeth 
 Philofophers: but eloquence is painted fpeech : Ergo % Elo- 
 quence becommeth no Philofophers: Here the Maior is to be 
 denyed, becaufe it is a falfe definition : for the true definition 
 of eloquence is to fpeake wifely, aptly, adornedly, and to the 
 purpofe,and not to vfc painted words vainely : Againe,wh«- 
 fo worfhippeth God the Crcator,wor(hippeth the true God ; 
 the Turks worfhip Gcd the Creator: Ergo,the Turks worfhip 
 the true God : This Argument is to be denyed , becaufe the 
 Minor is falfe ; for no man can truely worfhip God the Crea- 
 tor, vnlefTe he worfhip alfo Ieiiis Chrift his Sonne, which the 
 Turks doc not, and therefore they worfhip a fayncd Idoll, 
 and not the true God* 
 
 When U difim ft ion to be vfed} 
 
 When either the words or matter is doubtfull. 
 Cjiuc examples of both. 
 
 All Verbs adiue doe fignifle action: but God vied this 
 Verbe A£tiuc, lndurabo , in faying , I will harden Pharaohs 
 heart :Ergo 3 GoddidhardenP/wv?^/ heart there difttn£ti- 
 
 on 
 
of Logic kg. 185 
 
 on is to be nude ; for Verbs adtiuc haue diuers fignifications, 
 according to the diuerfitics or* the Tongues wherein they are 
 vttered: for in the Hebrew Tongue, Verbs ailiue doe figni- 
 fie permiiTion or fufferancc, afvvell as adtion ; as thefe words, 
 I will harden Pharaohs heart (is as much to fay,) as I will fuf- 
 fer Pharaohs heart to be hardened } like wife, whereas we fay 
 in the Lords Prayer,Lcade vs not into temptation,is as much 
 to fay, as, Suffer vs not to be led into temptation. Againe, 
 ambiguitie may be in this mattrr,as thus:No finnes are heard 
 of God : but all men arc finners ; therefore no men arc heard 
 of God : here diftincTion is to be made betwixt penitent fin- 
 ners, and impenitent : for God will heare the penitent (in- 
 ner : although he will not heare the impenitent finner. 
 
 When is Confutation by instance vfed t 
 
 When the Argument, though it faile neither in forme, nor 
 matter , yet perhaps it is neither fo flrong , nor fo probable, 
 but that a ftronger and more probable may be made againft 
 it. 
 
 Giue example. 
 
 Whofo killeth any Embafladors in their ioumeying, doth 
 violate the Lawcs of Armes : but the French-men killed our 
 Embaflador iourneying to Spaine : Ergo, the French-men in 
 fo doing did violate the La wes of Armes : Here to the Maior 
 a man may anfwere by inftance , thus : The At htnians killed 
 the Embafladors of the LacedtmonUns , iourneying to the 
 King of Perjia , becaufe they went to procure his aide, to 
 deftroy the Citie of Athens : So like wife the Romanes did in- 
 tercept the Legates of Hannibal, going to the King of the 
 (Jlfacedonians for the like intent; and yet neither of thefe 
 people did thinke to breake the Lawes of Amies , by doing 
 that which foould preferue their State and Common-weale. 
 
 Bb CHAP. 
 
\S6 Tbe/ixt'Boo^ 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 Of Jpeciall Confutation* 
 
 Bat is JpcciaK Confutation ? 
 Speciall Confutation is, when we confute a- 
 ny falfc argument, by detecting and Shewing 
 the Fallax thereof, naming the Fallaxbyhis 
 proper name. 
 
 What order doth Aristotle obferut in treating tfjpe- 
 ciall Confutation f 
 
 lAriflotle firft trcateth in generall of all thofe things that 
 commonly appertayne to the difputations of learned men, as 
 firft he trcateth of anElench,which is afmuch to fay as repre- 
 henfion, then of Syllogifmcs, and of Difputation , andalfo 
 of the marks and ends of Sophiflrie, and whereto they tend, 
 Horv definetk he art Elench or Reprehenfion ? 
 Reprehenfion or Elench (faith he) is a Syllogifme, which 
 gathereth a conclusion cotrary to the affertion of the reipon- 
 dent, as if a man would defend Medea not to loue her childe^. 
 becaufe fhe killed it,another might reafon againtf him in this 
 manner : euery Mother loucth her child : but Medea is a Mo- 
 ther : Ergo , Medea loueth her child : the Conclufion of this 
 Syllogifme is contraric to the firft AfTertion:and note here by 
 the way, that there be two forts of Elenches,the one truc,and 
 the other falfe: it is faid to be true, when it rightly gathercth. 
 a contrarie conclufion to the refpondents aflertiomAnd falfe, 
 when it faileth in any part requifite to a true Elenchrof which 
 parts we (ball fpeake hereafter,when wc come to treate of the 
 Fallax,called Ignorance of the Elench, which is one of the fiue. 
 ends or marks vvherunto Sophillrie tendeth/or a true Elench 
 feemeth to belong vnto DialecYicall difputation , rather then 
 to Sophiliicall difputation. But now leauing to define a Syl- 
 logifme, becaufe it hath beene defined before, and therefore 
 not needfullhereagaineto be rehearfed , I will proceedeto 
 Difputation. 
 
 CHAP 
 
ofLogichf. 187 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Of Difftfttatio* : and bow manifold it is. 
 
 Ifputation is a contention about fome qucfti- 
 on taken in hand , either for finding out of 
 truth , or eife for excrcife fake , and there be 
 foure kinds of difputation, whereof the firft 
 is called Do6trinall,becaufe it appertayneth 
 to Science. 
 
 The fecond is called Dialeclicall, which belongeth to pro- 
 bable opinion. 
 
 The third is called Tcntatiue,which ferueth to try another 
 mans knowledge, in any kinde of Science. 
 
 The fourth is called Sophiftieall, which tendeth onely to 
 deceiue. 
 
 Gitte examples of all thefe foure kinds ? 
 
 The Doctrinal Difputation vfeth no other but Syllogifmes 
 Demonftratiue as this is, Whatfoeuer hath reafon, is capable 
 of learning ; but John hath reafon : Ergo , John is capable of 
 learning. Diale&icall Difputation vfeth onely probable Syl- 
 logifmes, as the former example of Medea, Euery Mother lo- 
 ueth her child j but Medea is a Mother : Ergo , Medea loueth 
 her child : againft this another probable argument may bee 
 made thus:Whofoeucr killcth her childjloueth not her child: 
 but Medea killed her child : Ergo, fhee loued not her childe. 
 Tcntatiue difputation vfeth fuch arguments as are made of 
 the fir ft common principles ofany fcicnce,'m which principles 
 whofo is ignorant, cannot be skilfull in that Science ; as if a 
 maa would profeffe Geometric, and know rot the definitions 
 ofa point, or prickeef aline,or fuperficics, or of fuch com- 
 mon Maxims , as thefe arc ; the whole is more then his part : 
 take cquall from equall,and cquall remain e 3 &c : {houId quick- 
 ly bewray his owne ignorance. 
 
 Sophifticall difputation vfeth nothing but deceitfull argu- 
 ments, or Fsllaxes, whereof there be thirtecne kinds hereafter 
 fetdowne: but firft I will fhew you which be the fiue Marks 
 and Ends of Sophiftrie. 
 
 Bb 2 CHAP. 
 
i£8 ThefixtToofy 
 
 chap. mi. 
 
 Of the fine Marks and Ends of 
 Sopbiftrie. 
 
 Ristoti. e faith , That the fraudulent dif- 
 pucation of the Sophitter, tendeth alwayes to 
 one of ihefe flue Ends or Marks; that is,either 
 ^Sf^^^Sm ky f° rce ofargument, to bring you into fome 
 ^^S&fiSwT a ^ ur< ^' tie > wn » cn nc callcth Elench; that is to 
 lay, a reprehenfion or rcproofc,or eife to make 
 you to confeffe that which is manifeltly falfe,or to grant fomc 
 Paradox , which is as much to fay as an opinion contrary to 
 all mens opinions : or to allow of incongruefpeech contraric 
 to the rules of Grammar, called in Latine, Solecifmus , or to- 
 admit fome vaine repetition, called in Latine, T^ugatio. 
 
 (jtue exr.myle of all ihefe fine Marks, 
 
 Of the firft Maikejet this beyour example:If in disputing 
 of Vertue, you haue perhaps granted, that the meditation of 
 Vertue doth make a man fad, the Sophifter will force you by 
 argument, to denie againe that which you before granted, 
 thus : All things that be contrarie, hauecontrarieeffe&s : 
 but it is proper to Vice to make the minde of man fad : Ergs, 
 Vertue maketh his minde glad : Thiskinde of reafoningis 
 more plainely taught before, when wee talked of Reduction 
 by impolTibilitie. 
 
 Of the fecondMarke^et this be your example: Euery Dog 
 hath power to barke; but there isacertayncStarre called the 
 Dog:Er£0,that Starrc hath power to barke.The Fallax of this 
 argument confifteth onely in the word Dogge, which is equi- 
 uoke, as fhall be declared more at large hereafter, when wee 
 come to fpeake of that Elench or Fallax. 
 
 Of the Paradox, which is the third Marke, let this be your 
 example : The Sophifter w ill make you to grant , that a rich 
 and happy Kii>g is wretched, by force of argument , thus: 
 Whofoeuer is fubicit to fm,is wretched: but all rich and hap- 
 py Kings are fiibie& to finne '.Ergo, ail rich and happy Kings 
 
 are 
 
of Logic fy. igp 
 
 are wretahed and miferablc : in this is alio a Fallax, becaufe 
 that happineiYe is fpoken herein two refpe£ts, for there is 
 worldly happineflV, and hcaucnly happineffe. 
 
 Of the fourth marke called incongruitie of fpecch , I can 
 hardly giuc y on any fit example in our natitie tongue,becaufe 
 that our Enghfh Adiecliucs doe not differ in Cale, Gender, 
 and Niimber,and therforelpray you content your felfe with 
 this Latinc example, for it is an eafier matter for an English- 
 man to fpeake falleLatine, thenfalfe Enghfh : theSophifler 
 ' will make you to allow of this falfe Latine,^/^/;^ ejtcandi- 
 W/^by force of argument, thus : Omrkhomo eft candid* ~s , at 
 mutter eft homo, ergo, muhereft candidusilhc Englifh v\ hereof 
 is thus : Euery man is white, but woman is man : Ergo, a wo- 
 man is white : here this word white in the Latineis of the 
 Mafculine gender, contrarie to the Rules of Grammar, but 
 this may be very well referred to the Fallax, called forme of 
 fpeech, hereafter declared. 
 
 Of the fift markc called Nugation, let this be your exam- 
 ple :The Sophifter will make you to allow of this vaine repe- 
 tition : Plato is learned, a man leained,by force of argument, 
 thus : Plato is learned, but Plato is a man learned : Eras, Plata- 
 is learned ; a man learned: here the premifles and the con- 
 clufion are all one thing, and therefore contrarie to the 
 Rules of Logicke. But leaning thefe things as fu- 
 perfluous, and in my iudgement fcruingto 
 fmall purpofe , if I may fo fay without 
 effence, I mindc therefore now 
 to returne to my matter 
 firft intended. 
 
 B b 3 CHAP. 
 
190 Thefixt ^Boo^e 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 How to confute all manner of Blenches, or Fallaxes, 
 whatfoeuer they be. 
 
 Very Fallax confifteth cither in words or ia 
 things : and of thofethat confift in wordes, 
 there arc in number fixe, and of others confi- 
 ning in things , there arc feuen, fo as in ail 
 there be thirteene, as I faid before. 
 Which be thofefixe that confift in words ? 
 Equiuocation, Amphibologie, or doubtfull fpeech, Con- 
 iun&ion, Diuifion, Accent, and Figure, or forme of fpeech. 
 Shi w what thefe FaRaxes be, and giue examples ? 
 I Equiuocation is, when the deceit confifteth in the doubt- 
 
 EftbiocAtig. fulnefle of ibme one word,hauing diucrs fignifications,as for 
 example : Euery Doggc is a fenfible body , there is a certaywe 
 Starre called a Dogge : Brgo t That Starre is a fenfible body : 
 here the Conclufion is to be denyed , becaufe this word Dog 
 hath diucrs fignifications: another example,the Prophet faith 
 that there is no euill in the Citie, but God doth it ; but there 
 be horrible euils in the Citie : Ergo, God is the Author of e- 
 uill: the Conclufion is to be denyed,becaufe in the Maior this 
 word euill fignifieth punifhment, and in the Minor it fignifi- 
 cth finne : another example, Whofoeuer loueth Chrift, obfer- 
 ueth his Word,and is beloucd of the Fathenbut no body that 
 breaketh the Law, obferueth the Word of Chrift ; therefore 
 no body is bcloued of the Father.-here the Maior is doubtfull, 
 becaufe this voice, Word , may be token cither for the word 
 of the Law,or elfe for the word of the Gofpell,which the A- 
 poftles did eucr kcepe, as Chrift himfelfe faith, and therefore 
 they were beloucd of the Father , and fo confequently euery 
 true Chrifii3n,that doth keepe the pure doctrine of Chrift, is 
 beloued of the Fathercbut the word of the Law faith, that e- 
 uery one is curfed that abideth not in all. 
 2 Amphibologie or doubtfull fpeech, is, when forne whole 
 
 Arnphbolo^, fentence 
 
of Logic {e. rpi 
 
 fentenceisdoubtfull, and may be interpreted diuerswayes, 
 as the Oracle of Apollo, in faying, that C re If m P a ^ n g the Ri- 
 ucr of Halls , (hall ouer-throw a great Empire:by which O- 
 racle was meant , that heefhould ouer-throw his owneEm- 
 pire,and not the Perfian Empire,which by wrong conftruing 
 that Oracle, he hoped to fubdue. 
 
 Compofitionor Coniuncfton, is the ioyning together of , 
 things that are to be feuered. As for example, two and three Ccmfefnio. 
 bceuenandoddc, butfiue makcth two and three, therefore 
 jSue is both euen and odde : which kinde of argument is to be 
 denyed, becaufethofe things are ioyned together, which 
 ought to be feuered. 
 
 Diuifion is, when things are feuered, which fhould be ioy- a 
 ned together, as, all the wife men of Greece are feuen : Solon Diuifit*. 
 2nd Parian derate wife men ofGreecc,therefore Solon and Pe- 
 riander are feuen : here the Confequent is to be denyed , be- 
 caufe Solon and ^eriander are feuered from the reft whereun- 
 to they fhould be ioyned. 
 
 The Fallax of Accent is , when words are not rightly and y 
 fimply pronounced, as when wee doe adde to, or take from a Acmtm,. 
 word, any afpiration, letter, or fyllable, and thereby alter the 
 true fignification thereof, as this Latine word, Ha^jfignify- 
 ing a Swines cote, being pronounced without H, doth figni- 
 fie an Altar. In Englifh let this be your example, Eucry Hare 
 is fwift on foot, but this is a Hayer, (that is to fay) a cloth to 
 drieMalt, therefore it is fwift on foot. Of like fort is this 
 old icft of a Maftcr,that faid to his feruant:Go,heate this Ca- 
 pons leggcrwho immediately did eateitrthen his Matter be- 
 ing angric,faid, I bade thee heat it, with an h : no Sir (faid the 
 Seruant) I did eate it with Bread. Likewife, this Fallax may 
 chance by not obferuing the right quanti tie of fyllables,in a- 
 ny word, as pofulw hauing o, long, is a Popple tree, but ha- 
 uing o, fhort, it fignifieth a people. Or when a word v^d Jn- 
 terrogatiuely, is made to hauc an Affirmatiue fignification,as 
 for example : Caipbas faid tc Chrift, Art thou a King ? Ergo, 
 HeconfciTedChrift to be a King. Or when a word pronoun- 
 ced ironioufly,is turned to good earnsft,in fpeaking one thing 
 
 and. 
 
ipz 'Tbe/ixt'Boofy 
 
 tionis. 
 
 and meaning another, as thus: My Mafterfaid, Comehithcr, 
 you honeft manrErg^He faid that I was an honeft man; when 
 indeed he called him Knaue. 
 6 The Fallax of forme or manner of fpeech may be diucrs 
 
 form Qrx' V vayes , as firft, when words are falfly fuppofed to be like ei- 
 ther in fignification,inCafe,or in Gendcr,or to be of one felfc 
 Predicament jbecaufe they are like in termination's Poetdjn 
 Englifh a Poet , and Potma t in Englifa a Poefie or Pocticall 
 worke : thefe two words, becaufe they end beth in * : Ergo, 
 they are both of the Mafculine Gender. Alfo coloured and 
 numbred arc like in termination : Ergo, they are of one fclfe 
 Predicament , and yet the firft belongeth to the Predicament 
 of Qualitie, and the other to Quantitie. Secondly, when a 
 word is vfed in one fclfe argument/omethne according to his 
 proper fignification, and fometime as a terme of Arte : as for 
 example, God is euery-where: euery-where is an Aduerbe, 
 therefore God is an Aduerbe. A Moufe cateth chccfc, but a 
 Moufe is a fyllable ; Ergo , a fyllabie eateth checfe. Here 
 Moufe in the Maior hath his proper fignification , and in the 
 Minor is vfed as a terme of Arte : and the like is to be faid of 
 the word Euery-where in the firft example. Thirdly, when a 
 word hath not his proper fignification, or is not vfed accor- 
 ding to the true phrafe of fpeech wherin it is vttercd,as thus: 
 Whatfocucr thou haft not loft,thou haft ftil,but thou haft loft 
 no Homes : Ergo, thou haft Homes. Here this word,to lofc, 
 hath not his proper fignification, for wee are faid to lofe pro- 
 perly that which wee had , and not that which wee neuer 
 had. And finally, this Fallax is called the common 
 refuge and receptacle of all fuch kinde of So- 
 phiftrie. Hitherto of the Fallaxcs in 
 words, now of the Fallaxes ia 
 things. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
ofLogickf. jp} 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Of the FaHaxesin things. 
 
 F thcfe Fallaxes there be feuen kindes (that is 
 to fay) Fallacia Accidentia > a diB» [ecundum 
 quid, addttitm Simpliciter , Ignoratio Elenchi, 
 Petitioprincipif , Fal/acia Confequentu ', Catifa 
 pro non ca#f* s FlurA interrogate fro vno refpon- 
 [h\ Which may beEnglifhcd thus: TheFal- 
 lax of the Accident,the Fallax of fpecch refpe£tiue,in ftead of 
 fpeech abfolute,ignorance of the Elcnch,Petition of the prin. 
 ciple,a caufe that is not the caufe indeed,and many queftions 
 comprehended in one. 
 
 Define wh/it thefe be, andgiue examples. 
 FalUcia u4ccidentts 3 mzy be diuers wayes: as firft,when any - a y - 'a '- 
 thing belonging only to the fubftance of fome thing, is attri- fatis. 
 buted alfo to fome accident of the faid fubftance, and contra- 
 riwife as thus: Whatfoeuer thou haft bought,thou haft eaten, 
 but thou haft bought raweflefti: £rgo, thou haft eaten rawc 
 flefh : here the Confequent is to be denyed, becaule the Ma- 
 ior hath refpe6t to the fubftance , and the Conclusion to the 
 qualitie. Another example, What I am,thou art not,but I am 
 a man: Ergo, thou art none. Here in this the Maiorhathre- 
 fpe£t to the qualitie, and the Conclufion to the fubftance. Se- 
 condly, when Accidents are not rightly ioyned together, as 
 when the qualities of the bodie are joyned with the qualities 
 of the minde: as Homer is a Poet, 2nd Homer is blindc: 
 Ergo, Homer is a blindc Poet : heerc the Conclufion is to be 
 denyed,becaufe to be blindc,and to be a Poct,are diuers qua- 
 lities, whereof the one belongeth to the minde, and the other 
 to the body , and therefore are not rightly joyned together. 
 Thirdly, as (UlteUntthon faith,) when an accidcntall caufe 
 is made a principall caufe,as thus: Eltis was an holy Prophct 3 
 but Elias was clad with Camels haire : Ergo, I being clad 
 with Camels hayre, am a holy Prophet. Here the Conclufion 
 
 Cc is 
 
ipq. The fat ^Boo^e 
 
 is to be denied,bccaufe to be clad with Camels haire,was not 
 the caufe of Elias holincffe. But me thinkes that this and fuch 
 like examples doe belong rather to the Fallax offoufapro »oh 
 ci«/4,(\vhereof\ve fhall fpeakc hereafter)then to the Fallax of 
 the Accident. 
 2 The Fallax A ditto fecundum quid ad dittum Simplicitcr, 
 
 Pifiumfecun- chanceth when wee goe about to make a thing to fceme abfo- 
 dum qaid. lute,that isfpoken in fome refpecl: , orto bee in all, when it is 
 
 but in part , as a Moore hath white teeth : Ergo a Moore is 
 white. Againe, it may bee in refpec},by reafon of time, place, 
 perfon, comparifon, and fuch like. Of time, as thus : I faw 
 /<^»yefterday,butl faw him not today: Ergo y ld\& fee him, 
 and not fee him. Of place thus: It is not good to buy and fell 
 in the Church : Ergo, it is not good to buy and fell. Of perfon 
 thus: AMagiftratemay kill aThicfc: Ergo , euery man may 
 kill a Thiefe. Of comparifon , thus : Riches are not good to 
 him that cannot vfe them '.Ergo, Riches are not good. 
 3« Hauing now to fpeake of the Fallax, called the Ignorance 
 
 Igvoraf.o Ekfj-, c f thcElench: I thinke good tocall againe to your remem- 
 brance the definition of anElench before briefly fetdowne, 
 which is a Syllogifme rightly gathering a Condufion contra- 
 ry to the affertion ofthe refpondent, which contrarietie con- 
 fifteth of foure principall points or refpe&s , whereof, if any 
 be wanting, then the contrarietie is not perfect. 
 TVhuh bethnfefourefojnts ? 
 
 Firft, that it be to one felfe thing. Secondly, in one felfe re- 
 fpec't. Thirdly , in one felfe manner. And fourthly, in or at 
 one felfe time:for if you be deceiued at any time by fome falfc 
 Elench , ill thinking that it rightly gathereth a Conclufion 
 meere contrary to your aflertion, when it is not fo indeed, by 
 reafon that it faileth in fome part requifite and incident to a 
 true Elench : then it may be rightly faid that you are deceiued 
 by ignorance of the Elench, which Fallax, as Ar'tftotle fayth, 
 comprehendeth almoft all others , and therefore hee maketh a 
 long and obfeure definition of an Elench, rehearfing all the 
 . particularities thereof, nothing apt to bevttercd in our Eng- 
 lifhToncue. 
 
 Ttt 
 
of Logic{e. 195 
 
 Tet I pray you to giue examples «f the foure chiefe points before 
 mentioned. 
 
 Ofthefirft, let this bee your example : foure is double to 
 two, but not to three : Ergo, foure is double and not double; 
 this is not to one felfe thing. Of the fecond thus : This piece 
 of timber is double in length to that piece, but it is not dou- 
 ble to the fame in breadth : Ergo, it is to one felfc thing, both 
 double, and not double to one fclfe thing, but not in one felfe 
 refpeit. Of the third thus: This Prince ruleth mightily , but 
 not mercifully : Ergo, he ruleth, and not ruleth ; this is not in 
 like manner. Of the fourth thus : I law lohn yefterday , but 
 not this day : Ergo, I faw him, and faw him not ; this is not in 
 one felfe time. And all thefe foure wayes in mine opinion arc 
 comprehended in the fecond point; which is when any thing 
 isTpoken not abfolutely, but in diuers refpe£ts : wherefore,it 
 differeth not much from the Fallax of fpeech refpedtiue before 
 declared, fauingthat this Fallax is more generall, and com- 
 prehendeth more kinds of Fallaxes then that doth. 
 
 Petition of the Principle is,when the Antecedent doth not 4 
 
 proue the confequent, which chanceth moft commonly three pctttl6 F in ~ 
 manner of wayes: that is, eyther when theproofeis as little ™' 
 kn©wne,as the thing that is to be proued. Secondly,when the 
 proofe is lefieknownc then the thing tobcproUed. Thirdly, 
 when the proofe, and the thing to be proued, doe not differ, 
 but is all one fpeech, fignifying one felfe thing, called of the 
 Greckes TautoUgi*. 
 
 Gins example of thefe shree wayes. 
 Of the firh 1 thus : The Sunne moueth not, but frandeth flill 
 in the middeft of hcauen, giuing light to all the world : Ergo, 
 the earth is moueable ; or thus : The Heauens are not made of 
 Elementall matter, fubieft to corruption : Ergo, the Heauens 
 are incorruptible. Heerc in both thefe examples the Antece- 
 dent is as doubtfull as the Confequent, and therefore proo- 
 ueth nothing. Of the fecond way thus: Euery fenfrblebodie 
 fometime lleepcth : Ergo, Man fometime fleepeth. Heere it is 
 more to be doubted whether all ft nfiblc Bodies, all Beaftes, 
 Fowles andFifhes, doe fometimesfleepe or not, then whe- 
 
 Cc 2 ther 
 
\p6 TbeJixt'Boofy 
 
 ther man doth fometimc lleepe : for it is an eafier matter to 
 know the nature and propcrcie of one fpcciall kinde , then of 
 all, ormanykindes. Of the third way thus; M» is learned: 
 Srgo, lohn is learned.The foule doth Hue euer : Ergo, it is ira- 
 mortall. 
 5. The Fallax of the Confequent chanceth two manner of 
 
 Tattacia Confe- W ayes,that j Sj cythcr when we thinke the Confequent to be 
 querns. conucrtible with the Antecedent , but it is not fo in deede, 
 
 or elfe when we thinke, that vpon the contrary of the Ante- 
 cedent, the contrary of the Confequent muft needesalfo 
 follow. 
 
 Give examples of both thefe Yttyes. 
 This isaman:£r£0,it is a fenfible body: now if I would 
 hereof by conuerfion conclude thus: it is a fenfible body:£r- 
 go, it is a man:this were no good Confequent; for euery fenfi- 
 ble body is not a man. Likewife,when it rayncth, the ground 
 is wet: Ergo,vfhen the ground is wet, it rayneth ; for thefe 
 fpeeches are not conucrtible. Ofthefecond way thus : It is a 
 man : Ergo, It is a fenfible body. It is no man : Ergo, it is no 
 fenfible body. Hccre you fee that this Propofition, It is no 
 man, is the contrary of the firft Antecedcnt ? which faith, It is 
 a man. Of which contrary , the contrary of the Confequent 
 doth not neccflfarily follow : for though it bee no man, yet it 
 may bee fome other fenfible bodie. This Fallax comprehen- 
 deth all fuch falfe Arguments , as doc not obferue the Rules 
 of right and true Confequcnts before giuen. 
 
 6 The Fallax of nov cstufa pro caufa, is , when that thing is 
 Cditfapronon made to bethecaufeoftheConclufion,which isnotthecaufc 
 caitfa. j n c j ee( j e . as wine is naught , becaufe it will make a man 
 
 drunke. Of which drunkennefie, Wine is not the caufe , but 
 the intemperance of the nun, and his immoderate vfe thereof; 
 for many things that be good of themfcluesmty beabufed, 
 yea, euen the libcrtieoftheGoipcll, and yet the doctrine of 
 the Gofpell is not caufe thereof, but the malice of man abu- 
 
 7 fing the fame. 
 
 Vluraimerroga- Jhe f eU cnth and laft Fallax, is when vnaduifedly, and 
 fpZ™ YC ~ without vfing any diftin£Hon, youmakeananfweretomany 
 
 queftions, 
 
ofLogickg. 197 
 
 queftions, as though they were but one ; as for example,The 
 Sophifter, feeing two men (landing together, whereof the 
 oneisblindc, and the other hath his fight, will aske you, 
 perhaps,whether they fec,ornot;vvhereunto if you anfwer di- 
 rectly, ey ther yea, or no, you are by and by taken : for if you 
 fay that they fee,thenyou grant that the blind man alfo feeth,- 
 and if you fay, that they doe not fee,then you grant, that hee 
 which feeth, is blinde ; but if you anfwerc, that the one feeth, 
 and the other not , youfhall by fuch diftinftioneafily auoyd 
 the Sophifters cauillation : for diuers queftions huddled vp in 
 one, doe alwayes require diuers anfweres, And thus I end, 
 with the order of confuting all falfeElenches , andFal- 
 laxes; the knowledge whereof is very neceflary, 
 for the maintenance of the truth, which God 
 loueth, who is the fountaine of all trutb, 
 yea, and very truth it fclfe ; to whom 
 be all honour,glory and prayfe, 
 world without end, 
 
 FINIS. 
 

 ' 
 
A 
 
Jl 
 
1